Omron Programmable Terminals Nt631 Users Manual V063 E1 03

NT631C to the manual aa37ab59-a39a-4337-8589-010d585574ea

2015-01-24

: Omron Omron-Programmable-Terminals-Nt631-Users-Manual-332574 omron-programmable-terminals-nt631-users-manual-332574 omron pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 315

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Cat. No. V063-E1-03

NT631 and NT631C

Programmable Terminals

Setup Manual

NT631 and NT631C
Programmable Terminals
Setup Manual
Revised September 2007

POW

RUN

Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.

!DANGER

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.

!WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.

!Caution

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.

OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to
an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, however, in some Programming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller.

Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
1,2,3...

1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.

 OMRON, 2000
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvi

General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvi

Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvi

SECTION 1
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1

Role and Operation of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2

Functions of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-4

Communications with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-5

Communications Using Memory Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-6

Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2
Preparing for Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1

Method for Connection to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2

Names and Functions of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3
Hardware Settings and Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

Connecting to the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3

Connecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4

Connecting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-5

Using a Memory Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4
Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port. . . . . . . . . .

4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port . . . . . .

5-1

Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 6
System Menu Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6-1

System Menu Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129

6-2

Starting the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129

6-3

Operation Modes and the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

130

6-4

Memory Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

135

vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
6-5

Operations in the System Installer Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

144

6-6

Transmitting the Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

149

6-7

Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches . . . . . . . . .

152

6-8

Starting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

163

6-9

Various System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

164

6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

184

6-11 System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

187

6-12 Programming Console Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

214

6-13 Device Monitor Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

220

6-14 Version Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

223

SECTION 7
Troubleshooting and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
7-1

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

226

7-2

Responding to Displayed Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

229

7-3

Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

235

7-4

Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

242

Appendices
A

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

245

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

255

Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

259

Transporting and Storing the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

265

Making the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

267

Making the Cable for Connecting a PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

271

Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

273

Making the Cable for Connection to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

275

Relationship between system program and hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

277

Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

281

Option List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

287

Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

viii

About this Manual:
This manual describes connecting the NT-series NT631 and NT631C Programmable Terminals (PTs)
to a PLC (Programmable Controller) or other host and peripheral devices, and the settings required for
communications and applications. It includes the sections described below.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before
attempting to install and operate the Programmable Terminal.
Section 1 provides fundamental information about the functions and features of the PTs, types of connection, communications methods, etc. This information will enable you to understand the applications
of the PTs.
Section 2 describes the connection methods that are possible with the PTs, and the functions of the
parts of PTs, as the required knowledge before connecting to the host and to the peripheral devices.
Section 3 describes the settings of the PTs and methods for connection to peripheral devices.
Section 4 describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-232C port of the PT.
Section 5 describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-422A/485 port of the PT.
Section 6 describes the operation of the System Menu, focusing on the procedure to start the PT.
Functions that are convenient when using the PT and those that are useful for system maintenance
are also explained here.
Section 7 describes the action to take when errors occur in the PT, and how to carry out maintenance
and inspection to prevent the occurrence of errors.
The Appendices provide specifications, dimensions, procedures for using an RS-232C/RS-422A
Adapter, procedures for transporting and storing the PT, information on cable preparation, information
on the relationship between the system program and hardware, and product lists.

!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section
in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and
related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.

Related Manuals:
Related manuals are listed below.
The @ symbol at the end of the catalog number is the revision number.
Connecting and Setting Up the Programmable Terminal
• NT631 and NT631C PT Setup Manual (V063-E1-@, this manual)
This manual describes connecting the Programmable Terminals to a host and peripheral devices and
settings required for communications and applications.
The functions and actual operating methods for the NT631 and NT631C PTs are provided in the Reference Manual (V064-E1-@).
Programmable Terminal Functions and Operation
• NT31/31C/631/631C PT Reference Manual (V064-E1-@)
This manual is used for any of the following PTs: NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C. It describes
screen configurations, part functions, host control methods, and other application information.
PT connection and setup procedures are described in the NT631 and NT631C PT Setup Manual
(V063-E1-@).
Creating and Transferring Screen Data, and Installing the System Program
• NT-series Support Tool for Windows Ver. 4.@ Operation Manual (V061-E1-@)
The screens displayed on the NT631 and NT631C PTs are created with the Support Tool and transferred to the PT. This manual describes how to create and transfer screen data. It also describes how
to download a system program to a PT using the System Installer.
The NT-series Support Tool for Windows is normally referred to as merely the Support Tool.
Connecting to Controllers Not Made by OMRON
• PLC Connection Manual (V042-E1-@)
The NT631 and NT631C PTs can be connected to controllers in the following series: Mitsubishi A
Series and FX Series. This manual describes the connection and setup methods for these controllers.
The NT-series Support Tool for Windows Version 4.@ is required to connect the NT631 and NT631C
PTs to these controllers.
• NT31/NT631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual (V060-E1-@)
The NT631 and NT631C PTs can be connected to controllers in the following series: Allen-Bradley
SLC 500 Series, GE Fanuc 90-20 and 90-30 Series, and Siemens S7-300 and S7-400 Series. This
manual describes the connection and setup methods for these controllers.

Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.

Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.

LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.

Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND
INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.

PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.

xii

Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.

PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.

ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.

xiii

xiv

PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Terminal.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable
Terminal. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate
a Programmable Terminal.
1
2
3

Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvi
xvi
xvi

Intended Audience

Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.

General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for using the Programmable Terminal. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this
manual close at hand for reference during operation.

!WARNING It is extremely important that Programmable Terminals and related devices be
used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially
in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying Programmable Terminals to the above-mentioned applications.

!WARNING Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where
danger to human life or serious damage is possible, or for emergency switch
applications.

Safety Precautions
Read these safety precautions carefully and make sure you understand them
before using the Programmable Terminal so that you can use it safely and correctly.

Safety Conventions and their Meanings
This operation manual uses the following conventions and symbols to indicate
cautions, warnings, and dangers in order to ensure safe use of the NT631/
631C.
The cautions, warnings, and dangers shown here contain important information related to safety. This instructions in these cautions, warnings, and dangers must be observed.
The conventions used and their meanings are presented below.

xvi

Safety Precautions

!WARNING Indicates information that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or
serious injury.
!Caution Indicates information that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or
minor injury, damage to the product, or faulty operation.

WARNING
Do not attempt to take the unit apart and do not touch any
internal parts while the power is being supplied. Doing either
of these may result in electrical shock.

WARNING
Switch OFF the NT631C power before replacing the
backlight. Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock.

xvii

Safety Precautions

xviii

SECTION 1
General
This section provides fundamental information about the functions and features of the NT631/NT631C, types of
connection, communications methods, etc. This information will enable you to understand the applications of the
NT631/NT631C.
1-1

1-2

1-3

1-4

1-5

1-6

Role and Operation of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1-1

Operation of an NT631/NT631C at an FA Production Site. . . . . . .

1-1-2

Operations of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Functions of the NT631/NT631C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2-1

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2-2

Comparison between NT631 and NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2-3

Comparison between NT620S/NT620C/NT625C and NT631/NT631C

1-2-4

Principal Functions of NT631/NT631C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2-5

Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3-1

Peripheral Devices That Can Be Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3-2

Connecting to the Host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Communications with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-4-1

Direct Connection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-4-2

Host Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-4-3

NT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-4-4

Connecting to Other Companies’ PLCs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Communications Using Memory Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-5-1

Memory Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-5-2

Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link . . . . . .

1-5-3

Memory Link Online Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 1-1

Role and Operation of the NT631/NT631C

1-1

Role and Operation of the NT631/NT631C
The NT631/NT631C is a sophisticated display unit (Programmable Terminal)
which automatically displays information and can also be used for operations
when necessary. The following gives a general description of the role and
operation of the NT631/NT631C for those using a programmable terminal
(PT) for the first time.

1-1-1

Operation of an NT631/NT631C at an FA Production Site

Production Line Status
Monitoring

The NT631/NT631C displays real-time information about the system and
equipment operating status, etc. Its power of expression is enhanced by
graphs and other visuals, making the displays easy to understand.

Directions to Workers on
the Shop Floor

The NT631/NT631C warns of system or equipment failures and prompts the
appropriate remedial action.

Alarm
Assembly line B
Positioning pin
is defective. Line stopped.
Check the following.
1. Defective pin L3
2. Position of dog M2
3. Mounting of photosensor P5

Panel Switch Functions

Setting touch switches on the NT631/NT631C allows workers to use the
NT631/NT631C as an operating panel; the results of the operations are transmitted to the host.
Electroplating control
Transport

Electr.
head

Wash.
head

Corr. prv.
head

Electrolyte

Wash

Corr.
prv.fluid

Clamp

Unclamp

Adv.
Int. stop
Rev.

Section 1-1

Role and Operation of the NT631/NT631C

1-1-2

Operations of the NT631/NT631C

Displays Screens

The information to be displayed (screen data) can be created on a computer
using the Support Tool and stored in the NT631/NT631C. The screen data
can be displayed on the NT631/NT631C in response to instructions from the
host or touch switch operation.
Host

The screen data designated by
instructions from the host or touch
switch operation is displayed.

Receives Data from a Host

The NT631/NT631C can be connected to the host by a host link or NT link
and receive necessary data from the host.
Host Link, NT link

Sends Data to a Host

Host

Data input using the touch panel (switch ON/OFF statuses, numeric values,
character strings) can be transmitted to the host.
Host
Touch panel
ON/OFF information, numeric
data, etc.

Screen Data

The screen data to be displayed on the NT631/NT631C can be created on a
personal computer using the Support Tool. Connect the NT631/NT631C to
the personal computer with an RS-232C cable and transmit the screen data to
the NT631/NT631C.
Create screen data.
RS-232C

Personal
computer
(Support Tool)

Screen data

When the host is connected at serial port A,
the personal computer is only connected
when communicating screen data between
the NT631/NT631C and Support Tool.

Section 1-2

Functions of the NT631/NT631C

1-2

Functions of the NT631/NT631C
The NT631/NT631C has the following features.

1-2-1

Features

Slim Body

• High-performance in a low-profile body (50 mm or less in the panel*).
• The communications cable connectors are housed in the PT so that they
do not protrude from the PT.
* When mounted in a panel of the recommended thickness (page 32).

Construction Best Suited
to the FA Environment

• The display panel is provided with a high-contrast monochrome EL display for the NT631-ST211@-EV2, an STN color LCD display with backlight for the NT631C-ST141@-EV2, and a TFT color LCD high-definition
display for NT631C-ST153@-EV3.
• The backlight unit and battery can be replaced at the operation site. (The
backlight for the NT631C-ST153@-EV3, however, cannot be replaced by
the user.)
• Protection equivalent to oil-proof IP65*, and waterproof structure equivalent to the NEMA4 standard*.
* The panel may not be usable in environments where it is exposed to oil
for long periods.
640 dots

POWER

RUN

480 dots

Wide angle of visibility

Touch Switch Operation

Contrast and brightness are adjustable by touch switch operations (for
NT631C-ST141@-EV2 only).

Compatibility with Other
PTs

• There is upward compatibility between the NT631/NT631C and the following models for screen data and user programs: NT11S, NT20S, NT30,
NT30C, NT31, NT31 NT600S, NT610G, NT610C, NT620S, NT620C,
NT625C. (After being read to the Support Tool, screens must be modified
in accordance with the screen size. Depending on the function used, partial modification of programs may also be necessary. For details on the
compatibility of screen data, refer to the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C
Programmable Terminal Reference Manual and the NT-series Support
Tool Operation Manual.
• The dimensions of the panel cut-out to accommodate the NT631/NT631C
are the same as for the NT625C.

Functions of the NT631/NT631C
Two Ports Featured as
Standard:

Section 1-2

Port A for Common Use by Support Tool/Host and Port B for Exclusive
Use by the Host
• Communications with the host is possible via another port while connected to the Support Tool.
• Reading bar code data from a bar code reader is possible via another port
while communicating with the host.

Rapid System Program &
Screen Data Changes
Possible Using a Memory
Unit.

• Installing a Memory Unit (type NT-MF261) on the rear of the NT631/
NT631C makes it easy to write screen data into the NT631/NT631C on
site. This enables a rapid response to setup changes.
• NT631/NT631C can store a system program into a Memory Unit. This
enables the system to handle more flexible setups.

Screen Data Check
Function

Screen data can be checked simply by operations at the NT631/NT631C system menu, without connecting up to the Support Tool.

Large Increase in
Maximum Number of
Registered Elements

The number of elements that can be registered on one screen has been considerably increased, making it possible to create more expressive screens.
For details, refer to Display Restrictions in Appendix A Specifications of the
NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.

Binary Data can be Read
to/Written from the Host

It is now possible to write binary data stored in words at the host directly to the
NT631/NT631C. This makes data conversion by a program at the host unnecessary, reducing the load on the host.

Character Display Using
High Definition Fonts

Any quadrupled characters are displayed with a 32 dot high-definition font.

Simple Version Upgrades

By using the system installer supplied with the Support Tool (Type NTZJCAT1-EV4), the system program at the NT631/NT631C can be changed
easily from a personal computer.

Complies with
International Standards

The NT631/NT631C meets UL/CSA standards and EC directives.

Compatible with Other
Vendors’ Devices

Compatible with Sequencers in the following series: Mitsubishi A-series (Calculator Link) and FX-series (Programming Console), Allen-Bradley SLC 500
Series, GE Fanuc 90-20 and 90-30 Series, and Siemens S7-300 and S7-400
Series. Specialized system programs can be installed that allow the NT631/
NT631C to be controlled from other companies’ Sequencers.

Multiple Windows

Up to 3 windows can be displayed simultaneously in the normal screen. A 9word window control area has been allocated to the host; the contents of
these 9 words can be changed from the Host to open, close, and move windows.

High-speed 1:N NT Link

The V2 versions are compatible with the high-speed 1:N NT Link as well as
the earlier standard 1:N NT Link.

Additional Mathematical
Functions

Operands (values referenced by formula) can be registered to allow the PT to
perform calculations automatically and write the results of those calculations
to numeral memory tables or words in the host.

Functions of the NT631/NT631C

Section 1-2

Device Monitor Function

The new device monitor function can be used to change the PLC’s operating
mode or display/change values in the PLC’s memory areas. The present values (PVs) of several words can be listed with the device monitor.

Interlock Function

PT operations and inputs can be disabled from the PLC if interlock bits have
been allocated in the PLC for the corresponding PT touch switches, numeric
inputs, or string inputs.

Improved Lamp/Touch
Switch Labels

The following displays can be performed with lamp or touch switch labels:
• Display several lines of labels.
• Switch the display between different labels when OFF and ON.
• Display the numeral memory table contents as labels.
• Display the string memory table contents as labels.

NT30/NT30C and NT620S/
NT620C/NT625C
Emulation

The word configuration of the PT status control area and PT status notify area
can be set to emulate those of the NT30/NT30C or NT620S/NT620C/
NT625C; this mode is called NT30/620 compatible mode.
When the PT is operating in NT30/620 compatible mode, it will be equivalent
to an NT30/NT30C or NT620S/NT620C/NT625C in the functions listed below.
The PT retains full V2 functionality in all functions other than the ones listed
below. Refer to Appendix C in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual for more details.
• Word configuration and functions of the PT status control area and PT
status notify area
• Image/library codes
• Insertion of image/library data into character strings

Additional CS/CJ-series
Data Areas Accessible

Data areas in CS/CJ-series PLCs that were previously inaccessible can be
accessed. The data areas listed below can be accessed (read/written).
All banks in the EM area, timer completion flags (TU), counter completion
flags (CU), Work areas (WR), Task flags (TK), and the HR area.

Recipe Function

You can set the data (numeric values) for multiple words in record units using
the tabular elements on the PT screen, and write these settings in a single
operation to words on the host (i.e., PLC or PT memory) using a touch switch
operation on the PT Unit. Also, multiple words of numeric data can be read
from the host in one operation. In this way, groups of parameter settings can
be edited at the PT Unit, and written to or read from the host.

Adjusting Contrast and
Brightness During PT
Operation

You can display the brightness and contrast adjustment screen using either
the touch switch or commands from the host, even while the PT is in operation.

Section 1-2

Functions of the NT631/NT631C

1-2-2

Comparison between NT631 and NT631C
Two NT631 models — the NT631, which is capable of versatile graphic displays (EL display, yellow), and the NT631C, which is also capable of color display — are available. The differences between the NT631 and NT631C are
tabled below:
Function
Type

NT631-ST211@-EV2
NT631-ST211-EV2 (Beige)
NT631-ST211B-EV2 (Black)

NT631C-ST141@-EV2
NT631C-ST141-EV2 (Beige)
NT631C-ST141B-EV2 (Black)

NT631C-ST153@-EV3
NT631C-ST153-EV3 (Beige)
NT631C-ST153B-EV3 (Black)

Display
panel

Monochrome EL display

STN color LCD display
(with white backlight)

TFT color LCD display
(with white backlight)

Beige and black are the front panel colors of each NT631/NT631C types.

Section 1-2

Functions of the NT631/NT631C

1-2-3

Comparison between NT620S/NT620C/NT625C and NT631/
NT631C
Item

NT620S/NT620C/NT625C

NT631/NT631C

Support Tool used
DIP switches

NT-ZJCAT1-EV4 or NT-ZA3AT-EV2
On rear of PT

Use of Memory Unit
RS-232C interface

Not possible
Possible
Connector (9-pin) also used as port for - Serial port A connector (also used for screen
screen data transfer.
data transfer, 9-pin)
- Serial port B connector (for host communications only, 9-pin)

RS-422A/485 interface

NT620S/NT620C: None
NT625C: Terminal block (DIP-switch
selectable between RS232C and RS422A/485)
NT620C-CFL01 (NT620C)
NT610C-CFL02 (NT625C)

Replacement backlight

NT-ZJCAT1-EV4
None (software settings)

Terminal block (serial port B; memory-switch
selectable between RS232C and RS-422A/485)

NT631C-CFL01 (for ST151; the backlight for the
NT631C-ST152@-EV2, NT631C-ST153@-EV3,
however, cannot be replaced by the user)
NT631C-CFL02 (for ST141)

NT631/NT631C system program data

NT620-ZS3AT-EV1/EMV1
(including system installer)

The system installer and system program data
are supplied with the Support Tool.

High-speed 1:N NT Link
Memory
System program
Link
Screen data

Not possible
Exclusive use by Memory Link

Possible
Same as OMRON connection

Shared with OMRON connection
By a control on the rear of the PT

Exclusive use by Memory Link
By touch panel operation
(Possible in the NT631-ST141@-V2 only.)
By touch panel operation
(Possible in the NT631-ST141@-V2 only.)

LCD contrast adjustment
Backlight brightness adjustment

Not possible

Number of user-registered
screens

Maximum of 2000

Maximum of 3999

Screen data capacity*1
(User program memory)

NT620S: 512 KB
NT620C/NT625C: 1 MB

1 MB

Numeral string data
Character string data

Maximum of 1000
Maximum of 1000

Maximum of 2000
Maximum of 2000

Bit data
Mathematical tables

256
None

Maximum of 1000
256 max.
Calculations can be executed automatically in
the PT.

Image data

Maximum of 224

Maximum of 4095*2

Library data

Maximum of 896

Maximum of 12288*2
Selectable from BCD (binary coded decimal) or
binary

Method for storing numeric
Fixed as BCD (binary coded decimal)
values
(numeral memory data and PT
status control area)
PT status control area size

4 words

5 words (partial change of contents)*2

PT status notify area size

3 words

2 words (partial change of contents)*2

Window control area size
None
Registering continuous screen Possible
Lamp/Touch switch labels

Fixed display (1 line only)

9 CH
Not possible (Use a screen switchover as a substitute.)
- Multiple lines can be displayed
- ON/OFF switching is possible
- Numeral display is possible
- Character string display is possible

Section 1-2

Functions of the NT631/NT631C
Item
Interlock function

None

NT620S/NT620C/NT625C

NT631/NT631C
Operations can be disabled from the PLC by
allocating interlock bits to the corresponding
touch switch, numeral input, or character string
input.

Device monitor function
Recipe function

Not possible
None

Possible
Possible

Accessible CS/CJ-series PLC
data areas

---

The data areas listed below can be accessed in
addition to the data areas accessible with the
NT30/NT30C.
- EM banks (EM_0 to EM_C)
- Timer completion flags (TU)
- Counter completion flags (CU)
- Work areas (WR)
- Task flags (TK)
- HR area

This is the capacity of the flash memory that stores screen data.

The values are the same as the NT30/NT30C when the PT is in NT30/620 compatible mode.

For differences in programming, refer to Appendix B in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.

Functions of the NT631/NT631C

1-2-4

Section 1-2

Principal Functions of NT631/NT631C
The following are the principal functions of the NT631/NT631C.

Functions relating to data display
Character display
Characters of various sizes can be displayed. Characters can be flashed and displayed in reverse
video. High grade fonts are available for the characters with their size enlarged.

Graphic display
Polylines, rectangles, polygons, circles, circular arcs, and sector shapes can be displayed.
They can also be tiled with various patterns, flashed, or displayed in reverse video.

Memory data display
The contents of character string memory tables and numeral memory tables can be displayed.
The contents of memory tables can be changed from the host.

Graph display
Not only bar graphs but also broken line graphs, trend graphs, and analogue meter graphs can
be displayed using numeral memory tables

Lamp display
Lamps can be turned on and flashed under the control of the host. It is also possible to display
different graphics in the ON and OFF states.

Alarm list/history display
Warning messages are automatically displayed in a list in response to the state of a host bit. The
time and the number of times of the messages appeared can also be displayed.

Functions relating to data output
Buzzer
A built-in buzzer can be sounded.

Screen printing
A hard copy of the currently displayed screen can be printed at the
printer connected to the NT631/NT631C.

Functions of the NT631/NT631C

Section 1-2

Functions relating to data input
Input by touch switches
Data can be input by simply touching touch switches displayed on the screen.
The possible functions of touch switches include sending data to the host and changing the screen display.
Inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when interlock bits have been allocated.

Pop-up window function
A window overlaying the currently displayed screen can be alternately opened and closed by pressing a touch
switch.In addition to fixed character and graphic displays, control keys and character keys created as touch
switches can also be set inside the window.
A maximum of three windows can be displayed simultaneously.
Since the window need only be opened when input is required, the screen can be used efficiently.

Numeral/character string setting function
Numeric keys and character keys can be assigned to touch switches so that numeric values and character strings
can be input at the operation site.
The input data is written to numeral/character string memory tables and also sent to the host. It is also possible to
disable input by control from the host.

Recipe function
Several words of numeric data can be edited at the PT Unit, and written to or read from the host in one operation.

Input from a bar code reader
Data read with a bar code reader can be input to a character string input field.

Functions relating to communications
Communications with the host
The NT631/NT631C can communicate with the host by four methods: host link, 1:1 NT link, 1:N NT link (standard
or high-speed), and Memory link. Data can be read from the host, and data input by means of touch switches and
numeral/character string settings can be sent to the host. It is also possible to connect with other model PCs.

Functions relating to the system
System menu
System settings and maintenance can be performed by selecting from system menus displayed on the screen.

Creation of screen data
Screen data created using the Support Tool at a personal computer can be transferred and stored in the built-in screen
data memory.

Resume function
The status and memory table contents of the NT631/NT631C immediately before its operation is stopped can be stored
while operation is stopped, or while the power is off, and then displayed on the screen again when operation is restarted.

Screen saver function
This function serves to extend the service life of the backlight and EL and prevent the formation of an afterimage on the screen.

Clock function
The time can be displayed in accordance with the internal clock data.

Programming Console function
When the NT631/NT631C is connected to a C-series CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, or C200HX/HG/
HE(-Z)E Programmable Controller in an NT link (1:1) connection, or is connected to CS/CJ-series in an NT link (1:N)
connection, operations equivalent to those of a Programming Console (C200H-PR027-E) are possible.

Device Monitor function
When the PT is connected to a PLC in a 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link, the PT can be used for operations such as
changing the PLC's operating mode, displaying or changing the PVs of words, or reading the error log.

System program install function
The system program of the NT631/NT631C can be changed by using the system installer supplied with the Support Tool
(NT-ZJ3AT1/ZJCAT-EV2). It can also be installed by using a memory unit (NT-MF261).

Screen display history function/alarm history function
The screen display history function records the time at which specific screens are displayed and the number of times
they are displayed. The alarm history function records the time at which specific bits at the host are turned ON and the
number of times they are turned ON.

Trend graph logging function and background function
Changes in the contents of numeral memory tables displayed in trend graphs can be recorded (logging function). Also, the
record can be maintained even when the trend graph is not displayed (background function).

Mathematical function
This function allows calculations to be executed continuously during PT operation when mathematical table have been set
in screen data. Arithmetic operations, bit operations, logic operations, and comparison operations can be performed.
Operations with up to 5 terms are possible.

Section 1-2

Functions of the NT631/NT631C

1-2-5

Displays
The NT631/NT631C can display various kinds of elements such as characters, numeric values, graphs, lamps, and touch switches, on a screen. The
screen data displayed by the NT631/NT631C are created by using the Support Tool at a personal computer.
Characters
(fixed display)

Touch switches
Characters
(character string display)
Numeric values
(numeral display)

Bar graph

Lamps

Fixed Displays

Characters and various graphics (circles, circular arcs, sectors, polylines,
polygons and rectangles) whose display does not have to be changed, and
mark data, image data, and library data that has already been registered, can
be written directly onto the screen.
Circle

Arc

Sector

Polyline

Polygon

Rectangle

* A continuous straight line
with up to 256 points can
be drawn.

* A polygon with up to
255 vertices can be
drawn.

Marks are graphics comprising 16 by 16 dots that can be used as characters.
They can be used as custom characters within character strings.
Image data are graphics comprising any required area of dots. They are registered in advance and as many as required can be displayed at any position on
the screen.
Windows bit map (BMP) data can be used for images.
There is a two-color mode, in which the display color and background color of
the image are specified when it is registered in a screen, and an eight-color
mode in which colors are assigned to the image in advance.
Since image data is composed of dots, it requires a large data size but offers
great powers of expression.
Library data are combinations of fixed display graphics registered as a single
graphic. They are registered in advance and as many as required can be displayed at any position on the screen.
Since it is generated by combining graphics, library data has a small data
size.

Section 1-2

Functions of the NT631/NT631C
Mark

Lamps

Image data

Library data

These are graphics whose display status changes in accordance with the
states of bits at the host. Squares, circles, sectors and polygons can be used
for lamps (normal (standard) lamps). In accordance with the status of the host
bit, they can be lit (displayed in reverse video) or flashed (repeated alternation
between normal and reverse video display states).
Lamps can also display different image/library data for the ON and OFF states
of the host bit (such lamps are called image/library lamps).
There are four standard lamp labels: fixed display character strings, ON/OFF
switching character strings, numeral displays, and character string displays.
When fixed display character strings or ON/OFF switching character strings
are used, several lines of labels can be displayed.
Normal (Standard) Lamps

ON
ON

Host

Unlit state

Lit state

Image/Library Lamps

ON
Unlit state

Touch Switches

Host
Lit state

These switches can be set at any location on the screen. Pressing a touch
switch on the screen where a touch switch has been set can have the following effects:
Notification to a host bit (input notification function)
Changing the displayed screen (screen switching function)
Input of a numeric value or character string (input key function)
Copying of a numeric value or character string (copy key function)
Shifting to another numeric value or character string input field (cursor
moving key function)
Obtaining a hard copy of the screen (screen print function)
Opening / Closing a window
Moving a window
Touch switches can be made to light or flash in accordance with the status of
a host bit in the same way as lamps.
The following 8 types of display graphic can be used for touch switches:

Section 1-2

Functions of the NT631/NT631C

Standard, shadow, 3-dimension, no display frame, rectangle, circle, polygon, sector
When rectangle, circle, polygon, or sector is selected as the shape, the area
within which pressing of the touch switch is sensed (the touch switch area)
can be set independently of the position where the display graphic is set.
When this
position is
pressed...

Touch
switch area

Shown
in
reverse
video

Display
frame

Function executed

There are four touch-switch labels: fixed display character strings, ON/OFF
switching character strings, numeral displays, and character string displays.
When fixed display character strings or ON/OFF switching character strings
are used, several lines of labels can be displayed.
Numeral Display

Numeric values stored in the numeral memory tables are displayed. The displayed numerals can be changed by changing the data stored in the numeral
memory tables.
Hexadecimal values can also be displayed.
When decimal values are displayed, the number of digits for the integral part
and fractional part of displayed values can be specified in advance.

String Display

Character strings stored in the character string memory tables are displayed.
The displayed character strings can be changed by changing the data stored
in the character string memory tables.

Numeral Input

Numeric values can be input at the PT by using touch switches. The input
numeric values can also be stored in a numeral memory table and notification
sent to the host.
Numeral inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an interlock
bit has been allocated.
12345678
78 9
45 6
1 2 "3
0.

Input

Window

String Input

Character strings can be input at the PT by using touch switches, bar code
readers, etc. The input character strings can also be stored in a character
string memory table and notification sent to the host.
String inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an interlock bit
has been allocated.
Character string setting input field
Display
NT631C
Input
NT631C NT631 NT31C

Section 1-2

Functions of the NT631/NT631C
Thumbwheel Switches

Numeric values can be input by incrementing or decrementing each digit with
the corresponding touch switch (+, –). The input numeric values can also be
stored in a numeral memory table and notification sent to the host.
Thumbwheel switch inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when
an interlock bit has been allocated.

Graphs

These are graphics whose display changes in accordance with the numeric
values stored in numeral memory tables. There are the following four types.
Bar graphs:
Bar graphs display the present value in a numeral memory table converted to
a percentage within the range –100% to +100% of a preset value.
60%

Analogue meter:
Analogue meters display, using a quarter, half, or full circle shape, the present
value in a numeral memory table converted to a percentage within the range –
100% to +100% of the preset value. Users can choose from moving pointer
type and filling area type displays. Users can also add graduation to the
graph.
60%

Broken line graphs:
Broken line graphs display, in an easy-to-read form, a sequence of numeral
memory table values converted to a percentage within the range –100% to
+100% of a preset value.
100%

Example showing a series of
11 numeral memory table
values (with a check mark
set for the display sign)

−100%
Trend graphs:
Trend graphs display chronological changes in the value in a numeral memory
table, converting the value to a percentage within the range –100% to +100%
of a preset value. The trend graph shifts position with the passage of time.
Past data can also be recorded, and the numeral memory table can be read
(sampled) even while the trend graph is not being displayed.
The user can choose to stop sampling, restart sampling, or display past data,
by pressing touch switches.

Section 1-3

System Configuration

Alarm List/History

The alarm list/history function displays messages in list form, or graphics
(image/library data), in accordance with changes in bit memory table statuses.
For the alarm list, a series of bit memory tables are monitored, and messages
(contents of character string memory tables) set for bit memory tables that
come ON are displayed.
For the alarm history, bit memory tables for which the history property is set
are continually monitored, and the time when they come ON and number of
times they come ON are recorded and displayed together with the message
(character string) set for the bit memory table.
The NT631/NT631C allows selection of the display order as the newest
record first or the oldest record first by memory switch setting.
The alarm list function is used to determine which bits are ON at the present
time. The alarm history function is used to determine the times at which
alarms occurred in the past and how many times alarms have occurred
Alarm List
Message (character string table No. 32)
set for bit memory table No. 14

Character string table No. 32

Image/library
data 113C

Character string table No. 50
Image/library data 1002

No.13

Character string table No. 32
Image/library data 113C

No.14

Character string table No. 54
Image/library data 1125

No.15

HOST

Bit
0
1
0

A000000
L001003
D010015

1(ON)

When the message displayed is pressed, the image/library
data (113C) set for bit memory table No. 14 is displayed.

Alarm History
Message (character string table No. 13)
set for bit memory table No. 24
Recorded data
Character string table No. 13
Character string table No. 12

Image/library
data 102B

Character string table No. 11 No. 22
Image/library data 005F

Bit memory table No. 24
97/12/04 11:19:20

Character string table No. 12 No. 23
Image/library data 102A

Bit memory table No. 23
97/12/04 11:25:12

Character string table No. 13
Image/library data 102B
No. 24

When the upper message displayed is pressed, the image/library
data (102B) set for bit memory table No. 13 is displayed.

Recipe

1-3

You can set several words of numeric data at the PT in tabular format, and
write it to the host. You can also read several words of numeric data from the
host and display it on the PT screen.

System Configuration
This section shows the configuration of a system that uses an NT631/
NT631C. For details on product models, refer to Appendix J Model List
(page 281).

Section 1-3

System Configuration

1-3-1

Peripheral Devices That Can Be Connected
The following peripheral devices can be connected to an NT631/NT631C.
Host
Controls the NT631/NT631C as required while controlling machines and
monitoring the production line.
Host Link: CS/CJ-series, C-series, and CVM1/CV-series PLC, and SRM1
Can be connected to CPU Units, Host Link Units, and SRM1.
However, connection is not possible to some models of CPU
Unit and SRM1.

Bar code reader
Bar codes can be read
as character strings.

NT link:

RS-232C cable
(max. 15 m) or
RS-422A/485 cable
(max. 500 m)

CS/CJ-series, C-series, and CVM1/CV-series PLC, and SRM1
Can be connected to CPU Units and SRM1. However,
connection is not possible to some models.

Memory link: Can be connected to a personal computer, FA computer, etc.
Other companies' PLCs can also be connected.

Printer

Personal computer

For printing out the
currently displayed
NT631/NT631C screen.

Running Windows 95/98/NT

Support Tool
Used to create screens for the
NT631/NT631C at the personal
computer and transmit them to
the NT631/NT631C, and to
make NT631/NT631C settings.

System installer
Used to change the system
program of the NT631/NT631C.

Memory unit

NT631/NT631C

Can store screen data
and system program to
be read out
automatically at
startup.

Displays production line monitoring and
instructions to the operation site, and
notifies the host of the switch ON/OFF
status and numeric value inputs.
When a 1:N NT Link is being used, up
to 8 PTs can be connected to a single
PLC.

• Bar code reader (page 36)
• Recommended printers (page 36)
It is also possible to use printers that can emulate an NEC PC-PR201H
(using the NEC PC-PR201PL control protocol), and printers that comply
with one of the following EPSON control standards: ESC/P 24-J83C (color), or ESC/P 24-J82 (monochrome).
• Memory Unit (page 39)
• NT-MF261 (made by OMRON)
• Support Tool (page 35)
NT-series Support Tool Version 4.@ for Windows (Made by OMRON)
• NT-ZJCAT1-EV4 (CD-ROM version)
• System installer (page 35)
• System installer (made by OMRON)
The system installer is supplied as a standard accessory with the Support
Tool (NT-ZJCAT1-EV4).
Reference:

The following optional devices are available. All of them can be used either
with NT631 or NT631C.
Anti-reflective Protective
Sheet (5 pcs/set)

NT610C-KBA04

Chemical-resistant Cover

NT625-KBA01

Replacement Battery

3G2A9-BAT08

Section 1-4

Communications with the Host

1-3-2

Connecting to the Host
The NT631/NT631C has the following two communications ports.
The serial port B is equipped with an RS-232C connector and an RS-422A/
485 terminal block (selectable by memory switch).
Serial Port A:
D-SUB 9-pin connector
For RS-232C use only (The Support Tool and bar code readers can be connected here.)
Serial Port B:
D-SUB 9-pin connector for RS-232C use only (The Support Tool and bar code
readers can be connected here) or Terminal block for RS-422A/485 use only.
The host can be connected at either of these two ports.
The connection methods for each communications method at the PT and host
sides are indicated below. Make the settings in accordance with the communications method that can be used with the PLC to be connected and the conditions at the operation site.
Reference:

1-4

When using an RS-232C/422A adapter (NT-AL001) with the host link or NT
link (1:1) communications method, RS-485 cannot be used. The connection
must be made with RS-232C or RS-422A.

Communications with the Host
The NT631/NT631C is connected to the host by one of the following communications methods.
The following communications can be used to connect an OMRON PLC:
• Host Link
• 1:1 NT Link
• 1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)
The following communications can be used to connect another companies’
PLC or FA computer:
• Communications protocol supported by the other company’s PLC
• Memory link
In all of these communications methods that can be used with NT631/
NT631C, data communications with host are by direct connection (Memory
link is, however, a quasi-direct connection).
In the following, the host link and NT link that carry out the direct connection
will be discussed. Memory link will be explained in 1-5 Communications Using
Memory Links.

1-4-1

Direct Connection Function
With the NT631/NT631C, the bits and words referring to data required for display, and those for storing input data, can be allocated to any part of the PLC
memory area.
The NT631/NT631C can directly write to and read from such allocated bits
and words to change the display status of the elements on the PT screen,
control the PT operating status, and notify the host of the status.
This function, which directly reads and writes the statuses of words and bits
without using a PLC program is called the direct connection function.

Section 1-4

Communications with the Host

The words and bits allocated for direct connection are called the allocated
words and allocated bits.
The direct connection function allows the data to be displayed at the NT631/
NT631C to be read from the memory area in the PLC and written to memory
tables in the NT631/NT631C. Also, the data input at the NT631/NT631C can
be written to the memory area in the PLC. The NT631/NT631C screen can be
changed in accordance with statuses in the PLC memory area, and the
NT631/NT631C’s status data can be written to the PLC’s memory area.
NT631/NT631C

PLC
DM area

I/O relay area

Auxiliary relay area Timers/counters

Features of the Direct
Connection Function

The direct connection function has the following features.
• The bits and words referring to operating status and work instruction information and those for storing input data can be freely allocated to almost
any area of the PLC memory.
• Since the NT631/NT631C can directly refer to PLC bit and word data without using the program at the PLC, it can be connected to the PLC without
changing the PLC program which controls the currently running production line.
• The area to control and provide notification of the NT631/NT631C status,
including display screens, display/no display status, and buzzer output,
can be freely allocated to any part of the PLC data area. This means that
the PLC status can be read and controlled just by reading this area at the
PLC side, without preparing a special communications program.
The direct connection function allows the NT631/NT631C to directly read and
write almost all bits and words in the PLC and to automatically change the
NT631/NT631C screen display. This function can reduce the load on the PLC
so that its program development efficiency is improved.

1-4-2

Host Link
The host is connected to a PT in a 1:1 connection, and the words and bits of
the host are read and displayed by host link communications. This method
can be used for connection to the majority of PLC types.

1-4-3

NT Link
NT link is a method for high-speed communications with a PLC using the
direct connection function. The PLCs that can be connected with the NT link
are as follows.
CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HS, C200HX/HG/
HE(-Z)E, CS1G/CS1H-E(V1), CS1D, CJ1G/CJ1H/CJ1M, CVM1/CV-series
PLC (-EV1 or later version), SRM1
Besides the 1:1 NT link method, in which one PLC is connected to one PT, the
NT631/NT631C can also use the 1:N connection NT link method, which
allows a maximum of eight PTs to be connected to one PLC port.
PLCs that can be connected with the 1:N connection NT Link method are as
follows: CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CS1G/CS1H-E(V1), CS1D, CJ1G/
CJ1H/CJ1M.

Section 1-4

Communications with the Host

The NT631/NT631C also supports OMRON’s high-speed 1:N NT Link that
provides faster 1:N communications. The only PLCs that support the highspeed 1:N NT Link are CS1G/CS1H PLCs of version -EV1 and higher, CS1D
PLCs, and CJ1G/CJ1H/CJ1M PLCs.
In the following sections, the term NT Link is used to refer to the NT Link communications method in general, the term 1:1 NT Link is used to refer specifically to NT Links with a 1:1 connection, and the term 1:N NT Link is used to
refer to both standard and high speed NT Links with 1:N connections. When
necessary, the standard 1:N NT Link is distinguished from the high-speed 1:N
NT Link.
Features of the NT Link

The NT link has the following features.
• High-speed communications with specific types of PLCs can be executed.
The NT631/NT631C also supports OMRON’s high-speed 1:N NT Link.
• Writing in units of bits to the PLC memory area is possible.
This enables the other bits of words to which a touch switch has been allocated to be allocated for other purposes (e.g. a lamp).
However, since data is written to the DM area in word units, the other bits
of words allocated to touch switches in this area cannot be used for other
purposes.
• The NT link can be used even when the PLC is in the RUN mode. (When
the host link method is used, the NT631/NT631C switches to the monitor
mode when the PLC is in the RUN mode.)
• In the case of PTs that support the standard 1:N NT Link (NT20S, NT31,
NT31C, NT600S, NT620S, NT620C, NT625C, NT631, NT631C) up to 8
PTs can be connected to one port of the PLC and used at the same time.
Up to 8 PTs (NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C) can also be connected
simultaneously when the high-speed 1:N NT Link is being used.
All of the PTs connected to a PLC port must use either the standard or
high-speed 1:N NT Link; the two communications systems cannot share a
single port.
• When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E PLC and standard 1:N NT Links, up
to three 1:N NT Link systems (i.e., 24 PTs) can be connected by installing
a Communications Board in the option slot of the CPU Unit. (Only the
standard 1:N NT Link can be used.) For details on the Communications
Board, refer to the SYSMAC Communications Board Operation Manual
(W304-E1-@).
• When using a CQM1H PLC and standard 1:N NT Links, multiple 1:N NT
Link systems can be connected by installing Serial Communications
Boards in the Inner Board slots. For details on the Serial Communications
Board, refer to the CQM1H Serial Communications Board Operation Manual (W365-E1-@).
• Multiple 1:N NT Link systems (standard or high-speed) can be connected
by installing a Communications Board in the Inner Board slot of the CPU
Unit for a CS1G/H/D PLC or installing a Serial Communications Unit on
the Backplane for a CS1G/H/D or a CJ1G/M/H PLC. For details on the
Communications Board/Communications Unit, refer to the CS/CJ-series
Serial Communications Board/Unit Operation Manual (W336-E1-@).
• If the PLC supports the Programming Console function, the NT631/
NT631C can be used as a Programming Console.
• If the PLC supports the Device Monitor function, the NT631/NT631C can
be used to change the PLC’s operating mode and read/change data in the
PLC’s memory areas.

Section 1-5

Communications Using Memory Links

The NT link is compatible with the host link. The NT631/NT631C screen data
and PLC programs used with the host link direct connection method can be
used with the NT link method as they are.

1-4-4

Connecting to Other Companies’ PLCs
Installing a system program for multi-venders by using a specific system
installer enables the NT631/NT631C to be connected to the PLCs of other
models in direct connection. This system installer is supplied with the Support
Tool (NT-ZJCAT1-EV4).

Compatible PLC

The NT631/NT631C can be connected to the following model PLCs.
• Mitsubishi A-series programmable controller (computer link module)
• Mitsubishi FX-series programmable controller
• SLC 500 Series by Allen-Bradley
• 90-20 and 90-30 Series by GE Fanuc
• S7-300 and S7-400 Series by Siemens
For details on the procedure for connecting to other model PLCs, refer to the
PLC Connection Manual or NT31/631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual.

1-5

Communications Using Memory Links
In this section, a communications method other than the direct connection,
called the memory link, is discussed.

1-5-1

Memory Link
Memory link is a method to send and receive data between a personal computer or a FA computer and the NT631/NT631C by using RS-232C/422A
communications.
In memory link, there is an area called PT Memory, as shown below, inside
the NT631/NT631C, and this area is treated as a virtual area on the PLC. This
allows PT memory and the display elements of the NT631/NT631C to make a
quasi-direct connection. By sending a command for the memory link, the host
can make the NT631/NT631C execute processes through PT memory. Frequently used commands are kept handy for read and write tasks of the
numeral memory table, character-string memory table, and bit memory table.
PT
PT memory
Numeral
memory
table
Lamp
Direct connection
RS-232C/422A
communications

In the memory link method, the only difference is that the NT631/NT631C
finds its communications target inside instead of outside. In the memory link
method, therefore, change of the target is all that is needed to be capable of
using the exact screen data that is acquired by the direct connection. (With
the NT631/NT631C, the Support Tool must be used to convert the data to
screen data for the memory link.)
When compared to the direct connection of the host link or NT link methods,
the memory link method has some restrictions regarding the use of some
functions, as described below.

Communications Using Memory Links

Section 1-5

• The Programming Console and Device Monitor functions cannot be used.
• The following strobes of PT status notify bits do not turn ON (pages 7 to
27).
• Screen switching strobe
• Numerals input strobe
• Character-string input strobe
• The usable area for allocation is the PT memory only.

1-5-2

Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link
The major differences between the direct connection and the memory link are
as follows:
1,2,3...

1. In the memory link method, the communications with the host should be
carried out by using commands. Compared to the ordinal direct connection, which can be used requiring almost no programs, the memory link
method requires a program that is necessary for interchange of commands.
This, however, gives advantages to the memory link method by using a
large variety of functions available in the direct connections from major
models such as a personal computer and a FA computer equipped with
RS-232C/RS-422A communications means, allowing the PT to be suited
for larger usage.
2. Actual PLCs have many kinds of areas, where as PT memory is a single
area with only one kind. When creating screen data by using the memory
link methods, it is always necessary to allocate display parts in the PT
memory.
For communications between the host and the PT by the memory link method
and for handling screen display elements, refer to the NT31/NT31C/NT631/
NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.

1-5-3

Memory Link Online Transfer Function
When memory link communications are being used, the NT631/NT631C can
be switched to Transmit mode from the host even if the NT631/NT631C is
operating and screen data can be written. (The NT631/NT631C can be
returned to RUN mode after the screen data is written.)
The memory link online transfer function can be used to replace screen data
at a fixed time each day or replace screen data with maintenance screen data
for maintenance.
For more details on the memory link online transfer function, refer to information on the memory link online transfer function in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/
NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.

Section 1-6

Before Operating

1-6

Before Operating
Follow the procedure given below to start the system of the NT631/NT631C.
Host

NT631/NT631C

Set the host settings.
• For the host link, refer to
pages 48 and 94, and the
manuals for the Host Link
Unit and Programming
Devices.
• For the NT link (1:1), refer
to pages 61 and 106.
• For the NT link (1:N), refer
to pages 65 and 108.
• For the high-speed NT
link (1:N), refer to pages
70 and 112.
• For the Memory link, refer
to pages 73 and 114.

Install the PT in the
operation panel.
(page 32)

Connect the power supply.
(page 33)

Support Tool
Install the Support
Tool at the computer.
(Refer to the manual for
the Support Tool.)

Install the system program.*1
(Refer to page 145 and the
Support Tool manual)

Make the settings in the
system installer mode.*2
(page 144)

Create the screens.
(Refer to the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C
Programmable Terminal Reference Manual
and the Support Tool Operation Manual.)

Transmit the screen data. (page 149)
Set the memory switches.
(page 152)
Connect to the host.

Connect to the
NT631/NT631C.

When RS-232C used at the PT: refer to section 4
When RS-422A/485 used at the PT: refer to section 5

Create the host program.

Confirm the settings and
check communications.

Start operation.

Reference:

System program installation is only done in special circumstances, for
example when changing the system program, or to recover the original status of the installed program. This operation is not normally necessary.
When using other PLC models (sequencers), however, it is necessary to
install specific system programs.

Display of the system menu, and all change operations, can be inhibited.
This enables you to prevent the accidental deletion or alteration of screens
and settings.
• For the system program, use the NT631/NT631C system program supplied as an accessory with the NT-series Support Tool (NT-ZJCAT1-EV4).
• For the Support Tool, use NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.@).

Refer to the following manuals for the devices and software.
Device or Software

Manual Title
Reference Manual

Manual Number

NT31/NT31C, NT631/
NT631C
System Installer

V064-E1-1

NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.@) Operation Manual

V061-E1-@

Support Tool

NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.@) Operation Manual

V061-E1-@

Section 1-6

Before Operating
Device or Software
PLCs

CompoBus Master
Control Unit
Programming Devices

Host Link Units and
Serial Communications
Boards

Manual Title
SYSMAC CPM1 Operation Manual

Manual Number
W262-E1-@

SYSMAC CPM1A Operation Manual
SYSMAC CPM2A Operation Manual

W317-E1-@
W352-E1-@

SYSMAC CPM1/CPM1A/CAM2A/CPM2C/SRM1(-V2)
Programmable Controllers Programming Manual
SYSMAC CPM2C Operation Manual

W353-E1-@

SYSMAC C200H Operation Manual (for CPU01/03/11) (programming)
SYSMAC C200H Operation Manual (for CPU21/23/31) (programming)

W130-E1-@
W217-E1-@

SYSMAC C200HS Installation Guide
SYSMAC C200HS Operation Manual (programming)

W236-E1-@
W235-E1-@

SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE-ZE Installation Guide
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Programming Manual

W302-E1-@
W303-E1-@

SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE-Z Programming Manual
SYSMAC C1000H/C2000H Operation Manual (programming)

W322-E1-@
W140-E1-@

SYSMAC CQM1 Programming Manual
SYSMAC CQM1H Operation Manual

W228-E1-@
W363-E1-@

SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/CV1000/CV2000 Operation Manual:
Ladder Diagrams

W202-E1-@

SYSMAC CS Series Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
SYSMAC CJ Series Programmable Controllers Operation Manual

W339-E1-@
W393-E1-@

SYSMAC CS Series, CJ Series, NSJ Series Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual

W394-E1-@

SYSMAC CS Series, CJ Series, NSJ Series Programmable Controllers
Operation Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Programming Consoles Operation Manual

W340-E1-@

SYSMAC CS/CJ/CP Series, NSJ Series Communications Commands
Reference Manual

W342-E1-@

SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Serial Communications Boards,
Serial Communications Units Operation Manual

W336-E1-@

SYSMAC CQM1H Series Serial Communications Board Operation
Manual

W365-E1-@

SRM1 Operation Manual

W318-E1-@

W356-E1-@

W341-E1-@

SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: C-series PLCs

W248-E1-@

SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: CVM1 PLCs
SYSMAC CPT User Manual and Quick Start Guide
CX-Programmer Operation Manual

W249-E1-@
W332-E1-@
W333-E1-@
W446-E1-@

SYSMAC C-series Host Link Unit Operation Manual
SYSMAC CVM1/CV-series Host Link Operation Manual

W143-E1-@
W205-E1-@

SYSMAC C200HW-COM01 C200HW-COM02-V1 to C200HW-COM06EV1 Serial Communications Board Operation Manual

W304-E1-@

SECTION 2
Preparing for Connection
This section describes the connection methods that are possible with the PT, and the functions of the parts of PT, as the
required knowledge before connecting to the host and to the peripheral devices.
2-1

Method for Connection to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2

Names and Functions of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 2-1

Method for Connection to the Host

2-1

Method for Connection to the Host
This section describes the methods for connection to the host used with the
NT631/NT631C, and the relationship between the connection method and the
communications method.
NT631/NT631C Communications Ports and Communications Methods
The NT631/NT631C has two communications ports. Their uses are indicated
in the table below.
Communications Port

Usable Communications
Methods
Serial port A
Host link
NT Link (1:1)
NT Link (1:N) (See note.)
Memory link
(Support Tool connection)
(bar code reader input function)
Serial port Connector Host link
B
NT Link (1:1)
NT Link (1:N) (See note.)
Memory link
Terminal
block

Note

Host link
NT Link (1:1)
NT Link (1:N) (See note.)

Communications Type
RS-232C

RS-232C
(select between connector and terminal
block)
RS-422A/485
(select between connector and terminal
block)

There are two NT Link (1:N) communications rates: standard and high-speed.
Communications Methods That Can Be Used with the Host
The following communications methods can be used with the hosts that can
be connected to the NT631/NT631C.
• RS-232C
• RS-422A
• RS-485
The communications types that are actually supported differ depending on the
host. For details, refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS232C Port and SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485
Port.
Converting the Communications Type with an RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter
The following communications type conversions are possible by using an RS232C/RS-422A adapter (NT-AL001, made by OMRON).
• RS-232C ⇔ RS-422A
• RS-232C ⇔ RS-485

Section 2-1

Method for Connection to the Host

Combinations of Communications Method and Connection Method
The connection methods that can be used depending on the communications
method used and the communications type for communications between the
NT631/NT631C and the host are indicated in the table below.
Communications Type at
PT

RS-232C

Communications Type at
Host

RS-232C

Usable Connection Method

Usable Communications
Method
Host NT
NT Memlink Link Link
ory
(1:1) (1:N) link

Direct 1:1 connection
PT

Details

❍

page 73

❍

page 82

❍

page 86

❍

page 115

❍

page 119

Host

RS-232C (max. 15 m)

RS-422A

RS-232C

1:1 connection via a convertor unit
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)

Host

RS-232C
(max. 2 m)

RS-422A
(max. 500 m)

1:N connection via a convertor unit
Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)

Host

RS-232C
RS-422A
(total length 500 m) (max. 2 m)

RS-422A

Direct 1:1 connection
PT

Host

RS-422A (max. 500 m)

1:N connection
Host

RS-422A (total length 500 m)

❍: Connection possible ×: Connection not possible

Section 2-1

Method for Connection to the Host
Communications Type at
PT

RS-485

Communications Type at
Host

RS-232C

Usable Connection Method

Usable Communications
Details
Method
NT MemHost NT
link Link Link
ory
(1:1) (1:N) link
×
×
❍
×
page 82

1:1 connection via a convertor unit
PT

Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)

RS-485
(max. 500 m)

Host

RS-232C
(max. 2 m)

1:N connection via a convertor unit
PT

Convertor unit
(NT-AL001)

❍

page 86

❍

page 118

❍

page 121

Host

RS-232C
RS-485
(total length 500 m) (max. 2 m)

RS-485

Direct 1:1 connection
PT

Host

RS-485 (max. 500 m)

1:N connection
PT

Host

RS-485 (total length 500 m)

❍: Connection possible ×: Connection not possible
• The RS-232C/RS-422A adapter (NT-AL001) requires +5 V, 150 mA at pin
6 of the RS-232C connector. Check the signals of the RS-232C connector
at the host.
• +5 V is not output from serial port B of the NT631/NT631C. When connecting an NT-AL001 at serial port B, a separate power supply is required
for the NT-AL001.
• The cable of an NT-AL001 cannot be connected or disconnected while the
power is ON. Always connect or disconnect the cable while the power
supply from the RS-232C cable is OFF (while the host power supply is
OFF).
• NT Link (1:N) connection is possible even when RS-232C is used at the
NT631/NT631C side for communications with the host, but in this case
one NT-AL001 Adapter is required for each NT631/NT631C. In this case,
it is convenient to use serial port A of the NT631/NT631C. +5 V is not output from serial port B.

Section 2-2

Names and Functions of Parts

2-2

Names and Functions of Parts
Before starting operation, the names and functions of the parts of the NT631/
NT631C are described here as a confirmation. A method of hardware settings
is also described.

Front View
POWER LED
Lit in green when the power is supplied.

POWER

RUN

RUN LED
• Lit in green while the
unit is in the RUN mode.
• Lit in orange or red when
the battery is low (orange
in the RUN mode, red in
other modes).

Reference:

Display
Depending on the model, different display types are used.
• NT631-ST211@-EV2: Monochrome EL display
• NT631C-ST141@-EV2: STN color LCD display with backlight
• NT631C-ST151/152@-EV2: TFT color LCD high intensity display with backlight
The whole area of the screen is a touch panel which works as an input device.

The NT631/NT631C comes in two body colors.
NT631 (EL)
NT631-ST211-EV2
NT631-ST211B-EV2

NT631C (STN)

NT631C (TFT)

NT631C-ST141-EV2
NT631C-ST141B-EV2

NT631C-ST153-EV3
NT631C-ST153B-EV3

Body Color
Beige
Black

Section 2-2

Names and Functions of Parts
Rear View
Reset switch (inside the cover)
Used to initializes all the statuses of the NT631/NT631C.
However, registered data such as screen data, and memory
switch settings, retain their statuses before initialization.
Serial port B terminal block
Connect the cable for RS422A/485 connection to the host
here. Depending on the setting
made at the NT631/NT631C
system menu, communications
through RS-422A/485 are
available. It is not possible to use
this terminal block and the serial
port B connector (9-pin) at the
same time.

Warning label
Expansion interface connector
(under the label)
When using an expansion
interface unit such as a
memory unit, peel off the label
and connect it here.

RESET
RDA
TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA

GR terminal
Grounding terminal to prevent
malfunction due to noise.

RSB

24V
+DC
PRINTER

PORT B

PORT A

Power input terminals
Connect the power to
the NT631/NT631C at
these terminals.

Serial port A connector
Connect the cable for connection to the host or
Support Tool here. A bar code reader can also
be connected here. This is a 9-pin connector for
RS-232C use only.

Battery cover
The battery is secured
underneath this cover.

Serial port B connector
Connect the cable for RS-232C connection to the host here.
Depending on the setting made at the NT631/NT631C
system menu, communications through RS-232C are
available. This is a 9-pin connector for RS-232C use only.It is
not possible to use this connector and the serial port B
terminal block at the same time.
Printer connector
Connect the printer cable here.
Output conforms to Centronics
specifications.

Note

Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or resetting.

SECTION 3
Hardware Settings and Connections
This section describes the settings of the NT631/NT631C and methods for connection to peripheral devices.
For details on the method for connection to the host, refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C
Port or SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
3-1

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1-1

Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1-2

Installation in the Operation Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1-3

Power Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1-4

Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

Connecting to the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3

Connecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-3-1

Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4

3-5

3-4-1

Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4-2

Setting a Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-4-3

Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using a Memory Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-5-1

Installation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-5-2

Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 3-1

Installation
Note

3-1

On unpacking the NT631/NT631C and peripheral devices, check their external appearance and confirm that there is no damage. Also confirm that there
is no abnormal noise on shaking the PT lightly.

Installation
Install the NT631/NT631C in the operation panel and connect the power to
the NT631/NT631C as described below.

3-1-1

Installation Environment
Observe the following points when installing the PT in an operation panel.
Note

1. Do not install the PT at sites subject to the following conditions.
• Severe temperature variations
• Temperatures or humidities outside the ranges stated in the specifications
• High humidity, condensation
• Splashing chemical agents
• Severe oil splashing
• Corrosive or flammable gases
• Strong vibrations or shocks
• Direct exposure to wind and rain (outdoor sites)
• Strong ultra-violet irradiation
2. Take adequate measures to ensure shielding if the PT is used at a location
subject to any of the following conditions.
• Static electricity, or noise from other equipment
• Strong electromagnetic fields
• Nearby power cables
• Potential exposure to radioactivity

3-1-2

Installation in the Operation Panel
The NT631/NT631C is mounted in an operation panel by embedding it in the
panel.
Use the panel fittings and tool (Phillips screwdriver) included in the product
package and follow the procedure below.
1,2,3...

1. Open a hole of the dimensions shown below in the panel and install the
NT631/NT631C from the front side of the panel.

238 + 0.50 mm
mm

303

+ 0.5 mm
0 mm

2. Attach the panel fittings at the following positions shown below, from the
rear of the NT631/NT631C.
Fit the hook of the fitting in the square hole in the body and tighten the
screw with the Phillips head screwdriver while lightly pulling the fitting.

Section 3-1

Installation

Fittings at the two (*) positions are not necessary if you do not need it dust
proof and waterproof.
(:)

RE S ET
R DA
T RM
R DB
S DA
S DB
CS A
CS B
24 V
+ DC

PRINTER

PORT B

PORT A

(:)

Note

1. During work at the panel, take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter
the PT.
2. The thickness of applicable operation panel is 1.6 mm to 4.8 mm. All fittings must be tightened uniformly to a torque of 0.5 to 0.6 N⋅m in order to
ensure water- and dust-resistance. Front sheet of NT631/NT631C may be
warped if the tightening is too strong or not uniformity. The panel must not
be soiled or warped, and must be able to support an installation that will
remain secure and strong.

3-1-3

Power Supply Connection
Connect a 24 VDC power supply to the power input terminals.
Note

1. Depending on how the power is switched ON/OFF, the entire system may
stop. Follow the correct procedure when switching the power ON/OFF.
2. Carefully check the wiring before switching ON the power.
3. Do not connect AC power to the DC terminals.
4. Use DC power supplies with low voltage fluctuation.
5. Do not perform a dielectric strength test.
6. If complying with EC directives (low voltage directives), the following points
must be noted (compliance with EC directives):
a. Use a power supply with reinforced insulation.
b.

When installing NT631-ST211(B)-EV2 on the ultimate system, the
rear of the NT631 must be placed within an enclosure to restrict the
operators’ use only to the front panel.

7. When using NT631-ST211(B)-EV2, warm-up time of the power supply
must be 200 ms or less. If longer than this, NT631 may not boot up.

24 VDC
Breaker

24 VDC
power supply

Section 3-1

Installation
Power Supply
The applicable power supply specifications are as follows.
Item

Value

Power supply

24 VDC

Allowable power supply voltage
fluctuation range

20.4 to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC –15% to +10%)

Power supply voltage capacity

NT631-ST211 (B)-EV2:
30 W or more (Power supply warm-up time
within 200 ms.)
NT631C-ST141 (B) /ST153 (B)-EV3:
18 W or more

Parts Used for Connection
Note

For the connection to the power supply terminal block, twisted wires of 2 mm2
or greater cross sectional area and M3.5 size crimp terminals must be used.
Tighten the screws on the terminal block to a torque of 0.8 N⋅m.
Fork type
7 mm max.

Round type
7 mm max.

Recommended Terminals
Maker

Note

Type
(fork type)

Type
(round type)

Japan Solderless Terminal MFG
Fuji Terminal

2-YS3A
2-YAS3.5

2-3.5
V2-S3.5

Nichifu Terminal

2Y-3.5

2-3.5

Applicable Wire
(stranded wire)
2.0 to 2.63 mm2

Conformance to Shipbuilding Standard
• Cover the entire PT with electromagnetic shielding, and ground the electromagnetic shielding to the control panel with copper tape or other electrically conductive tape.
Recommended electromagnetic shielding: E09F100 or E09R13502P
Manufacturer: Seiwa Electric MFG, Co., Ltd.
• Use gaskets or other materials to completely shield all openings and
other gaps in the control panel.
• Use copper tape or other electrically conductive tape to shield gaps
between the cutout and the PT before securing the PT in place.
• To suppress noise terminal voltage, perform installation under the following conditions. It is recommended to use the following product for the DC
power supply.
Recommended Power Supply model: S82K-03024
Manufacturer: OMRON

3-1-4

Grounding
The NT631/NT631C has a functional ground terminal (
Carry out wiring under the following conditions.

Section 3-2

Connecting to the Support Tool
1,2,3...

1. In cases where there is a potential difference between the grounds of the
NT631/NT631C and the host, ground as shown in Fig. If there is some distance between the NT631/NT631C and host and grounding at a single
point is difficult, do not connect the functional ground terminal ( ) of the
NT631/NT631C.
2. If the NT631/NT631C is installed in the same panel as equipment that generates noise, such as a motor or inverter, do not ground the functional
ground terminal ( ) of the NT631/NT631C.
NT631/
NT631C

Host

Grounding at a single point

Note

3-2

Carry out grounding correctly in order to prevent operating errors due to
noise.

Connecting to the Support Tool
In order to install the system program in the NT631/NT631C, or to transmit
screen data created with the Support Tool to the NT631/NT631C, the NT631/
NT631C must be connected to a personal computer with an RS-232C cable.
The NT631/NT631C connects the RS-232C cable from a personal computer
at serial port A. When the host is connected at serial port B, the connection
with the host can be maintained as it is while the NT631/NT631C is connected
to the RS-232C cable from a personal computer.
However, when a bar code reader is being used, it must be disconnected, so
that the RS-232C cable can be connected, since they both use serial port A.

RESET
RDA
TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
CSA
CSB
24V

PRINTER

PORT B PORT A

+DC

Serial port A
(RS-232C, 9-pin)

Communications Conditions
The communications conditions are automatically set when the system
installer and Support Tool are started.
Recommended Connector Cable
Use the cable indicated below.
• CV500-CN228 (length: 2 m), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 9-pin, male ⇔ D-SUB 25-pin, male)
• XW2Z-S001 (conversion cable), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 25-pin, female ⇔ half pitch 14-pin, male)
• XW2Z-S002 (length: 2 m), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 9-pin, male ⇔ D-SUB 9-pin, female)
For details on making a connector cable, refer to Appendix F Making the
Cable for Connecting a PLC.

Section 3-3

Connecting a Printer

3-3

Connecting a Printer
Connecting a printer to the NT631/NT631C enables printing of hard copies of
the currently displayed screen (printing of screen images), and, by system
menu operations, printing of the screen display history and alarm history.
The following types of data can be printed, depending on the printer connected to the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to the pages cited.
• Hard copies of the screen (Refer to information on printing data and
checking the printer status in the NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.)
• Screen display history record data (page 194)
• Alarm history record data (page 196)

3-3-1

Connection Method
Connect the printer to the NT631/NT631C with a Centronics cable, as shown
below. The length of the cable should not exceed 1.5 m.
Reference:
If the connector cable is connected or disconnected while the power to the
printer is on, the NT631/NT631C may malfunction. Always turn off the power
to the printer before connecting or disconnecting the cable.
RESET
RDA
TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
CSA
CSB
24V

PRINTER

PORT B PORT A

+DC

Recommended Connector Cable
The following connection cables are recommended.
NT-CNT121 (1.5 m, 20-pin to 36-pin), made by OMRON
Recommended Printers
When using a printer, use one that can emulate an NEC PC-PR201H (using the NEC PC-PR201PL control protocol) or complies with one of the following EPSON control standards: ESC/P 24-J83C (color), or ESC/P 24J82 (monochrome).
When using a monochrome printer with an NT631C, set Tone printing with
the NT631C memory switches (page 169).

3-4

Connecting a Bar Code Reader
Connecting a bar code reader to the NT631/NT631C enables bar code data
to read as character strings into character string input fields, and set in character string memory tables.
In order to use a bar code reader, the Comm. A Method memory switch must
be set to Bar-Code Reader.
For details on the method for inputting character strings with a bar code
reader, refer to 3-7 Input of Numeric values and Character Strings in the
NT31/NT31C/NT631/NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual.

Section 3-4

Connecting a Bar Code Reader
Note

3-4-1

Make sure that the power supply to the bar code reader and the power supply
to the PT are both OFF before connecting or disconnecting the cable.

Connection Method
Connect the bar code reader to serial port A of the NT631/NT631C, as shown
in the figure below.
NT631/NT631C
Bar code reader
RESET
RDA
TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
CSA
CSB
24V

PRINTER

PORT B PORT A

+DC

Serial port A
(RS-232C, 9-pin)

9-pin connector

Connector cable

Bar code reader cable

Bar code reader must match the communications setting (3-4-2 Setting a Bar
Code Reader, page 37) and data format (3-4-3 Data Format, page 38) in
order to connect to the NT631/NT631C. Please confirm the specification of
the bar code reader before using.
For details on making a connector cable, refer to Appendix G Making the
Cable for Connection to a Bar Code Reader.
Reference:

3-4-2

The bar code reader must be connected to serial port A. This means that it
cannot be connected at the same time as the Support Tool. Note also that
when a bar code reader is used, the host must be connected at serial port B.

Setting a Bar Code Reader
After connecting a bar code reader, set the communications conditions and
other settings for it by selection from the system menu.

Settings at the NT631/
NT631C

At the NT631/NT631C, set the communications conditions for communications with the bar code reader by using the memory switches, selecting from
the options indicated in the table below.
For more detailed information on the actual system menu operations, refer to
6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function.
Item
Data bits
Stop bit(s)

Settings at the Bar Code
Reader

Possible Settings
7 or 8 bits
1 or 2 bits

Default Setting
7 bits
2 bits

Parity
None, odd, even
Communications speed 4800, 9600, 19200 bps

Even
9600 bps

Input Method

Manual

Manual, Auto

Make the settings shown in the table below at the bar code reader. Make sure
that the communications speed, parity, stop bit, and data bit settings match
the communications settings made at the NT631/NT631C. For details on the
setting method, refer to the instruction manual for the bar code reader used.
Item
Communications speed

Possible Settings
4800, 9600, 19200 bps

Parity
Stop bits

EVEN, ODD, NONE
1 or 2 bits

Data bits

7 or 8 bits

Section 3-4

Connecting a Bar Code Reader
Item

Possible Settings

Preamble

STX

Postamble
RS/CS control

ETX
Available

Communications protocol
Transmission of number of bar code label digits

No-protocol mode
Transmission prohibited

Transmission of ID characters
Bar code types

Transmission prohibited
Multi-reading (all types can be
read)

Trigger switch setting

Automatic reading mode

About RS/CS Control
During bar code reading, the NT631/NT631C performs RS/CS control. When
the Input Method setting of the NT631/NT631C is set to Auto, the RS signal is
turned OFF, prohibiting the next input, until the read data has been sent to the
host as notification.
Because of this, when the Auto setting is made, the next input is not possible
until the data has been sent to the host as notification.
However, when the setting is Auto and the RS/CS signals of the cable are
shorted, RS/CS control is ineffective. Consequently, data input from the bar
code reader to the NT631/NT631C is updated regardless of whether or not
the data is sent to the host as notification.
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the bar code reader used.

3-4-3

Data Format
The data format for communications when using the bar code input function of
the NT631/NT631C is shown below.
STX
(02H)

Data

ETX
(03H)

The characters which are effective as data are hexadecimal codes from 20 to
7FH, and the maximum data length is 40 bytes.
Data which does not follow the data format described above is invalidated and
discarded.

Section 3-5

Using a Memory Unit

3-5

Using a Memory Unit
This section discusses the use of the Memory Unit.
Reference:

The Memory Unit functions are determined by the model of PT being used,
regardless of the version of the system program installed in the PT.
PT Model
Without V@ suffix
With V@ suffix

Function of Memory Unit
System programs can not be transmitted using Memory Unit.
System programs can be transmitted using Memory Unit.

By installing a Memory Unit (NT-MF261) on the NT631/NT631C, the screen
data in the NT631/NT631C can be recorded (backed up) in the Memory Unit.
In addition, the screen data in the Memory Unit can be automatically read into
the NT631/NT631C when it starts up. This means that system program and
screen data can be changed easily at the operation site without connecting to
the Support Tool.
The data in the Memory Unit is retained without backup by a battery or other
means.
In systems where there are frequent setup changes, by preparing a number of
Memory Units in advance and recording screen data in them in accordance
with the control performed in each case, the NT631/NT631C screen data can
be changed simply by installing the Memory Unit, without connecting to the
Support Tool.
In addition, even if NT631/NT631C is replaced, the previous status can be
maintained simply by installing the Memory Unit that retains the system program and screen data of the previous NT631/NT631C.
By using the following combinations, data can be stored (backed up) to a
Memory Unit.
• Screen data for two PTs.
• System program for two PTs.
• System program and screen data for one PT.
One Memory Unit can store the screen data for two PTs.
Note

1. Make sure that the power supply to the PT is OFF before connecting or disconnecting a Memory Unit.
After mounting a Memory Unit, be sure to tighten its two screws.
2. During data transmission, do not turn off the power supply to the NT631/
NT631C or reset it.
3. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) with bare hands.

Reference:

• When a Memory Unit is mounted, the NT631/NT631C cannot be set to
the operating status. On completion of data transmission with a Memory
Unit, always disconnect the Memory Unit from the NT631/NT631C before
starting NT631/NT631C operation.
• Memory Units (NT-MF261) can be used in common for the following PT
models: NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C. One Memory Unit can store
screen data for up to two PTs of different models. However, since the data
compatibility is not complete between NT31/NT31C and NT631/NT631C,
an error may occur if an attempt is made to read NT631C data with an
NT31C. (The data must be converted using the Support Tool.)
Note also that although there is data compatibility between the NT31
and NT31C, and between the NT631 and NT631C, the display may not
be correct since these models have different numbers of colors.

Section 3-5

Using a Memory Unit

• One Memory Unit can store a system program for up to two PTs of different models. In order to transmit a system program from the Memory Unit
to the NT631/NT631C, the system program must be compatible to the target PT model.
• The statuses of memory switch settings and system settings can be
recorded to the Memory Unit besides screen data. When the data in the
Memory Unit is written into the NT631/NT631C, make sure that these settings can be adapted to the NT631/NT631C used before transmission.

3-5-1

Installation Method
Install the Memory Unit (NT-MF261) at the expansion interface connector at
the rear of the NT631/NT631C as shown in the figure below (the expansion
interface connector is located underneath the note label.).

Mounting screws

3-5-2

Method of Use
As shown in the figure below, a Memory Unit has two sets of four DIP
switches, and the operation is determined by the DIP switches that are set at
startup.
1

Factory setting is turned all to off.
OFF

OFF

SW1

Note

SW2

1. Always confirm that the power to the NT631/NT631C is off before setting
the DIP switches.
2. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) directly with bare hands.

DIP Switch Functions

The functions of the DIP switches on the Memory Unit are indicated in the
table below.
SW1
Switch

Function

SW1-1

Automatic transmission (writing from the Memory
Unit to the PT)

OFF: Not executed
ON: Executed

SW1-2

Automatic transmission (writing from the PT to the
Memory Unit)

OFF: Not executed
ON: Executed

Section 3-5

Using a Memory Unit
Switch
Function
SW1-3 Manual transmission (Direction of transmission and
bank used selected at the PT touch panel)
SW1-4

Data type to transfer

OFF: Not executed
ON: Executed
OFF: Screen data
ON: System program

SW2
Switch
SW2-1 Disable/enable writing to PT

Function
OFF: Disable

SW2-2

Disable/enable writing to the Memory Unit

ON: Enable
OFF: Disable

SW2-3

Area (bank) selection of automatic transmission. *

ON: Enable
OFF: Bank 0

SW2-4

System/Screen simultaneous transmission

ON: Bank 1
OFF: Disable
ON: Enable

*: The Memory Unit stores system program or screen data for one PT in each
of areas (bank 0, bank 1). (The total data storage is for two PTs.) SW2-3
sets which of these two banks is used for automatic transmission.
Reference:

• In the following cases, a mode setting error occurs.
• More than one of the SW1-1 to SW1-3 switches are set to ON.
• None of the SW1-1 to SW1-3 switches are set to ON.
• In the following case, a protect setting error occurs.
Transmitting to the write destination has been disabled by the setting for
SW2-1 or SW2-2.
• In the following cases, a data transmission error occurs.
• An attempt is made to transmit data other than the system program to
PT system program area.
• An attempt is made to transmit the system program to PT screen data
area.
• For details on mode setting errors and protect setting errors, refer to
Errors When Using a Memory Unit (page 45).

Writing Screen Data to a
Memory Unit Using
Automatic Transmission
(PT to Memory Unit)

Reference:

In this mode, system program or the screen data in the NT631/NT631C is
forcibly written to the Memory Unit irrespective of the setting status of the
NT631/NT631C.
This mode is convenient if the touch panel is broken and touch switch operation is not possible, or if someone unfamiliar with touch switch operation at the
operation site is using the system.
When screen data is written to the Memory Unit, the data that has been
stored in the specified area up until that point is lost (if the data is written into
only one Bank, the other Bank will not be affected).
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the NT631/NT631C to
the Memory Unit by automatic transmission.

Section 3-5

Using a Memory Unit
1,2,3...

1. Check that the power supply to the NT631/NT631C is OFF, then set the
DIP switches of the Memory Unit as follows after installing Memory Unit to
NT631/NT631C.

SW1

SW2

SW2-4 ON: System/Screen transmitted simultaneously
OFF: System/Screen not transmitted simultaneously

SW2-3 ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
SW1-4 ON: System program
OFF: Screen data

It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-1 to OFF (to disable writing to the
PT), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the event of
operating errors.
Reference:

• Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables the setting of SW1-4.
• Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables the setting of SW2-3, writes the system program into bank 0, and
the screen data into bank 1 at all times.
2. Switch the NT631/NT631C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the Memory Unit. The screen
data in the NT631/NT631C is preserved.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are displayed on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
At the same time, the progress of the data writing status is displayed by the
means of the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
RUN LED operates as follows according to the processing status.
Preparing:
Transmitting:
Verifying:
Finished:

flashes at intervals of 1 second
flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
lights up

3. Switch the NT631/NT631C power OFF, remove the Memory Unit.
To operate NT631/NT631C continuously, switch the NT631/NT631C power back ON.
Writing Screen Data to the
PT Using Automatic
Transmission (Memory
Unit to PT)

In this mode, the system program or screen data in the Memory Unit is forcibly
written to NT631/NT631C irrespective of the setting status of the NT631/
NT631C.
Since data transmission by this method is faster than when the Support Tool
or system installer is used, it can save a lot of time. When transmitting the
same system program or screen data to multiple NT631/NT631C, this mode
becomes convenient.

Section 3-5

Using a Memory Unit
Reference:

When data is written to the NT631/NT631C, the data that has been stored up
until that point is lost. When the system program is changed, the operation of
NT631/NT631C also changes.
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the Memory Unit to the
NT631/NT631C by automatic transmission.

1,2,3...

1. Check that the NT631/NT631C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on
the Memory Unit as follows after installing Memory Unit to NT631/NT631C.

SW1

SW2

SW2-4 ON: System/Screen transmitted simultaneously
OFF: System/Screen not transmitted simultaneously

SW2-3 ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
SW1-4 ON: System program
OFF: Screen data

It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-2 to OFF (to disable writing to the
Memory Unit), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the
event of operating errors.
Reference:

• Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables the setting of SW1-4.
• Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables the setting of SW2-3. In this case, the data transmission becomes
possible only if the data inside Memory Unit is in either of following combinations.
Bank 0: system program, Bank 1: other than system program
Bank 0: other than system program, Bank 1: system program
If the combination is not as listed above, a data transmitting error occurs.
• When writing the system program into the NT631/NT631C, the type of
system program inside Memory Unit and the type of PT must correspond.
2. Switch the NT631/NT631C power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the PT.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying and Finished are displayed on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing.
At the same time, the progress of data writing status is displayed by the
means of the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
The RUN LED operates as follows according to the processing status.
Preparing:
Transmitting:
Verifying:
Finished:

flashes at intervals of 1 second
flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
lights up

3. Switch the NT631/NT631C power OFF, remove the Memory Unit.
To operate NT631/NT631C continuously, switch the NT631/NT631C power back ON.
Reading and Writing Data
by Manual Transmission

In this method, the direction of transmission and area of the Memory Unit
used are set by touch switch operations at the NT631/NT631C. Transmission
can be executed while checking the settings.

Section 3-5

Using a Memory Unit
Reference:

When data is written to the NT631/NT631C or Memory Unit, the data that has
been stored up until that point is lost.
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write screen data using manual transmission.

1,2,3...

1. Check that the NT631/NT631C power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on
the Memory Unit as follows.

SW1

SW2
Setting of SW2-4 not relevant

Setting of SW2-3 not relevant
Setting of SW1-4 not relevant

In order to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors, it is advisable
to set SW2-1 and SW2-2 so as to disable writing to the PT from which the
data is to be read.
2. Switch the NT631/NT631C power ON.
Display language select screen appears.

3. Press the Japanese or English touch switches to select the display language.
The following descriptions are for when English is selected.
The screen shown below is displayed.

Current PT Screen Data, System
The first line:

Compatible PT type for the system program inside PT.

The second line:

System program name and Version for the system program inside PT.

(The second line may not be displayed in the kind of system program.)
Current PT Screen Data, Screen
The comment for the screen data in the NT631/NT631C is displayed here.

Section 3-5

Using a Memory Unit
Current Memory Unit Screen Data
• In the case of system program:
The first line:

Compatible PT type for the system program inside the Memory Unit.

The second line:

System program name and Version for the system program inside the Memory Unit.

(The second line may not be displayed in the system program for some
models.)
• In the case of screen data:
The comment for the screen data in the NT631/NT631C is displayed
here.
The available transmitting destinations are altered depending on the settings
of the origin of transmitting as described in the table below.
Source
PT screen

Destination

Memory unit Bank 0

Memory unit Bank 1

PT system
PT system/screen

Memory Unit Bank 0/1 (fixed)

Memory Unit Bank 0
Memory Unit Bank 1

If system program is selected
PT system (fixed)
If screen data is selected
PT screen (fixed)
PT system/screen (fixed)

Memory Unit Bank 0/1

Reference:

• When transmitting the system program and screen data simultaneously
from the PT to the Memory Unit, the setting of banks is Bank 0: system
program, Bank 1: screen data, and when transmitting them from the
Memory Unit to the PT, either of the following combinations must be used.
Bank 0: system program, Bank 1: other than system program
Bank 0: other than system program, Bank 1: system program
• When writing the system program into the NT631/NT631C, the type of
system program inside Memory Unit and the type of PT must correspond.
4. Press Execute.
The data is transmitted.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are displayed in accordance with the progress of data transmission. At the same
time, the progress of data transmitting status is displayed by the means of
the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
When the data transmission is operated manually, RUN LED remains OFF.
5. Switch the NT631/NT631C power OFF, remove the Memory Unit, then
switch the NT631/NT631C power back ON.

Errors When Using a
Memory Unit

If an error occurs when using the Memory Unit, the NT631/NT631C operates
as follows.
• The details of the error and remedial action are displayed on the screen.
Each screen has touch switches to change the display language from
one to the other. When the manual data transmission is operating, the
content of error and remedial action are shown with selected language. When the automatic transmission is operating, it is displayed in
Japanese.
• The continuous buzzer sounds.

Section 3-5

Using a Memory Unit
• The RUN LED flashes.

If a protect setting error occurs when executing manual transmission, it is possible to return to the Memory Unit manual transmission screen by pressing
the OK touch switch, but in the case of other errors, the status described
above remains in effect until the NT631/NT631C power is turned OFF or
reset.
Within the PT Model, the
system program inside
memory compatible PT
model

The compatibility relationships are shown below.
NT631
NT631C

System program for NT631/NT631C without the -V suffix, and for
NT631/NT631C with the -V1 and -V2 suffix

NT631C-EV3

System program for NT631C with the -V3 suffix

When an error occurs, take remedial action by referring to the table below.
Error
Mode setting error

Probable Cause
DIP switches SW1-1 to
SW1-3 are all OFF, or
more than one is ON.

Remedial Action
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, set the Memory Unit DIP
switches correctly, then turn the
NT631/NT631C power back ON.

Protect setting error
(automatic transmission)

Writing to the data write
destination has been prohibited by the setting of
SW2-1 or SW2-2.
Writing to the data write
destination has been prohibited by the setting of
SW2-1 or SW2-2.

Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, set the Memory Unit DIP
switches correctly, then turn the
NT631/NT631C power back ON.
Perform either of the following procedures.
• Press the OK touch switch to
return to the Memory Unit manual
transmission screen, make the
correct settings, then try again.
• Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, correct the DIP switches settings of the Memory Unit, then
turn the power back ON.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, then back ON. If the error
recurs, the flash memory at the
write destination may be faulty. In
this case, replace the PT.
Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, then back ON. If the error
recurs, the flash memory at the
write destination may be faulty. In
this case, replace the PT.
Perform either of the following procedures.
• Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, correct the DIP switch settings of the Memory Unit, and
then turn the power back ON.
• Turn the NT631/NT631C power
OFF, set the DIP switch settings
to the manual transmission, and
then check the data inside the
Memory Unit.

Protect setting error
(manual transmission)

Flash memory error

Verify error

Transmitting data
error
(The automatic
transmission only)

An error occurred during
initialization of the
NT631/NT631C or Memory Unit flash memory, or
during write processing.
An error occurred during
verification processing at
the flash memory of the
NT631/NT631C or the
Memory Unit.
An attempt is made to
transmit data other than a
system program or the
system program of a different PLC model into the
NT631/NT631C as the
system program.
An attempt is made to
write a system program
into the NT631/NT631C
as screen data.

SECTION 4
Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port
This section describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-232C port of the PT.
4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1-1

Host Types and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1-2

Connecting Directly between RS-232C Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host

4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
The method for connecting between the RS-232C port of the PT and the RS232C port of the host is as follows.
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON
PLCs (By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any
arbitrary RS-232 unit). When making a connection to a host other than
OMRON PLCs, refer to the PLC Connection Manual (V042-E1-@) or NT31/
631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual (V060-E1-@).
Direct Connection Between The RS-232C Ports Using an RS-232C Cable
(page 73)
This is the easiest connection method. Depending on the host to which the
connection is to be made, it may be possible to use OMRON cables with connectors.
NT631/NT631C

Host

RS-232C cable (max. 15 m)

Reference:

4-1-1

The CS/CJ-series CPU Unit cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT
Link method. Use the 1:N connection NT Link method instead to make the 1:1
connection. For details, refer to Using the NT Link (1:N) Method (page 65) or
Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method (page 70).

Host Types and Settings
The types of host that can be connected to a PT by using the RS-232C ports
of both Units, and the settings to be made at the host, are described here.

When Using the Host Link
Method

Compatible Host Units
Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have the host link function built in.
In the CS/CJ-series or CQM1H PLCs, the host link method can be used by
installing a Serial Communications Board/Unit. In addition, some C200HX/
HG/HE(-Z)E CPU Unit can be connected in the host link method by installing
a Communications Board.
Check the model and series of the PLC, the type of installed Serial Communications Board, Serial Communications Unit, or Host Link Unit before making a
connection.
The hosts that can be connected to the NT631/NT631C by the host link
method using the RS-232C ports of both Units are indicated in the table
below.

PLC
Series

Units with Built-in Host Link
Function

CPU Units Connectable with
Host Link Unit or
Host Link Units or Expansion
Communications
Communications Board/Units
Board/Unit
CS Series CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)
CS1W-SCU21(-V1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)
CS1W-SCB21(-V1)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1W-SCB41(-V1)
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H
CS1D-CPU65H/67H
CS1D-CPU65H/67H(*1)
CJ Series CJ1G-CPU44/45
CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H
CJ1M-CPU11/12/13/22/23

CJ1G-CPU44/45
CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H
CJ1M-CPU11/12/13/22/23

CJ1W-SCU21(-V1)
CJ1W-SCU41(-V1)

Connectable to
CS1G
CS1H
CS1D

CJ1G
CJ1H
CJ1M

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
PLC
Series

Units with Built-in Host Link
Function

C Series

C200HS-CPU21/23/31/33-E
C200HE-CPU42-E
C20HE-CPU42-ZE
C200HG-CPU43/63-E
C200HG-CPU43/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU44/64-E
C200HX-CPU44/64/65/85-ZE

CPU Units Connectable with
Host Link Units or Expansion
Communications Board/Units

Host Link Unit or
Communications
Board/Unit

Connectable to

C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1

C120-LK201-EV1

C1000H
C2000H

C200HS-CPU01/03/21/23/
31/33-E
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-E
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64
65/85-ZE

C200H-LK201-EV1

C200HS
C200HE
C200HE-Z
C200HG
C200HG-Z
C200HX
C200HX-Z

C200HE-CPU32/42-E
C200HE-CPU32/42-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/
65/85-ZE
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000HF-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1

C200HW-COM02/04/ C200HS
05/06-EV1
C200HE
C200HE-Z
C200HG
C200HG-Z
C200HX
C200HX-Z
C500-LK201-EV1

C1000H
C2000H

C500-LK203

C1000H (F)
C2000H

CPM1-10/20/30CDR-@
+CPM1-CIF01
CPM1A-10/20/30/40CD@-@
+CPM1-CIF01

CPM1

CPM2A-30/40/60CD@@-@
+CPM1-CIF01
(Peripheral port connection)

CPM2A

CPM2C-10/20@@@@@@-@(*2)

CPM2C

CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41/42/43/44-EV1

CQM1
CQM1H-CPU51/61

CQM1H-SCB41

CQM1H

CV Series CV500-CPU01-EV1
(*4)
CV1000-CPU01-EV1

CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1

CV500-LK201

CV500
CV1000

CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2

CQM1H-CPU11/21/51/61(*3)

CVM1
Series
(*4)

CompoBus/S
Master
Control
Unit
*1

SRM1-C02-V1

CV500-LK201

CV2000
CVM1

SRM1

This CPU Unit is for a Duplex-CPU Unit System. The CS1W-SCB21/42(-V1) Serial Communications Board
cannot be used.

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
*2

Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect.

The CQM1H-CPU11 does not have a built-in RS-232C port, so connect to the peripheral port to the PT with
a CS1W-CN118 Connecting Cable.

CPU Units of CVM1/CV-series PLCs without the suffix -EV@ cannot be connected.
Settings at The Host
When using the host link method, the settings shown below must be made at
the host (depending on the Unit, some of these settings may not be necessary, or settings not shown here may be necessary).
Item

Switch Setting

I/O port

RS-232C

Communications speed

Set the same speed as for the NT631/NT631C. (*1)
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits

Transfer code
Parity
1-to-1/1-to-N

Even

Instruction level
Unit #

Level 1, 2, 3
00

1-to-N(*2)

Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to 6-7-2 Setting the
Host Link Method (page 155).
The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually possible to connect more than one NT631/NT631C in a single host link.
The setting methods for each type of Unit are described in the following.
Connecting to a C-series
Host Link Unit

C200H/C200HS/C200HE/HG/HX (-Z)E Rack-mounting Unit: C200H-LK201V1
Setting the Front Switches
Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in
the setting value window agree with the following.
LK201
XMT

RUN
RCV

ERROR

SW1

• Unit # (SW1, SW2)
Set these switches to 0.

SW2
0

SW3

SW4
5

• Instruction level, parity, and transfer code (SW4)
Set this switch to 2.

• Communications speed (SW3)
Set this switch to 5 to select 9600 bps.
Set this switch to 6 to select 19200 bps.

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Setting the Rear Switches

• 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP switch)
Set #3 to ON.

CTS selector switch
External

1
2
3
4

• CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0 V (ON).

0 V (ON)

C1000H(F)/C2000H Rack-mounting Unit: 3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Setting the Front Switches

Local
Host
• Mode control (key switch)
Set this to host link.

Setting the Rear Switches
• I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
I/O port

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

RS-422A
RS-232C

Synchronization
Internal
External

SW1

Terminator

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

OFF
ON

CTS
0V
External

• Unit # (DIP SW1)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).

• Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to Internal.
SW2

• Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select
19,200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select
9,600 bps.(0: OFF 1: ON)

• 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
• Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
• CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0 V (ON).

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
C1000H/C2000H Rack-mounting Unit: C500-LK203
Setting the Rear Switches

• I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
5 V supply
ON
OFF

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

I/O port
RS-422A
RS-232C

Synchronization
Internal
External

SW1

Terminator
OFF
ON

CTS
0V
External

• Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-7)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-7 to OFF (0).

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

• Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to Internal.
SW2

• Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select
19,200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select
9,600 bps.(0: OFF 1: ON)

C200H/C1000H/C2000H CPU-mounting Unit: 3G2A6-LK201-EV1
Setting the Rear Switches
• Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-5)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).
* Parity is fixed at Even Parity. Transfer code is
fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits.
• Communications speed (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select 19200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select 9600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
SW1

SW2

• 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
• Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)

SW3

• CTS selection (DIP SW3-1 and SW3-2)
Set SW3-1 to ON (1), and SW3-2 to OFF (0).
(Set this always to 0V.)
• Synchronization (DIP SW3-3 to SW3-6)
Set SW3-3, SW3-5, and SW3-6 to ON (1), and
SW3-4 to OFF (0). (Set these to Internal.)

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Connecting to a CVM1/CVseries Host Link Unit

CVM1/CV-series Rack-mounting Unit: CV500-LK201
A CVM1/CV-series Host Link Unit (CV500-LK201) has two connectors (communications ports 1 and 2). Either of these ports can be used for connection
to an NT631/NT631C by the RS-232C method. However, since the connectors at these ports are of different types, a cable that matches the connector
must be prepared.
• Communications port 1
Communications port 1 is a 25-pin connector for RS-232C use only.
• Communications port 2
Communications port 2 is a 9-pin connector which allows selection of the
RS-232C or RS-422A method. When this port is used with the RS-232C
method, the I/O port selector switch on the front of the PT must be set to
RS-232C (the upper position).
CPU Bus Unit Settings
When connecting to a CVM1/CV-series Host Link Unit, set the following communications conditions for the CPU Bus Unit settings.
Item
Communications speed
Transfer code

Setting at Host
Set the same speed as set at the NT631/NT631C(*1)
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits

Parity
1-to-1, 1-to-N

Even

Instruction level

Level 1, 2, 3

1-to-N(*2)

Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to 6-7-2 Setting the
Host Link Method (page 155).

The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT631/NT631C in a single host link.

Set the CPU Bus Unit settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. CXProgrammer).
For details on the CPU Bus Unit settings, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CVseries Host Link Unit Operation Manual (W205-E1-@).

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Setting The Front Switches

• Unit # (SW3, SW4)
When using communications port 2, set
these switches to 0.

Communications port 1
(RS-232C)

• I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.

Communications port 2
(RS-232C/RS-422A)

• CTS selection (DIP SW2 and SW3)
Set SW2 or SW3 to ON. (Set this always to 0 V.)
To use communications port 1, set SW2. To
use communications port 2, set SW3.

I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
RS-422A

• Communications condition setting (DIP SW1)
Set this switch to OFF.
Communications are executed in
accordance with the CPU Bus Unit system
settings made at the PLC. The initial values
for the system settings are as follows.
- Communications speed: 9600 bps
- Parity: Even
- Xon/Xoff control: Not executed
- Communications method: Full duplex
- Stop bits: 2 stop bits
- Data length: 7 bits

Connecting to a CPU Unit

CV-series and CVM1/CV-series (-EV@) CPU Units
CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01-EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2
PLC Setup
When connecting to a CVM1/CV-series CPU Unit, set the following communications conditions for the PLC Setup.
Item
Communications speed

Setting at Host

Stop bit

Set the same speed as set at the NT631/NT631C(*1)
2 stop bits

Parity
Data length

Even
ASCII 7 bits

Unit #

Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to 6-7-2 Setting the
Host Link Method (page 155).

Either set PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device (e.g. CX-Programmer), or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device to the CPU
Unit.
For details on the PLC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/1000/2000
Operation Manual: Ladder Diagrams (W202-E1-@).

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Setting the Front Switches

• I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.

I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
RS-422A

• System setting (DIP SW4)
To effect the existing DIP switch
settings, set SW4 to ON.
To effect the existing PLC Setup,
set SW4 to OFF.
Note
For CPU Units manufactured before or
during June 1995 (lot No. @@65), the
existing DIP switch settings differ from
the existing PLC Setup as follows.
- DIP switch settings:
2,400 bps, 1 stop bit, even parity, 7 bit
data length
- PLC Setup:
9,600 bps, 2 stop bits, even parity, 7 bit
data length
For CPU Units manufactured from July
1995 onward (lot No. @@75), the values
specified in the DIP switch settings also
are 9,600 bps and 2 stop bits.

C-series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1,
CPM1H CPU Units, SRM1
The connection method depends upon the model of PLC being used, as
shown in the following table.
PLC model
C200HS, CQM1

Connection method
Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.

C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E

Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
Connect to one of the RS-232C ports (port A or port B) on a
Serial Communications Board.

CQM1H

Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
Connect to the peripheral port through a CS1W-CN118
Connecting Cable.
Connect to the RS-232C port (port 1) on a Serial Communications Board.

CPM1

Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF01 RS232C Adapter.

CPM2A, SRM1

Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF01 RS232C Adapter.

CPM2C

Connect to the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port or the peripheral
port through a Connecting Cable (CPM2C-CN111, CS1WCN118, or CS1W-CN114).
(The CPM2C-CN111 splits the Unit’s Communications Port
into a RS-232C port and a peripheral port. A CPM1-CIF01
RS-232C Adapter is also required to connect to this peripheral port.)

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
PLC Setup Area Settings

When connecting to a C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A,
CPM2C, CQM1, or CQM1H CPU Unit, or SRM1, set the following communications conditions for the PLC Setup area.
Item
Communications mode
Communications speed

Setting at Host
Host link mode

Stop bit

Set the same speed as set at the NT631/NT631C(*1)
2 stop bits

Parity
Data length

Even
ASCII 7 bits

Unit #

Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to 6-7-2 Setting the
Host Link Method (page 155).

Set the PLC Setup area settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g.
CX-Programmer).
For details on operations relating to the PLC Setup area, refer to the manual
for the PLC which is used.
The PLC Setup area word numbers and settings to be made depending on
the Unit and port to which the connection is made are shown below.
CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1H, or SRM1: Peripheral port connection
Word #

Writing Value

DM6650

0001

DM6651

0303
0304

DM6653

0000

Settings
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communications conditions set by the contents of DM
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, communications speed: 9600 bps
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, communications speed: 19200 bps
Unit # 00

C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H (other
than the CPU11), or SRM1: Built-in RS-232C port connection
Word #
DM6645
DM6646

Writing Value
Settings
0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communications conditions set by the contents of DM
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, communications speed: 9600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, communications speed: 19200 bps

DM6648

0000

Unit # 00

C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E: Serial Communications Board port A
CQM1H: Serial Communications Board port 1
Word #
DM6555

Writing Value
Settings
0001
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communications conditions set by the contents of DM

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Word #
DM6556

DM6558

Writing Value
Settings
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, communications speed: 9600 bps
0304

Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, communications speed: 19200 bps

0000

Unit # 00

When using port B of the Communications Board of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Word #
DM6550
DM6551

DM6553

0000

Unit # 00

When using a CPM1
Word #
DM6650
DM6651

DM6653

Writing Value
Settings
0001
Host link mode
Communications conditions set by the contents of DM
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, communications speed: 9600 bps
0304

Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, communications speed: 19200 bps

0000

Unit # 00

Connecting to a CPM2C
The CPM2C PLCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on CS/
CJ-series PLCs. The CPM2C’s communications port handles both RS-232C
and peripheral port connections which are divided internally. Therefore, when
using the CPM2C, it is necessary to select RS-232C or peripheral port connections, according to the kind of cable and port (on the cable) used, as
shown in the following table. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more
details.
Port connecting to PT
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CPM2C-CN111

PLC Setup
Built-in RS-232C port settings

Peripheral port of CPM2C-CN111
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CS1W-CN118

Peripheral port settings
Built-in RS-232C port settings

Peripheral port of CS1W-CN114

Peripheral port settings

Peripheral port
CPM2C-CN111
CPM2C

RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)

CS1W-CN118

CPM2C

RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)

CS1W-CN114

CPM2C

Peripheral port

Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1 or CQM1H
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H the DIP switches on
the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in
the PLC Setup area (data memory) effective.

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E

CQM1

CQM1H

RS-232C port communications condition setting
Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings made
in PC Setup effective.

When using the CQM1H’s built-in peripheral port, turn ON SW7.
Setting the Switches of a CPM2A
When using a CPM2A, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PLC Setup settings effective.

Set the Communications
switch to OFF (down
position).

Setting the Switches of a CPM2C
When using a CPM2C, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PLC Setup settings effective.
The settings for SW1 and SW2 depend upon the usage of
the peripheral port and RS-232C port.
• Connecting PT to peripheral port
• Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A device that requires non-standard communications settings
is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: ON
• Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: OFF

Setting the Switches on a RS-232C Adapter
When using a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, set the mode switch as shown
in the following diagram.
CPM1CIF01
Set the mode setting switch to HOST (upper position).

CPM1

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host

CS/CJ-series CPU Unit: CS1G/H-CPU@@-E(V1), CS1G/H/D-CPU@@H
CJ1G/M-CPU@@, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
Connect to the built-in RS-232C port of the CPU Unit, or the RS-232C port of
the Communications Board. Note that the connection to a peripheral port
must be made via an RS-232C adapter (CS1W-CN118) specially designed for
connecting to a peripheral port.
PLC Setup
When connecting to a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit, set the following communications conditions for the PLC Setup area. Since the settings shown below are
the PLC default settings for the CPU Unit, no change to the PLC Setup is necessary as long as the communications speed is maintained at 9600 bps.
Item

Setting at Host

Communications speed
Stop bits

Set the same speed as set at the NT631/NT631C(*1)
2 stop bits

Parity
Data length

Even
ASCII 7 bits

Unit No. for the host link

Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to 6-7-2 Setting the
Host Link Method (page 155).
When the communications speed is set to 19200 bps., the PLC Setup of
the CPU Unit need to be changed.

Either set the PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming
Console), or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device (CXProgrammer) to the CPU Unit.
For details on the PLC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CS Series Operation
Manual (W339) or the SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual (W393).
Using the CPU Unit’s Built-in RS-232C Port
Word #

Writing Value

160

8000

161

0000

Settings
Host link mode, data length 7 bits,
2 stop bits, even parity
Communications speed: 9600 bps.

166

0007
0000

Communications speed: 19200 bps.
Unit #00

Using the CPU Unit’s Peripheral Port
Word #

Writing Value

Settings

144

8000

145

0000

Host link mode, data length 7 bits,
2 stop bits, even parity
Communications speed: 9600 bps.

150

0007
0000

Communications speed: 19200 bps.
Unit #00

Setting the Front Switches
Set the CPU Unit’s DIP switches to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT631/
NT631C is connected to. An example of a CS-series CPU Unit is shown
below.

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host

RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM

SYSMAC CS1G
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU42

Peripheral port
This is used mainly for
connection to the
Programming Device.
(This also supports the
RS-232C unit connection.)

OPEN
MCPWR

BUSY

OPEN

RS-232 port
This is used mainly for
connection to the RS-232C
unit.
(This also supports the
CX-Programmer.)

DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
• Set SW4 to ON (establishing communications in
accordance with PC Setup) when connecting the
NT631/NT631C to a peripheral port.
• Set SW5 to OFF (establishing communications
in accordance with PC Setup) when connecting
the NT631/NT631C to a peripheral port.

PERIPHERAL

PORT

Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS-series
CPU Units: CS1W-SCB21(-V1)/41(-V1) (See note.)
Note

Cannot be used with the CS1D-CPU65H/67H.

Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console
or CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area)
of the CPU Unit. After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the power ON, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or
execution of the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings are shown.
Allocation DM area (words)
Port 1
Port 2

Writing Value

Settings

DM32000

DM32010

8000

Host link mode, 2 stop bits, even parity, data
length 7 bits

DM32001

DM32011

0000
0007

Communications speed 9600 bps.
Communications speed 19200 bps.

DM32002
DM32003

DM32012
DM32013

0000
0000

Transmit delay time 0 ms.
No CTS control Unit No.0 for host link

Connecting to a CS/CJseries Serial
Communications Unit

CS/CJ-series Rack-mounting Unit:
CS1W-SCU21(-V1)
CJ1W-SCU21(-V1)/41(-V1)
Setting the Front-panel Switches
Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit by using the rotary
switch located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver
so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
SCU21
RDY
ERH
SD2
RD2

RUN
ERC
SD1
RD1

UNIT0
No. 3241

FE
D
C
56789AB

Set the unit number to 0 through F so that
it will not overlap with the numbers used in
other units.

Writing Value

Settings

m+10

8000

Host link mode, 2 stop bits, even parity, data
length 7 bits

m+1

m+11

0000
0007

Communications speed 9600 bps.
Communications speed 19200 bps.

m+2
m+3

m+12
m+13

0000
0000

Transmit delay time 0 ms.
No CTS control Unit No.0 for host link

When Using the NT Link
(1:1) Method

Compatible Host Units
Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have the NT link (1:1) function
built in. With CQM1H PLCs, a Serial Communications Board can be added to
provide 1:1 NT Link communications. Some C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E CPU Units
can be connected by the NT link (1:1) method by installing a Communications
Board.
Check the model and series of the PLC against the type of CPU Unit before
making the connections.

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host

The hosts that can be connected to the NT631/NT631C by the NT Link (1:1)
method using the RS-232C ports of both Units are indicated in the table
below.
PLC Series

C Series

CPU Units with Built-in
NT Link Function

CPU Units Connectable with Expansion
Communications
Board(*1)

C200HS-CPU21-E, -EC
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E

Connectable to

C200HS

C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E

C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E

C200HE (-ZE)

C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E

C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE

C200HG (-ZE)

C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
X200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE

C200HX (-ZE)

CPM1

CPM1-10CDR-@ (*2)
CPM1-20CDR-@ (*2)
CPM1-30CDR-@ (*2)
CPM1A-10CD@-@ (*2)
CPM1A-20CD@-@ (*2)
CPM1A-30CD@-@ (*2)
CPM1A-40CD@-@ (*2)
CPM2A-30CD@@-@
CPM2A-40CD@@-@
CPM2A-60CD@@-@

CPM2A

CPM2C

CPM2C-10@@@@@@-@
(*3)

CPM2C-20@@@@@@-@
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
CV Series
(*5)

CQM1

CQM1H-CPU51 (*4)

CQM1H

CQM1H-CPU61 (*4)

CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1

CV500
CV1000

CV2000-CPU01-EV1

CV2000

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
PLC Series

CPU Units with Built-in
NT Link Function

CPU Units Connectable with Expansion
Communications
Board(*1)

CVM1
Series (*5)

CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CompoBus/ SRM1-C02-V1
S Master
Control Unit

Reference:

Connectable to

CVM1

SRM1

One of the following Communications Boards is required: C200HWCOM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1.

A CPM1-CIF01 Adapter is required.

Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect.

A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.

CPU Units of CVM1/CV-series PLCs without the suffix -EV@ cannot be
connected.

CS/CJ-series CPU Units cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link
method. Use the 1:N connection NT link method (standard or high-speed)
instead to make the 1:1 connection. For details, refer to Using the NT Link
(1:N) Method (page 65) or Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method
(page 70).
Settings at the Host
The setting methods for each Unit are as follows.
Connecting to a C-series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A,
CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H or SRM1 PLC
PLC Setup Area Settings
Write the PLC Setup area (data memory) settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. CX-Programmer) in accordance with the host model and
port.
Host Model

Word #

RS-232C port of C200HS, C200HX/
HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM2A, CPM2C,
CQM1, CQM1H, SRM1

DM6645

Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E (*1)

DM6555

Port 1 of CQM1H

Writing Value
4000

Setting
Use NT link
(1:1)

(*2)

Port B of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E (*1)
CPM1

DM6550
DM6650

RS-232C port of the Communications Board

RS-232C port of the Serial Communications Board

For details on operations relating to the PLC Setup area, refer to the manual
for the PLC which is used.

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Connecting to a CPM2C

The CPM2C PLCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on CS/
CJ-series PLCs. The CPM2C’s communications port handles both RS-232C
and peripheral port connections which are divided internally. Therefore, when
using the CPM2C, it is necessary to select RS-232C or peripheral port connections, according to the kind of cable and port (on the cable) used, as
shown in the following table. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more
details.
Port connecting to PT
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CPM2C-CN111

PLC Setup
Built-in RS-232C port settings

Peripheral port of CPM2C-CN111
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CS1W-CN118

Peripheral port settings
Built-in RS-232C port settings

Peripheral port of CS1W-CN114

Peripheral port settings

Peripheral port
CPM2C-CN111
CPM2C

RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)

CS1W-CN118

CPM2C

RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)

CS1W-CN114

CPM2C

Peripheral port

Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H, the DIP switches on
the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in
the PLC Setup area (data memory) effective.
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E

CQM1

CQM1H

RS-232C port communications condition setting
Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings made
in PLC Setup effective.

Setting the Switches of a CPM2A
When using a CPM2A, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PLC Setup settings effective.

Set the Communications
switch to OFF (down
position).

Setting the Switches of a CPM2C
When using a CPM2C, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PLC Setup settings effective.

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host

The settings for SW1 and SW2 depend upon the usage of the
peripheral port and RS-232C port.
• Connecting PT to peripheral port
• Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A device that requires non-standard communications
settings is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: ON
• Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A Programming Console is connected to the peripheral
port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: OFF

Setting the Switches on an RS-232C Adapter
When using a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, set the mode switch as shown
in the following diagram.
CPM1CIF01
Set the mode setting switch to NT (lower position).

Connecting to CVM1/CV Series (-EV@)
Set the DIP switches on the front panel as follows.

I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.

DIP switch setting (SW3)
6
5
4
3
2
1
OFF

Set SW3 to use NT Link
(ON, right side).

When using a CVM1/CV-series PLC, CPU Unit execution processing (execution control 2) in the PLC Setup must be set to Simultaneous processing.
Using the NT Link (1:N)
Method

Compatible Host Units
The OMRON PLCs that can be connected using the NT link (1:N) method are
the CS/CJ-series CPU Units and the C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1H,
and SRM1 only. With the CS/CJ-series PLCs, it is possible to connect a 1:N
NT Link using a Serial Communications Board (CS Series only) or a Serial
Communications Unit.

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host

Check the model and series of the PLC as well as the model of Serial Communications Board or Unit being used before making the connections.
The hosts that can be connected to the NT631/NT631C by the NT link (1:N)
method using the RS-232C ports of both Units are indicated in the table
below.
PLC Series CPU Units with Built-in NT Link
Function
CS Series CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/
67H
CS1D-CPU65H/67H

CPU Units Connectable with
Communications Board/Unit
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)(*1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)(*1)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H(*1)
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/
67H(*1)

Connectable
to
CS1G
CS1H
CS1D

CS1D-CPU65H/67H(*2)
CJ Series

C Series

CJ1G-CPU44/45
CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H
CJ1M-CPU11/12/13/21/22/23

CJ1G-CPU44/45(*3)

C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E

C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*4)

CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H(*3)
CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H(*3)
CJ1M-CPU11/12/13/21/22/23(*3)

C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E

CJ1G
CJ1H
CJ1M

C200HE (-Z)E

(*4)

C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*4)

C200HG (-Z)E

C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E(*4)
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*4)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E(*4)

C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE

C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*4)

C200HX (-Z)E

C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E(*4)
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*4)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E(*4)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE(*4)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE(*4)

---

CQM1H-CPU51(*5)

CQM1H

CQM1H-CPU61(*5)
CompoBus/ SRM1-C02-V2
S Master
Control Unit

---

SRM1

A CS1W-SCB21(-V1) or CS1W-SCB41(-V1) Serial Communications Board
or CS1W-SCU21(-V1) Serial Communications Unit is required.

A CS1W-SCU21(-V1) Serial Communications Unit is required. A CS1WSCB21/41(-V1) Serial Communications Board cannot be used.

One of the following Communications Units is required:
CJ1W-SCU21/41(-V1).

One of the following Communications Boards is required:
C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-E(V1)

A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Reference:

Version 1 (-V1) and high-speed versions (H) of the CS-series and CJ-series
CPU Units support the high-speed 1:N NT Link method in addition to the
standard 1:N NT Link method. Furthermore, the high-speed 1:N NT Link
method can be used in earlier versions of CS-series CPU Units by installing
the latest version of a Serial Communications Board or Unit. For details, refer
to Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method (page 70).
Settings at the Host
The Settings required for each Unit are described below.
• Connecting a C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1H, or SRM1
PLC Setup Area Settings
Write the PLC Setup area (data memory) settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. CX-Programmer) in accordance with the host model and
port.
Connection to

Writing
Value
DM6645 5@00

C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, SRM1
Built-in RS-232C port
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Communications Board port A

Word #

Setting

DM6555

Use NT link (1:N)
@ = highest unit number of
the connected PTs (1 to 7)

CQM1H port 1*2
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E

(*3)

DM6550

Communications Board port B

RS-232C port on the Communications Board

RS-232C port on the Serial Communications Board

When using a C200HE(-Z)E, the maximum PT unit number is 3.

Refer to the PLC’s operation manual for details on changing PLC Setup settings.
Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, the DIP switches on the front panel must
be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the PLC Setup area
(data memory) effective.
RS-232C port communications condition setting
Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings made in
PLC Setup effective.

Connecting to CS/CJ-series CPU Units
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit: CS1G/H-CPU@@-E(V1), CS1G/H/D-CPU@@H,
CJ1G/M-CPU@@, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
Connect the PT to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port. Use a CS1W-CN118
Connecting Cable, however, if connecting the PT to the peripheral port of the
CPU Unit.
PLC Setup Area Settings
When connecting to a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit, set the following communications conditions for the PLC Setup area, in accordance with the communications port to be used.

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Using the CPU Unit's Built-in RS-232C Port
Word #

Writing Value
8200

160
161

0000 to 0009 (*1)
000@

166

Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
Communications baud rate (standard)
@ = The largest model number of the connected PT (0 – 7)

Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud
rate. The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it
is between 0000 and 0009 Hex.

Using the CPU Unit's Peripheral Port
Word #
144

Writing Value
8200

145

(*1)

0000 to 0009
000@

150

Settings
NT link (1:N) mode
Communications baud rate (standard)
@ = The largest model number of the connected PT (0 – 7)

Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud
rate. The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it
is between 0000 and 0009 Hex.

When connecting PT with its model number 0, 2-5 to the built-in RS-232C
port, for example, set the value 8200 Hex to 160 CH, and 0005 Hex to 166CH.
Either set PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming Console), or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device (CX-Programmer) to the CPU Unit.
For details on the PLC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CS Series Operation
Manual (W339) or the SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual (W393).
Setting the Front Switches
Set the CPU Unit’s DIP switch to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT631/
NT631C is connected to. An example of a CS-series CPU Unit is shown
below.
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM

SYSMAC
CS1G
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU42

Peripheral port
This is used mainly for
connection to the
Programming Device.
(This also supports the
RS-232C unit connection.)
RS-232 port
This is used mainly
for connection to the
RS-232C unit.
(This also supports
the CX-Programmer.)

OPEN
MCPWR
OPEN

BUSY

DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
• Set SW4 to ON (establishing communications in
accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting the
NT631/NT631C to a peripheral port.
• Set SW5 to OFF (establishing communications in
accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting the
NT631/NT631C to a peripheral port.

PERIPHERAL

PORT

Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS1-series
CPU Units: CS1W-SCB21(-V1)/41(-V1) (See note.)

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Note

Cannot be used with the CS1D-CPU65H/67H.

CPU Unit Allocation DM Area Settings
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of
the CPU Unit. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the
power ON, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or execution of the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings
are shown.
Allocated DM Area words
Port 1
Port 2

Setting

DM32000
DM32001

DM32010
DM32011

8200

DM32006

DM32016

000@

0000 to 0009

Setting Contents

(*1)

1:N NT Link Mode
Baud rate (standard)
@ = The highest unit number of the
connected PTs (0 to 7)

Set any value between 0000 and 0009 hex for the baud rate. The same
baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between 0000
and 0009 hex.

When connecting PTs with model numbers 3 to 6 to port 1, for example, set
the value 8200 hex to DM32000, 0000 hex to DM32001, and 0006 hex to
DM32006.
Connecting to CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Unit
A CS/CJ-series Rack-mounting Unit:

CS1W-SCU21,
CJ1W-SCU21(-V1)/41(-V1)

Setting the Front Switches
Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit by using the rotary
switch located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver
so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.
SCU21
RDY
ERH
SD2
RD2

RUN
ERC
SD1
RD1

UNIT0
No. 3241

FE
D
C
56789AB

Set the unit number to 0 through F so
that it will not overlap with the numbers
used in other units.

Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of
the CPU Unit. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the
power ON, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or execution of the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings
are shown.
m=DM30000+100*unit number (CH)
Allocated DM Area words
Port 1
Port 2

Setting

m
m+1

m+10
m+11

8200

m+6

m+16

000@

0000 to 0009

Setting Contents

(*1)

1:N NT Link Mode
Baud rate (standard)
@ = The highest unit number of the
connected PTs (0 to 7)

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
*1

Using the High-speed NT
Link (1:N) Method

Set any value between 0000 and 0009 hex for the baud rate. The same
baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between 0000
and 0009 hex.

Compatible Host Units
The high-speed 1:N NT Link method can be used with version 1 (-V1) and
high-speed versions (H) of the CS-series and CJ-series CPU Units. Furthermore, the high-speed 1:N NT Link method can be used in earlier versions of
CS-series and CJ-series CPU Units by installing the latest version of a Serial
Communications Board (CS Series only) or Serial Communications Unit.
Be sure to check the model number of the PLC and Serial Communications
Board/Unit before trying to establish the high-speed 1:N NT Link.
The following table shows which CS-series PLCs can be connected to an
NT631/NT631C with the high-speed 1:N NT Link.

PLC Series
CS Series

CJ Series

CPU Units with Built-in NT
Link Function

CPU Units Connectable with
Communications Board/Unit

CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1(*1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67EV1(*1)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/
67H
CS1D-CPU65H/67H

CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)(*2)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67E(V1)(*2)

CJ1G-CPU44/45
CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H
CJ1M-CPU11/12/13/21/22/23

CJ1G-CPU44/45(*4)

Connectable to
CS1G
CS1H
CS1D

CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H(*2)
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/
67H(*2)
CS1D-CPU65H/67H(*3)

CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H

(*4)

CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H(*4)

CJ1G
CJ1H
CJ1M

CJ1M-CPU11/12/13/21/22/23(*4)

The high-speed 1:N NT Link is not supported in a direct connection to the
CPU Unit of a CS1-series PLC without the -V1 suffix.

A CS1W-SCB21 or CS1W-SCB41(-V1) Serial Communications Board or
CS1W-SCU21(-V1) Serial Communications Unit is required.

A CS1W-SCU21(-V1) Serial Communications Unit is required.
A CS1W-SCB21/41(-V1) Serial Communications Board cannot be used.

One of the following Communications Units is required:
CJ1W-SCU21/41(-V1).

Settings at the Host
The Settings required for each Unit are described below.
• Connecting CS/CJ-series CPU Units
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit: CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1, CS1G/H/D-CPU@@H-E,
CJ1G/M-CPU@@-E, CJ1GH-CPU@@H-E
Connect the PT to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port. Use a CS1W-CN118
Connecting Cable, however, if connecting the PT to the peripheral port of the
CPU Unit.
PLC Setup
When connecting to a CS-series CPU Unit, set the following communications
conditions for the PLC Setup area, in accordance with the communications
port to be used.

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Using the CPU Unit's Built-in RS-232C Port
Word #

Setting

160

8200

161
166

000A
000@

Setting Contents
1:N NT Link Mode
Baud rate (standard)
@ = The highest unit number of the connected
PTs (0 to 7)

Using the CPU Unit's Peripheral Port
Word #

Setting

144

8200

145
150

000A
000@

Setting Contents
1:N NT Link Mode
Baud rate (standard)
@ = The highest unit number of the connected
PTs (0 to 7)

When connecting PTs with model numbers 0, 2, 3, 4, and 5 to the built-in RS232C port, for example, set the value 8200 hex to word 160, 000A hex to word
161, and 0005 hex to word 166.
Either set PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming Console), or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device (CX-Programmer) to the CPU Unit.
For details on the PLC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CS Series Operation
Manual (W339) or the SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual (W393).
Reference:

When using the CX-Programmer to set the high-speed 1:N NT Link, set the
communications baud rate to 115,200 bps.
Setting The Front Switches
Set the CPU Unit’s DIP switch to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT631/
NT631C is connected to. An example of a CS-series CPU Unit is shown
below.
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM

SYSMAC
CS1G
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU42

OPEN

Peripheral port
This is used mainly for
connection to the
Programming Device.
(This also supports
connection of RS-232C
devices.)

MCPWR
OPEN

BUSY

DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
• Set SW4 to ON (establishing communications in
accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting the
NT631/NT631C to the peripheral port.
• Set SW5 to OFF (establishing communications in
accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting
the NT631/NT631C to the RS-232C port.

PERIPHERAL

RS-232 port
This is used mainly for
connection of RS-232C
devices.
(This also supports connection
of the CX-Programmer.)
PORT

Connecting to a CS-series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS-series
CPU Units: CS1W-SCB21(-V1)/41(-V1)
Note

Cannot be used with the CS1D-CPU65H/67H.

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Reference:

CS-series Serial Communications Boards and Units with lot number 991220
(12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and Units
with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.
CPU Unit Allocation DM Area Settings
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of
the CPU Unit. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the
power ON, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or execution of the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings
are shown.
Allocated DM Area words
Port 1
Port 2

Setting

Setting Contents

DM32000
DM32001

DM32010
DM32011

8200
000A

1:N NT Link Mode
Baud rate (standard)

DM32006

DM32016

000@

@ = The highest unit number of the connected PTs (0 to 7)

For example, when connecting PTs with model numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6 to port
1, set the value 8200 hex to DM32000, 000A hex to DM32001, and 0006 hex
to DM32006.
Connecting to a CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Unit
A CS/CJ-series Rack-mounting Unit: CS1W-SCU21(-V1),
CJ1W-SCU21(-V1)/41(-V1)
Reference:

CS-series Serial Communications Boards and Units with lot number 991220
(12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and Units
with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.
Setting the Front Switches
Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit by using the rotary
switch located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver
so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.
SCU21
RDY
ERH
SD2
RD2

RUN
ERC
SD1
RD1

UNIT0
No. 3241

FE
D
C
56789AB

Set the unit number to 0 through F so
that it will not overlap with the numbers
used in other units.

Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area) of
the CPU Unit. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the
power ON, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or execution of the STUP command.
In the following table, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are shown.

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host

Word m = DM30000 + (100 × unit number)
Allocated DM Area words
Port 1
Port 2

When Using the Memory
Link Method

Setting

Setting Contents

m
m+1

m+10
m+11

8200
000A

1:N NT Link Mode
Baud rate (standard)

m+6

m+16

000@

@ = The highest unit number of the connected PTs (0 to 7)

In the memory link method, the connection can be made to a personal computer with RS-232 and an FA computer, etc.
When connecting to the host in the memory link method, it is necessary to
create a program for the memory link at the host side.
The following are the communications conditions that can be used in the
memory link method. For the host (a personal computer, an FA computer,
etc.), its setting should be compatible to one of the communications conditions listed in the following table. Set the same communications conditions at
the NT631/NT631C by the memory switch. (page 160).
Item

4-1-2

Settings at the host

Input/Output port
Communications speed

RS-232C
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.

Data bits length
Stop bits length

7 bits, 8 bits
1 bits, 2 bits

Parity
Flow control

None, even, odd
None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF

Connecting Directly between RS-232C Ports
The method for connection between the RS-232C ports of the NT631/
NT631C and the host is described here.
Host Link Unit or CPU Unit

NT631/NT631C

SYSMAC
CS/CJ-series PLC,
C-series PLC,
CVM1/CV-series PLC,
SRM1

RESET
RD
TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
CSA
CSB
24V
+DC

9-pin connector

PR I NTER PORT B PORT A

Serial port A or B
(RS-232C, 9-pin type)

9-pin connector
or
25-pin connector

Cable with RS-232C connectors

Recommended Connector Cable
When making the connector cable, as far as possible use the recommended
connectors, connector hoods, and cables indicated in the table below. Some
Units come supplied with one connector and one connector hood.

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Check the required components and prepare them in advance.
Name
Connector

Connector
hood

Cable

Note

Model
XM2A-0901

Remarks
9-pin
Made by OMRON

Delivered with
CS-series CS1G/CS1H/
CS1D,
CJ-series CJ1G/CJ1H/
CJ1M,
C-series CQM1,
C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E,
CVM1/CV-series CPU
Units
CV500-LK201

XM24-2501

25-pin
Made by OMRON

DB-25P

25-pin
Made by JAE

C500-LK203
CV500-LK201
C200H-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1

XM2S-0911

9-pin
Made by OMRON

XM2S-0913

9-pin
Made by OMRON

XM2S-0911-E

9-pin
Made by OMRON

CS-series CS1G/CS1H/
CS1D,
CJ-series CJ1G/CJ1H/
CJ1M

XM2S-2511

25-pin
Made by OMRON

C500-LK203
CV500-LK201
C200H-LK201-EV1

DB-C2-J9

25-pin
Made by JAE

3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1

AWG28×5P
IFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB
5P×28AWG

Multi-core shielded cable
Made by Fujikura, Ltd.
Multi-core shielded cable
Made by Hitachi Cable,
Ltd.

C-series CQM1,
C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E,
CVM1/CV-series CPU
Units
CV500-LK201

After connecting a communications cable, always secure it with the screws.
OMRON Cables with Connectors
When a connection is made at serial port A in other than the memory link
method, OMRON cables with connectors shown below are available.
Model

Cable Length

Connector Specification

XW2Z-200S
XW2Z-500S

2m
5m

9-pin ⇔ 25 pin

XW2Z-200T
XW2Z-500T

2m
5m

9-pin ⇔ 9-pin

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host

When a connection is made to a personal computer at serial port A in the
memory link method, OMRON cable with connectors shown below are available.

Note
Wiring for a Host Link Unit
(25-pin) Connection

Model
CV500-CN228

Cable Length

Connector Specification
9-pin ⇔ 25 pin

XW2Z-S002

9-pin ⇔ 9 pin

The cable’s tensile load is 30 N. Do not subject it to loads greater than this.
Applicable Units: C200H-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C500-LK203
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
CV500-LK201 (communications port 1)
Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A:
XW2Z-200S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 5 m)
CVM1/CV-series Host Link Units (CV500-LK201) have two types of connector; a 25-pin connector (communications port 1), and a 9-pin connector (communications port 2). When using communications port 2, refer to Wiring for
Other Connections (Other Than the Memory Link Method) (page 75).
Serial Port A, B

NT631/NT631C
Abbreviation

RS-232C
interface

Shielding wire

Pin
number

Abbreviation

+5V

Pin
number
Connector
hood

PLC (host link unit)

(9-pin type)

RS-232C
interface

(25-pin type)

* For Units that have a CTS setting selector switch, RS and CS do not have
to be shorted if this switch is set to 0 V.
Wiring for Other
Connections

Applicable Units:
CV500-LK201 (communications port 2)
CS1W-SCU21(-V1)
CJ1W-SCU21(-V1)
CJ1W-SCU41(-V1)
CPM1-10CDR-@
CPM1-20CDR-@
CPM1A-10CD@-@
CPM1A-20CD@-@
CPM1A-30CD@-@
CPM1A-40CD@-@
CPM2A-30CD@@-@
CPM2A-40CD@@-@
CPM2A-60CD@@-@
CPM2C-10@@@@@@-@
CPM2C-20@@@@@@-@
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H
CS1D-CPU65H/67H
CJ1G-CPU44/45
CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H
CJ1M-CPU11/12/13/21/22/23
C200HS-CPU21-E, -EC
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
SRM1-C02-V2

C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU11-EV2

Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A:
XW2Z-200T (9-pin ⇔ 9-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500T (9-pin ⇔ 9-pin, 5 m)
CPU Units of CVM1/CV-series PLCs without the suffix -EV@ cannot be connected by any connection method.
When connecting to the peripheral port of a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit, a CS1WCN118 Connecting Cable is required in addition to the above cables.
Serial Port A, B
1

NT631/NT631C

RS-232C
interface

Wiring for a Memory Link
Connection

PLC (Host link unit)

Pin
number
Connector
hood

+5V

Abbreviation

Shielding wire

Pin
number
Connector
hood

(9-pin type)

Abbreviation

RS-232C
interface

(9-pin type)

Cables with connectors that can be used:
CV500-CN228 (9-pin⇔25-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-S002 (9-pin⇔9-pin, 2 m)
Serial Port A, B
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram.

Section 4-1

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host

Host side

NT631/NT631C
1

RS-232C
interface

Pin
number
Connector
hood

−

+5V

−

Abbreviation

Shielding wire

Abbreviation
Connector
hood

RS-232C
interface

(9-pin type)

Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host

Section 4-1

SECTION 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port
This section describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS-422A/485 port of the PT.
5-1

Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1-1

The Type of Host and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1-2

1:1 Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C
at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1:N Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C
at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1-4

Recommended Connectors, Cables, and Crimp Terminals . . . . . . .

5-1-5

Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications

5-1-3

5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2-1

Host Types and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2-2

Direct Connection between RS-422A Ports at Both Units . . . . . . .

115

5-2-3

Direct Connection between RS-485 Ports at Both Units . . . . . . . . .

118

5-2-4

1:N Connection among RS-422A Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

119

5-2-5

1:N Connection among RS-485 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

121

5-2-6

Recommended Connectors, Cables and Crimp Terminals. . . . . . . .

123

5-2-7

Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485 Communications

124

5-2-8

Handling the Shield on RS-422A/485 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

125

Section 5-1

Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port

5-1

Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
The methods for connecting the RS-422A/485 port of the NT631/NT631C and
the RS-232C port of the host are described here. There are the following
methods.
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON
PLCs (By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any
arbitrary RS-232 unit). When making a connection to a host other than
OMRON PLCs, refer to the PLC Connection Manual (V042-E1-@) or NT31/
631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual (V060-E1-@).
• Method in which the RS-422A port of the NT631/NT631C and the RS232C port of the host are connected in a 1:1 connection via an RS-232C/
RS-422A Adapter (page 82).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to
500 m.
PT

RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
RS-422A cable
(max. 500 m)

Host

RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)

• Method in which the RS-485 port of the NT631/NT631C and the RS-232C
port of the host are connected in a 1:1 connection via an RS-232C/RS422A Adapter (page 82).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to
500 m. This connection method can be used only with the NT Link
(1:N) method of type RS-485.
PT

RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
RS-485 cable
(max. 500 m)

Host

RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)

• Method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple NT631/NT631Cs and the
RS-232C port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection via an RS232C/RS-422A Adapter (page 86).
This connection method is used with the RS-422A NT Link (1:N) method.
PT

RS-232C/RS422A
convertor unit

RS-422A cable
(max. total length
500 m)

Host

RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)

• Method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT631/NT631Cs and the
RS-232C port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection via an RS232C/RS-422A Adapter (page 86).
This connection method is used with the RS-485 NT Link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed).

Section 5-1

Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
RS-232C/RS422A
convertor unit

RS-485 cable
(max. total length
500 m)

Note

Host

RS-232C
cable
(max. 2 m)

One end of the wire must always be connected to the host (PLC), and there
must be no branching. Branching will cause problems such as transmission
delays and communications failures.

PLC

(At termination)

PLC

Relay terminal block

Max. 2 m

NT631C

NT631

NT631
(Not at
(Not at
termination) termination) (Not at
termination)

NT631

Example of Good Connection

Reference:

5-1-1

NT631

NT631C

NT631

NT631C

NT631

(At
termination)

Examples of Bad Connections

CS/CJ-series CPU Units cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT
Link method. Use the 1:N connection NT Link method (standard or highspeed) instead to make the 1:1 connection. For details, refer to Using the NT
Link (1:N) Method (page 65) or Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method
(page 70).

The Type of Host and Settings
The using condition is the same as the connecting PT side RS-232C and the
host side RS-232C.
For the available type and settings of the host, refer to the pages listed below.
Method

Settings at the RS-232C/
RS-422A Adapter (NTAL001)

Reference

Host link
NT Link (1:1)

Host Link Method (page 48)
NT Link (1:1) method (page 61)

NT Link (1:N)
High-speed NT Link (1:N)

Using the NT Link (1:N) Method (page 65)
Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method (page 70)

Memory link

Memory Link Method (page 73)

When making a connection between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 ports using
an RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter, set the DIP switches on the NT-AL001 as follows.

Section 5-1

Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port

Example: the terminal resistor is active,
RS-422A, NT Link (1:N).

ON
1

om Ron

NT-AL001

Built-in terminal resistor setting (DIP SW1-2)
If at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable, set this switch
to ON (to activate the built-in terminal resistor).
If not at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable, set this
switch to OFF (to inactivate the built-in terminal
resistor).
2-wire type/4-wire type selection (DIP SW1-3, SW1-4)
For RS-422A, set both of these switches to OFF (4-wire type).
For RS-485, set both of these switches to ON (2-wire type).
Selection of RS-422A/485 send mode (DIP SW1-5, SW1-6)
For host link or NT Link (1:1), set both of these switches to
OFF. (Always send)
For NT Link (1:N), set SW1-5 to OFF and SW1-6 to ON.
(Sends when CS is H)

Note

5-1-2

Read the manual supplied with the NT-AL001 carefully before using the Unit.

1:1 Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C at
the Host
The connection method in which the RS-422A/485 port of an NT631/NT631C
and the RS-232C port of a host are connected via a Adapter is described
here.
An RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter (NT-AL001) is used to convert between the
RS-232C and RS-422A communications methods.
Host Link Unit or CPU Unit
NT631/NT631C
RESET
RDA
TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
CSA
CSB
24V

SYSMAC
CS/CJ-series PLC
C-series PLC,
CVM1/CV-series PLC,
SRM1

PR I NTER PORT B PORT A

+DC

Serial port B
(RS-422A/485,
terminal block)

RS-422A/485 cable
(max. length: 500 m)
RS-422A terminal block

RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
(NT-AL001)

RS-232C cable
with connectors
9-pin connector

9-pin connector or
25-pin connector

Section 5-1

Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Reference:

When using RS-485 as a port for the NT631/NT631C, only NT Link (1:N)
method (standard or high-speed) can be used.

Connecting an NT631/NT631C and NT-AL001 (RS-422A)
NT631/NT631C

Host

NT-AL001
RS-422A

RDA

NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation

TRM
RDB
SDA

RS-422A/
485
terminal
block

SDB

NT-AL001 side
Short-circuit
tool

Pin number Abbreviation

RDA (-)

TRM

RDB (+)

SDA (-)

SDB (+)

Functional
ground

RS-422A
terminal
block

8
7
4
3

RSA (-)

RSA

RSB (+)

RSB

Functional
ground

Shielding wire

24V
+DC

For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables on page 125.
Connecting an NT631/NT631C and NT-AL001 (RS-485)
NT631/NT631C
NT-AL001

Host

RS-485

RDA

NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation

TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA

RS-422A/
485
terminal
block

Short-circuit
tool

NT-AL001 side
Pin number Abbreviation

RDA (-)

TRM

RDB (+)

SDA (-)

SDB (+)

RS-422A
terminal
block

8
7
6

SDB (+)

Functional
ground

4
3

RSA (-)

RSB (+)

RSB

Functional
ground

Shielding wire

24V
+DC

For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables on page 125.
Reference:

When using RS-485 as a port for the NT631/NT631C, only NT Link (1:N)
method (standard or high-speed) can be used.

Connecting an NT-AL001 and Host
NT631/NT631C

NT-AL001

Host

RS-232C

Section 5-1

Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Wiring When Connecting a Host Link Unit (25-pin)
Applicable Units:
C200H-LK201-V1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C500-LK203
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
CV500-LK201 (communications port 1)

CVM1/CV-series Host Link Unit (CV500-LK201) has two types of connector: a
25-pin connector (communications port 1), and a 9-pin connector (communications port 2). When using the communications port, refer to Wiring for Connections other than Memory Link (page 84).
PLC (host link unit) side
NT-AL001 side
1

Abbreviation Pin number

RS-232C
connector

Connector
hood

Shielding wire

Connector
hood

−

+5V

−

(9-pin type)
5

RS-232C
connector

−
−

−

(25-pin type)

Wiring for Connections Other Than Memory Link
Applicable Units:
CV500-LK201 (communications port 2)
CS1W-SCU21(-V1)
CJ1W-SCU21(-V1)

CJ1W-SCU41(-V1)

CPM1-10CDR-@
CPM1A-10CD@-@

CPM1-20CDR-@
CPM1A-20CD@-@

CPM1A-30CD@-@
CPM2A-30CD@@-@

CPM1A-40CD@-@
CPM2A-40CD@@-@

CPM2A-60CD@@-@
CPM2C-10@@@@@@-@

CPM2C-20@@@@@@-@

CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41/42/43/44-EV1
CQM1H-CPU11/21/51/61
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H
CS1D-CPU65H/67H
CJ1G-CPU44/45
CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H
CJ1M-CPU11/12/13/21/22/23
C200HS-CPU21/23/31/33

Section 5-1

Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
C200HE-CPU32/42(-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63(-Z)E
C200HZ-CPU34/44/54/64(-Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE

C200HX-CPU85-ZE

CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1

CV1000-CPU01-EV1

CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2

CVM1-CPU11-EV2

SRM1-C02-V2

Usable Cables with Attached Connectors:
• For host link, 1:1 NT Link, or 1:N NT Link (+5 V power supplied from PLC)
XW2Z-070T-1(9-pin to 9-pin, 0.7 m)
XW2Z-200T-1(9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
CVM1/CV-series CPU Units whose model names do not have the suffix -EV@
cannot be connected by any connection method.
When connecting to the peripheral port of a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit, a CS1WCN118 Connecting Cable is required in addition to the above cables. (Supply
power to the +5-V output of the NT-AL001 from an external power supply
when using this method.)
1

NT-AL001 side

PLC side

Abbreviation Pin number

RS-232C
connector

Connector
hood

−

+5V

−

(9-pin type)

Abbreviation Pin number

Shielding wire

(9-pin type)

RS-232C
connector

When there is no +5 V output at the PLC side

9
5
When using host link or NT Link (1:1)

When there is +5 V output at the PLC side

When using NT Link (1:N)

• When using the host link or NT Link (1:1) method, short the RS and CS
terminals at the PLC side with each other (leave the RS and CS terminals
at the NT-AL001 side open).
• When using the NT Link (1:N), cross-connect the RS and CS terminals at
the NT-AL001 and PLC sides.
If there is +5 V output at the PLC side, no external power supply is required for the NT-AL001.

Section 5-1

Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Wiring for a Memory Link Connection

Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the diagram shown below.
1

Host side

NT-AL001 side

Abbreviation
Connector
hood

Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
FG
hood

−

+5V

RS-232C
connector

−
−

(9-pin type)
5

Shielding wire

No +5 V output is at the host side
A +5 V output is present at the host side

Since it is necessary to input a voltage of +5 V to the number 6 pin of NTAL001, supplying a voltage of 5 V from the host or an external voltage supply
for NT-AL001 is required.

5-1-3

1:N Connection between RS-422A/485 at the PT and RS-232C at
the Host
The connection method in which the RS-422A/485 ports of multiple NT631/
NT631Cs are connected to the RS-232C port of one host in a 1:N connection
is described here.
An RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter (NT-AL001) is used to convert between the
RS-232C and RS-422A/485 communications methods.
Host Link Unit or CPU Unit
CS/CJ-series PLC,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E

RS-232C/RS-422A
convertor unit
(NT-AL001)
RS-422A/485 cable
(max. total length: 500 m)
NT631/NT631C
RS-422A terminal
block

RS-232C cable with
connectors
9-pin connector

Serial port B
(RS-422A/485, terminal block)
NT631/NT631C

NT631/NT631C

9-pin connector

Section 5-1

Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Connecting an NT631/
NT631C and NT-AL001
(RS-422A)

The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay terminal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
NT631/NT631C

NT-AL001

RS-422A

RDA

NT631/NT631C side

RDB
SDA
SDB

NT-AL001 side

Abbreviation

TRM
RS-422A/
485
terminal
block

Host

Pin number Abbreviation

RDA (-)

TRM

RDB (+)

SDA (-)

SDB (+)

8
RS-422A
terminal
block

SDB (+)

Functional
ground

2
1

RSB (+)

RSB

RSA (-)

RSA

Shielding wire

Functional
ground

Next PT

24V
+DC

For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables on page 125.
Connecting an NT631/
NT631C and NT-AL001(RS485)

The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay terminal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
NT631/NT631C

NT-AL001

Host

RS-485

RDA

NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation

TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA

RS-422A/
485
terminal
block

NT-AL001 side
Pin number Abbreviation

RDA (-)

TRM

RDB (+)

SDA (-)

SDB (+)

SDB (+)
Functional
ground

RSA (-)

8
RS-422A
terminal
block

7
5

6
4

3
2
1

RSB (+)

RSB

24V
+DC

Shielding wire

Functional
ground

Next PT

For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables on page 125.

Section 5-1

Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Connection between
NT631/NT631C Units (RS422A)

The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay terminal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
NT631/NT631C

Host

NT-AL001

RS-422A

RDA

NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation

TRM

RDA (-)

RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA

RS-422A/
485
terminal
block

NT631/NT631C side

Short-circuit tool

TRM

RDB (+)

SDA (-)

SDB (+)

RSA (-)

24V
+DC

Functional
ground

RDA
TRM

RDA (-)

RSB (+)

RSB

Abbreviation

RS-422A/
485
terminal
block

RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA

RSB (+)

Shielding
wire

Functional
ground

RSB

24V
+DC

* Short TRM and RDA terminals of the NT631/NT631C at the end of the RS422A cable (* marked in the above figure) using the short-circuit tool supplied with the NT631/NT631C.
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables on page 125.

Section 5-1

Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Connection between
NT631/NT631C Units (RS485)

The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below. Insert a relay terminal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below.
NT631/NT631C

NT-AL001

Host

RS-485

NT631/NT631C side

NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation

RDA

RDA (-)

TRM
RDB
SDA

RS-422A/
485
terminal
block

SDB

Short-circuit tool

RDA

RDA (-)

TRM

RDB (+)

SDA (-)

SDB (+)

RSA (-)

RSB (+)

RSA

Abbreviation

TRM
RS-422A/
485
terminal
block

RDB
SDA
SDB

RSB (+)

Functional
ground

RSA

Functional
ground

Shielding wire

RSB

24V
+DC

* Short TRM and RDA terminals of the NT631/NT631C at the end of the RS485 cable (* marked in the above figure) using the short-circuit tool supplied with the NT631/NT631C.
For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables on page 125.
Connecting an NT-AL001 and Host
NT631/NT631C

Host

NT-AL001

RS-232C

Wiring when connecting a CS-series Serial Communications Board, CS/
CJ-series Serial Communications Unit, CQM1H Serial Communications
Board, or C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communications Board
Applicable Units:
CS1W-SCU21(-V1)
CJ1W-SCU21(-V1)/CJ1W-SCU41(-V1)
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H
CS1D-CPU65H/67H (See note.)

Section 5-1

Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
CJ1G-CPU44/45
CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H
CJ1M-CPU11/12/13/21/22/23
CQM1H-CPU51/61
C200HE-CPU32/42(-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63(-Z)E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64(-Z)E
C200HX-CPU65–ZE/85–ZE

Note

A Serial Communications Board cannot be installed.

Usable Cables with Attached Connectors:
For host link, 1:1 NT Link, or 1:N NT Link (+5 V power supplied from PLC)
XW2Z-070T-1(9-pin to 9-pin, 0.7 m)
XW2Z-200T-1(9-pin to 9-pin, 2 m)
1

NT-AL001 side
Abbreviation Pin number

RS-232C
connector

PLC side
Shielding wire

Abbreviation Pin number
Connector
hood

Connector
hood

−

+5V

−

RS-232C
connector

(9-pin type)

Since the CS1G/H, CQM1H, and C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E have a +5 V output,
no external power supply is required for the NT-AL001.

5-1-4

Recommended Connectors, Cables, and Crimp Terminals
Connectors and Cables Recommended for RS-232C
When making an RS-232C connecting cable, as far as possible use the recommended parts indicated in the table below. Some Units come supplied with
one connector and connector hood.
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.
Name
Connector

Model

Remarks

Delivered with

XM2A-0901

9-pin type
Made by OMRON

CS/CJ-series PLCs,
C-series CQM1, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CVM1/CV-series CPU Units
CV500-LK201

XM2A-2501

25-pin type
Made by OMRON

C500-LK203
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C200H-LK201-V1

DB-25P

25-pin type
Made by JAE

3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1

Section 5-1

Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Name
Connector
hood

Cable

Model
XM2S-0911

Remarks
9-pin type
Made by OMRON

Delivered with
C-series CQM1, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CVM1/CV-series CPU Units
CV500-LK201

XM2S-0913
XM2S-0911-E

Made by OMRON 9-pin
Made by OMRON 9-pin CS/CJ-series CPU Units

XM2S-2511

25-pin type
Made by OMRON

C500-LK203
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C200H-LK201-V1

DB-C2-J9

25-pin type
Made by JAE

3G2A5-LK201-EV1
3G2A6-LK201-EV1

AWG28×5P
IFVV-SB

Multi-core shielded
cable
Made by Fujikura, Ltd.

CO-MA-VV-SB
5P×28AWG

Multi-core shielded
cable
Made by Hitachi, Ltd.

Cables with Connectors Made by OMRON
When connecting an NT-AL001 and a PLC, use the OMRON cables with connectors indicated in the table below.
Model
XW2Z-070T-1
XW2Z-200T-1

Note

Cable Length
Connector Specification
0.7 m
9-pin ⇔ 9-pin
Host link, NT Link (1:1), NT Link (1:N)
2m
+5 V power supplied from PLC
(Use when the PLC has a +5 V output.)

1. The maximum tensile load of the recommended cable is 30 N. Do not exceed this load.
2. After connecting a connecting cable, always tighten the connector screws.
Recommended Connectors, Cables and Crimp Terminals for RS-422A/
485
When making an RS-422A/485 connecting cable, as far as possible use the
recommended parts indicated in the table below. Some Units come supplied
with one connector and connector hood.
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.
Name
Connector

Connector
hood

Model

Maker

Remarks

XM2A-2501

25-pin type
Made by OMRON

Delivered with the following
Units:
C500-LK203
Delivered with the following
Units:
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1

DB-25P F-N

25-pin type
Made by JAE

XM2S-2511

25-pin type
Made by OMRON

Delivered with the following
Units:
C500-LK203

DB-C2-J9

25-pin type
Made by JAE

Delivered with the following
Units:
3G2A6-LK201-EV1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1

Section 5-1

Connecting to the Host’s RS-232C Port
Name
Cable

Model
TKVVBS4P-03

Maker
Tachii Electric Wire
Co., Ltd.

Crimp terminals

1.25-N3A
(fork type)

Japan Solderless
Terminal MFG

Y1.25-3.5L (fork Molex Inc.
type)

Remarks

Recommended cable size:
AWG22 to 18
(0.3 to 0.75 mm2)

The terminal screws of the NT631/NT631C are M3.5 specification. When wiring, use crimp terminals for M3.5 use. Tighten terminal screws with a tightening torque of 0.8 N⋅m.
Note

Always use crimp terminals for wiring.
Examples of applicable terminals
Round type

Fork type
7 mm max.

7 mm max.

5-1-5

Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485
Communications
The serial port B connector of the NT631/NT631C has a terminal resistance
setting terminal (TRM).
In RS-422A/485 communications, a terminal resistor must be set at the device
at the end of the communications cable, but not at any other device.
The NT631/NT631C has a built-in terminal resistor, and whether or not the
terminal resistance is applied is set by shorting or opening the terminal resistance setting terminals (TRM). The terminal resistance is 120 Ω.
When carrying out RS-422A/485 communications using serial port B, short
between TRM and RDA terminals at the NT631/NT631C at the end of the RS422A/485 cable. Leave these terminals open at NT631/NT631C PTs other
than the one at the end of the cable.
When not using RS-422A/485 communications, the terminal resistance setting is ineffective.
Short-circuit tool

RDA
TRM
RDB
SDA

TRM-RDA terminals
Function
Shorted
Terminal resistance is applied.
Short only at the NT631/NT631C connected to the end of an
RS-422A/485 cable.
Open
Terminal resistance is not applied.
Leave the terminals open when connecting an NT631/
NT631C anywhere other than at the end of the RS-422A/485
cable.

Note

Before connecting or disconnecting cables between devices, make sure that
the power supply to all of the connected devices (NT631/NT631C, PLC, etc.)
is OFF.

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Reference:

• The internal circuit of the NT631/NT631C is shown below.
-

RDA
Terminal resistor (120 Ω)
TRM

Making a connection here inserts a terminator between
+ (RDB) and - (RDA).

RDB

• For details on setting the terminal resistance of NT-AL001, refer to Settings at the RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter (NT-AL001) (page 81).

5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
The methods for connecting the RS-422A/485 port of the NT631/NT631C and
the RS-422A/485 port of the host are described here. There are the following
methods.
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON
PLCs (By using the memory link method, a connection can be made to any
arbitrary RS-422 unit). When making a connection to a host other than
OMRON PLCs, refer to the PLC Connection Manual (V042-E1-@) or Multi
Vendor Connection Manual (V060-E1-@).
• Method in which the RS-422A ports of the NT631/NT631C and host are
connected directly by an RS-422A cable (page 115).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to
500 m.
PT

Host
RS-422A cable
(max. 500 m)

• Method in which the RS-485 ports of the NT631/NT631C and host are
connected by an RS-485 cable (page 118).
When this method is used, the cable length can be extended up to
500 m.
This connection method can be used only with the NT Link (1:N) method (standard or high-speed) of type RS-485.
PT

Host
RS-485 cable
(max. 500 m)

• Method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple NT631/NT631Cs and the
RS-422A port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection (page 119).
This connection method is used with the RS-422A NT Link (1:N) method (standard or high-speed).
PT

Host

RS-422A cable
(max. total length 500 m)

• Method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT631/NT631Cs and the
RS-485 port of the host are connected in a 1:N connection (page 121).

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port

This connection method is used with the RS-485 NT Link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed).
PT

Host

RS-485 cable
(max. total length 500 m)

Note

One end of the wire must always be connected to the host (PLC), and there
must be no branching. Branching will cause problems such as transmission
delays and communications failures.

PLC

(At termination)

PLC

Relay terminal block

Max. 2 m

NT631C
(Not at
termination)

NT631

(Not at
termination) (Not at
termination)

NT631

Example of Good Connection

Reference:

5-2-1

NT631

NT631C

NT631

NT631C

NT631

(At
termination)

Examples of Bad Connections

CS/CJ-series CPU Units cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT
Link method. Use the 1:N connection NT Link method (standard or highspeed) instead to make the 1:1 connection. For details, refer to Using the NT
Link (1:N) Method (page 106) or Using the High-speed NT Link (1:N) Method
(page 108).

Host Types and Settings
The types of host that have an RS-422A port and can be connected to the
RS-422A/485 port of the NT631/NT631C, and the settings to be made at the
host, are described here.

When Using the Host Link
Method

Compatible Host Units
Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have the RS-422A/485 host link
function built in. With the CS/CJ-series and CQM1H, the host link method can
be used by installing a Serial Communications Board/Unit. In addition, some
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E CPU Unit can be connected in the host link method by
installing a Communications Board.
With the CPM2A and CPM2C, an RS-422A of 1:1 NT Link can be created
through a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
Check the model and series of the PLC and the type of the installed Board or
Unit before making a connection.

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port

The hosts featuring the RS-422A/485 host link function and can be connected
to the RS-422A/485 port of the NT631/NT631C are indicated in the table
below.
PLC
Series

CPU Unit with built-in Host
Link

CS Series

CPU Units Connectable with
Host Link Unit or
Connectable
Host Link Units or
Communications Board/
to
Expansion Communications
Unit
Board/Units
CS1G
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1) CS1W-SCB41(-V1)
CS1W-SCU31(-V1)
CS1H
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67E(V1)
CS1D
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/
67H
CS1D-CPU65H/67H(*1)

CJ Series

C Series

CJ1G-CPU44/45
CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H
CJ1M-CPU11/12/13/21/22/23
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1

CJ1W-SCU31(-V1)
CJ1W-SCU41(-V1)

CJ1G
CJ1H
CJ1M

3G2A6-LK202-EV1

C1000H
C2000H

C200HS-CPU01/03/21/23/31/
33-E
C200HS-CPU01/21-EC
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-E
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/
85-ZE

C200H-LK202-V1

C200HS
C200HE
C200HE-ZE
C200HG
C200HG-ZE
C200HX
C200HX-ZE

C200HE-CPU32/42-E
C200HE-CPU32/42-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/
85-ZE
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1
C1000H-CPU01-EV1
C2000H-CPU01-EV1

C200HW-COM03/06-EV1

C200HE
C200HE-ZE
C200HG
C200HG-ZE
C200HX
C200HX-ZE

3G2A5-LK201-EV1

C1000H
C2000H
C1000H
C2000H
CPM1

C500-LK203

CPM1-10/20/30CDR-@
+CPM1-CIF11
CPM1A-10/20/30/40CD@-@
+CPM1-CIF11
CPM2A-30/40/60CD@@-@
+CPM1-CIF11
(Peripheral port connection)

CPM2A

CPM2C-10/20@@@@@@-@(*2)

CPM2C
CQM1H-CPU51/61

CQM1H-SCB41

CQM1H

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
PLC
Series

CPU Unit with built-in Host
Link

CV Series CV500-CPU01-EV1
(*3)
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1

CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1

CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1
Series (*3) CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
SRM1

CPU Units Connectable with
Host Link Unit or
Connectable
Host Link Units or
Communications Board/
to
Expansion Communications
Unit
Board/Units
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV500-LK201
CV500

CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2

CV1000
CV2000
CV500-LK201

SRM1-C02-V1+CPM1-CIF11

CVM1

SRM1

This CPU Unit is for a Duplex-CPU Unit System. The CS1W-SCB41(-V1)
Serial Communications Board cannot be used.

Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect.

CPU Units of CVM1/CV-series PLCs without the suffix -EV@ cannot be
connected.

The host link method cannot be used when an NT631/NT631C is connected
using RS-485. To use the host link method, connect by RS-422A.
Settings at the Host
When using the RS-422A host link method, the settings shown below must be
made at the host (depending on the Unit, some of these settings may not be
necessary, or settings not shown here may be necessary).
Item

Setting at Host

I/O port

RS-422A

Communications speed

Set the same speed as for the NT631/NT631C. (*1)

Transfer code
Parity

ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Even

1-to-1/1-to-N
Instruction level

1-to-N(*2)
Level 1, 2, 3

Unit #

Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
Comm. Speed memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to 67-2 Setting the Host Link Method (page 155).

The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT631/NT631C in a single host link.

The setting methods for each type of Unit are described in the following.

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Connecting to a C-series
Host Link Unit

C200H/C200HS/C200HE(-Z)E/C200HG(-Z)E/C200HX(-Z)E
Rack-mounting Unit: C200H-LK201-V1
Setting the Front Switches
Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in
the setting value window agree with the following:
LK201
XMT

RUN
RCV

ERROR

• Unit # (SW1, SW2)
Set these switches to 0.

SW2

SW1
0

SW3

• Instruction level, parity, and transfer code (SW4)
Set this switch to 2.

SW4
5

• Communications speed (SW3)
Set this switch to 5 to select 9600 bps.
Set this switch to 6 to select 19200 bps.

Setting the Rear Switches
• Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this switch to ON.
Terminator
ON

1-to-1 (ON)
1-to-N (OFF)

OFF

• 1-to-1/1-to-N protocol selection (selector switch)
Set this switch to 1-to-N (OFF).

C1000H/C2000H Rack-mounting Unit: 3G2A5-LK201-EV1
Setting the Front Switches

Mode
selector
Host Local

• Mode selector (key switch)
Set this to Host link.

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Setting the Rear Switches

• I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.

I/O port

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

RS-422A
RS-232C

Synchronization
Internal
External

• Unit # (DIP SW1)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).

Terminator

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

OFF
ON

CTS
0V
External

SW1

• Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to Internal.
SW2

• Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select
19200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select
9600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
• 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
• Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
• CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0 V (ON).
• Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this switch to ON.

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
C1000H/C2000H Rack-mounting Unit: C500-LK203
Setting the Rear Switches

• I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
5 V supply
ON
OFF

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

I/O port
RS-422A
RS-232C

Synchronization
Internal
External

SW1

• Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-7)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-7 to OFF (0).

Terminator

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

OFF
ON

CTS
0V
External
ON

• Synchronization (selector switch)
Set this to Internal.
SW2

• Communications speed
(DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select
19,200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select
9,600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
• 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
• Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
• CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0 V (ON).
• Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this switch to ON.

C200H/C1000H/C2000H CPU-mounting Unit: 3G2A6-LK202-EV1
Setting the Rear Switches
• Unit #, parity, and transfer code
(DIP SW1-1 to SW1-5)
Set SW1-1 to SW1-5 to OFF (0).
* Parity is fixed at Even Parity. Transfer code
is fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits.
• Communications speed (DIP SW2-1 to SW2-4)
Set these switches to 0010 to select 19200 bps.
Set these switches to 1010 to select 9600 bps.
(0: OFF 1: ON)
SW1

SW2

SW3

• 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP SW2-6)
Set SW2-6 to OFF (0) (1-to-N).
• Instruction level (DIP SW2-7, SW2-8)
Set these switches to ON (1).
(Levels 1, 2, and 3 are enabled.)
• Terminator setting (DIP SW3-1 to SW3-6)
Set SW3-1, SW3-3, and SW3-5 to ON (1).
Set SW3-2, SW3-4, and SW3-6 to OFF (0).
(Set terminator ON.)

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Connecting to a CVM1/CVseries Host Link Unit

CVM1/CV-series Rack-mounting Unit: CV500-LK201
A CVM1/CV-series Host Link Unit (CV500-LK201) has two connectors (communications ports 1 and 2). To use the RS-422A host link method, set communications port 2 to RS-422A.
Communications port 2 is a 9-pin connector which allows selection of the RS232C or RS-422A method. When this port is used with the RS-422A method,
the I/O port selector switch on the front of the Unit must be set to RS-422A
(the lower position).
CPU Bus Unit Settings
When connecting to a CVM1/CV-series Host Link Unit, set the following communications conditions for the CPU Bus Unit settings.
Item
Communications speed

Set the same speed as for the NT631/NT631C. (*1)

Transfer code
Parity

ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Even

1-to-1/1-to-N

1-to-N(*2)
Level 1, 2, 3

Instruction level

Setting at Host

Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
Comm. Speed memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to 67-2 Setting the Host Link Method (page 155).

The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually
possible to connect more than one NT631/NT631C in a single host link.

100

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Setting the Front Switches

• Unit # (SW3, SW4)
Set these switches to 0.
Communications port 1
(RS-232C)

Communications port 2
(RS-232C/RS-422A)
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
RS-422A

• I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
• Communications condition setting (DIP SW1)
Set this switch to OFF.
Communications are executed in accordance with the
CPU Bus Unit system settings made at the PLC. The
initial values for the system settings are as follows.
- Communications speed: 9,600 bps
- Parity: Even
- Xon/Xoff control: Not executed
- Communications method: Full duplex
- Stop bits: 2 stop bits
- Data length: 7 bits

• Terminator setting (selector switch)
Set this to ON.

Connecting to a CPU Unit

CVM1/CV-series (-EV@) CPU Units
• CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01-EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1
• CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2
PLC Setup
When connecting to a CVM1/CV-series CPU Unit, set the following communications conditions for the PLC Setup.
Item
Communications speed

Set the same speed as for the NT631/NT631C. (*1)

Stop bit
Parity

2 stop bits
Even

Data length
Unit #

ASCII 7 bits
00

Setting at Host

Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
Comm. Speed memory switch at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to 67-2 Setting the Host Link Method (page 155).

Either set the PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device (e.g. CX-Programmer), or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device to the
CPU Unit.
For details on the PLC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/CV1000/
CV2000 Operation Manual: Ladder Diagrams (W202-E1-@).

101

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Setting the Front Switches

• Host link communications method
selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.
• Communications type setting (DIP SW3)
Set SW3 to OFF.
(for host link communications)

I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
RS-422A

• Host link default value settings
(DIP SW4)
To effect the existing DIP switch
settings, set SW4 to ON.
To effect the values set in the PLC
Setup, set SW4 to OFF.
Note
For CPU Units manufactured before or
during June 1995 (lot No. @@65), the
existing DIP switch settings differ from
the PLC Setup default values as follows.
- Existing DIP switch settings:
2,400 bps, 1 stop bit, even parity, 7 bit
data length
- PLC Setup default values:
9,600 bps, 2 stop bits, even parity, 7
bit data length
For CPU Units manufactured from July
1995 onward (lot No. @@75), the
stipulated values in the DIP switch
settings also are 9600 bps and 2 stop bits
• Terminator setting (DIP SW6)
Set this switch to ON.
(Set terminator ON.)

C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1H, or SRM1
The connection method depends upon the model of PLC being used, as
shown in the following table.
PLC model
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CQM1H
CPM1
CPM2A, SRM1
CPM2C

Reference:

Connection method
Connect to the RS-422A port (port A) on a Communications
Board.
Connect to the RS-422A port (port 2) on a Serial Communications Board.
Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF11 RS422A Adapter.
Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF11 RS422A Adapter.
Connect to the peripheral port (on a CPM2C-CN111 or
CS1W-CN114 Connecting Cable) through a CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter.
(The CPM2C-CN111 splits the Unit’s Communications Port
into a RS-232C port and a peripheral port.)

• There are no Communications Boards for the C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E in
which port B is the RS-422A port.
• There are no Serial Communications Boards for the CQM1H in which port
1 is the RS-422A port.

102

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
PLC Setup Area Settings

When connecting to a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E or CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C,
CQM1H CPU Units or SRM1, set the following communications conditions for
the PLC Setup area.
Item

Setting at Host

I/O port

RS-422A

Communications mode
Communications speed

Host link mode

Stop bit
Parity

2 stop bits
Even

Data length
Unit #

ASCII 7 bits
00

Set the same speed as for the NT631/NT631C. (*1)

Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the
Comm. Speed at the NT631/NT631C. For details, refer to 6-7-2 Setting the
Host Link Method (page 155).

Set the PLC Setup area settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g.
CX-Programmer).
For details on operations relating to the PLC Setup area, refer to the manual
for the PLC which is used.
The PLC Setup area word numbers and settings to be made depending on
the Unit to which the connection is made are shown below.
When using port A of the Communications Board of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Word #
DM6555

Setting
0001

Setting Contents
Host link mode, no CTS control
Communications conditions set by the contents of DM

DM6556

0303

Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, communications speed: 9600 bps

0304

Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, communications speed: 19200 bps

0000

Unit # 00

DM6558

When using a CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1
Word #

Setting

Setting Contents

DM6650

0001

Host link mode, no CTS control
Communications conditions set by the contents of DM

DM6651

0303

Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, communications speed: 9600 bps

0304

Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, communications speed: 19200 bps
Unit # 00

DM6653

0000

When using a CQM1H
Word #

Setting

Setting Contents

DM6550

0001

Host link mode, no CTS control
Communications conditions set by the contents of DM

DM6551

0303

Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, communications speed: 9600 bps
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, communications speed: 19200 bps
Unit # 00

0304
DM6553

0000

103

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Connecting to a CPM2C

CS1W-CN114 CPM2C

Peripheral port

RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)

Setting Switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communications Board
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communications Board as follows.
Switch 1:
Switch 2:

4 (4-wire = RS-422A)
ON (terminator ON = terminating resistance enabled)

Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board
Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows.
2-wire or 4-wire selector (WIRE):

4 (4-wire = RS-422A)
Terminating resistance switch (TERM): ON (terminator ON = terminating
resistance enabled)
Serial Communications Board
(Inner Board slot 1)

Terminator Switch (TERM)
Set to ON (right side).
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)
Set to 4 (right side).

Setting the Switches on an RS-422A Adapter
CPM1CIF11

CPM1

Set the terminator selector switch to ON (upper position).

Connecting to a CS-series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board with RS-422A/485 port equipped for CS-series
CPU Unit:
CS1W-SCB41(-V1) (The port 2 is an RS-422A/485 port.)

104

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Serial Communications Board Switch Settings

Set the switches on the Serial Communications Board as shown below.
2-wire or 4-wire selector (WIRE): 4 (4-wire = RS-422A)
Terminating resistance switch (TERM): ON (terminator ON = terminating
resistance enabled).
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console
or CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area)
of the CPU Unit. After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the power ON, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or
executing the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings are shown.
Allocated DM
Area words
Port 2

Setting

Setting Contents

DM32010

8000

Host link mode, 2 stop bits,
data length 7 bits, even parity,

DM32011

0000
0007

Communications speed: 9600 bps
Communications speed:19200 bps

DM32012
DM32013

0000
0000

Transmit delay time0 ms.
No CTS control Unit, No.0 for host link

Connecting to a CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Unit
CS/CJ-series Rack-mounting Units:
CS1W-SCU31-V1 (Port 1 and port 2 are both RS-422A/485 ports.)
CJ1W-SCU31-V1 (Port 1 and port 2 are both RS-422A/485 ports.)
CJ1W-SCU41(-V1) (Port 1 is an RS-422A/485 port.)
Setting the Front Switches
Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit using the rotary
switches on the front of the Unit. Set the number or symbol in the setting display window in the following way using a flat-blade screwdriver. When using a
CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Unit set the switches as shown below.
2-wire or 4-wire selector (WIRE): 4 (4-wire = RS-422A)
Terminating resistance switch (TERM): ON (terminator ON = terminating
resistance enabled).
DM Area Allocation Settings
From the Programming Device (i.e., a Programming Console or CX-Programmer), write the settings directly to the CPU Unit's DM Area Setup Area. After
the settings have been written, they will be enabled when the power supply is
cycled, the Unit is restarted, the communications port is restarted, or a STUP
instruction is executed.
The DM Area words that are allocated and the contents of the settings are
given in the following table.

105

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port

m = DM 30000 + 100 × unit number
Allocated DM Area
words
Port 1

Using the NT Link (1:1)
Method

Setting

Setting Contents

Port 2
m+10

8000

m+1

m+11

0000

Host link mode, 2 stop bits,
even parity, data length 7 bits
Communications speed: 9600 bps

m+2

m+12

0007
0000

Communications speed: 19200 bps
Transmit delay time 0 ms

m+3

m+13

0000

No CTS control Unit, No.0 for host link

Compatible Host Units
Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have the RS-422A NT Link (1:1)
function built in.
• The C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E CPU Units can be connected by the RS-422A
NT Link (1:1) method by installing a Communications Board.
• The CQM1H CPU Units can be connected by the RS-422A NT Link (1:1)
method by installing a Serial Communications Board.
Check the model and series of the PLC against the type of CPU Unit before
making the connections.
The hosts that can be connected to the RS-422A port of the NT631/NT631C
by the RS-422A NT Link (1:1) method are indicated in the table below.
PLC Series
C Series

CPU Units with Built-in RS-422A NT
Link (1:1) Function
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*1)

Model Name
C200HE(-Z)E

C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*1)

C200HG(-Z)E

C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*1)

C200HX(-Z)E

(*1)

C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E

C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE(*1)

Series (*3)

CVM1 Series

106

(*3)

C200HX-CPU85-ZE(*1)
CQM1H-CPU51/61

CQM1H

CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1

CV500
CV1000

CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2

CV2000
CVM1

One of the following Communications Boards is required:
C200HW-COM03-EV1 or C200HW-COM06-EV1.

A CQM1H-SCB41-E Serial Communications Board is required.

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
*3

CPU Units of CVM1/CV-series PLCs without the suffix -EV@ cannot be
connected.

The NT Link (1:1) method cannot be used using RS-485. To use the NT Link
(1:1) method, connect by RS-422A.
The 1:1 NT Link connection using RS-422A/485 is not possible with the
CPM1, CPM2A, or CPM2C.
Settings at the Host
The setting methods for each type of Unit are described in the following.
• Connecting to a CVM1/CV-series (-EV@) CPU Units
• CV500-CPU01-EV1/CV1000-CPU01-EV1/CV2000-CPU01-EV1
• CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2
PLC Setup
When connecting to a CVM1/CV-series CPU Unit by the NT Link (1:1)
method, no particular settings are required at the PLC Setup.
Setting the Front Switches
• Host link communications method selection
(selector switch)
Set this to RS-422A.

I/O port selector switch
RS-232C

• Communications type setting (DIP SW3)
Set this switch to ON.
(for communications by NT Link)

RS-422A

• Terminator setting (DIP SW6)
Set this switch to ON.
(Set terminator ON.)

• Connecting to a C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
PLC Setup Area Settings
Write the PLC Setup area (data memory) settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g. CX-Programmer) in accordance with the host model.
Host Model
Port A of

C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E*1

Port 2 of CQM1H

Word #

Setting

DM6555

4000

DM6550

4000

RS-422A port of the Communications Board

RS-422A port of the Serial Communications Board

Setting Contents
Use NT Link (1:1)

For details on operations relating to the PLC Setup area, refer to the manual
for the PLC you are using.

107

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port

Setting the DIP Switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communications
Board
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communications Board as follows.
Switch 1: 4 (4-wire = RS-422A)
Switch 2: ON (terminator ON = terminating resistance enabled).
Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board
Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows.
2-wire or 4-wire selector (WIRE): 4 (4-wire = RS-422A)
Terminating resistance switch (TERM): ON (terminator ON = terminating
resistance enabled).
Serial Communications Board
(Inner Board slot 1)

Terminator Switch (TERM)
Set to ON (right side).
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)
Set to 4 (right side).

Using the NT Link (1:N)
Method

Compatible Host Units
The OMRON PLCs that can be connected using the RS-422A/485 NT Link
(1:N) method are the CS/CJ-series, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, and CQM1H models only. A Serial Communications Board/Unit or a Communications Board
must be installed to make the connection.
Check the model and series of the PLC against the type of CPU Unit or communications board before making the connections.
The hosts that can be connected to the RS-232C port of the NT631/NT631C
by the RS-422A NT Link (1:N) function via an Adapter are indicated in the
table below.
PLC
Series
CS
Series

CPU Units with
Built-in NT Link
(1:1) Function

CPU Unit that becomes
connectable by installing a
Communications Board/Unit
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)(*1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)(*1)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H(*1)

Model Name

CS1G
CS1H
CS1D

CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H(*1)
CS1D-CPU65H/67H(*2)
CJ
Series

CJ1G-CPU44/45(*3)
(*3)

CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H(*3)

CJ1M-CPU11/12/13/21/22/23(*3)

108

CJ1G
CJ1H
CJ1M

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
PLC
Series

CPU Units with
Built-in NT Link
(1:1) Function

C Series

CPU Unit that becomes
connectable by installing a
Communications Board/Unit
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*4)

Model Name

C200HE (-Z)E

C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E(*4)
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*4)

C200HG (-Z)E

C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E(*4)
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*4)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E(*4)
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*4)

C200HX (-Z)E

(*4)

C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E

C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*4)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E(*4)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE(*4)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE(*4)
CQM1H-CPU51/61(*5)

CQM1H

A CS1W-SCB41(-V1) Serial Communications Board or CS1W-SCU31-V1
Serial Communications Unit is required.

This CPU Unit is for a Duplex-CPU Unit System. The CS1W-SCB41(-V1)
Serial Communications Board cannot be used. Use the CS1W-SCU31-V1
Communications Unit.

A CS1W-SCU31-V1 or CS1W-SCU41(-V1) Serial Communications Unit is
required.

A C200HW-COM03-V1 or C200-COM06-V1 Communications Board is
required.

A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.

Settings at the Host
C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
PLC Setup Area Settings
Write the communications conditions directly into the PLC Setup area (data
memory) using a Programming Device (e.g. CX-Programmer).
Make the setting indicated in the word shown below.
Connection to
Port A of a C200HX/
HG/HE(-Z)E*1

Word #
DM6555

Setting
5@00

Port 2 of a CQM1H*2

DM6550

5@00

Setting Contents
Use NT Link (1:N)
@ = highest unit number of the
connected PTs (1 to 7)*3

The Communications Board’s RS-422A/485 port

The Serial Communications Board’s RS-422A/485 port

When using C200HE(-Z)E, the maximum PT unit number is 3.

For details on setting the PLC Setup area settings, refer to the PLC’s operation manual.

109

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Reference:

• There are no Serial Communications Boards for the C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
in which port B is the RS-422A/485 port.
• There are no Serial Communications Boards for the CQM1H in which port
1 is the RS-422A/485 port.
Setting the DIP Switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communications
Board
Set the switches on a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E Communications Board as follows.
Switch 1: 4 (4-wire = RS-422A), or 2 (2-wire = RS-485)
Switch 2: ON (terminator ON = terminating resistance enabled).
Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board
Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows.
2-wire or 4-wire selector (WIRE): 4 (4-wire = RS-422A), or

2 (2-wire = RS-485)
Terminating resistance switch (TERM): ON (terminator ON = terminating
resistance enabled).
Serial Communications Board
(Inner Board slot 1)

Terminator Switch (TERM)
Set to ON (right side)
Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)
When using RS-422A: Set to 4 (right side) for 4-wire type.
When using RS-485: Set to 2 (left side) for 2-wire type.

Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board with RS-422A/485 port equipped for CS-series
CPU Unit:
CS1W-SCB41(-V1) (Port 2 is an RS-422A/485 port.)
Setting the Front Switches
2-wire or 4-wire selector (WIRE): 4 (4-wire = RS-422A), or

2 (2-wire = RS-485)
Terminating resistance switch (TERM): ON (terminator ON = terminating
resistance enabled).

110

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port

RDY
COMM1
COMM2

Port 1
RS-232C
PORT1
Terminal resistance setting switch (TER)
Set to ON (Terminal resistance is present.)
(right side).
OFF

ON TERM

Port 2
RS-422A/485

WIRE

Two wire type/four wire type changeover switch (WIRE)
For RS-422A: 4 (4 wire type) (right side)
For RS-485: 2 (2 wire type) (left side)

PORT2
(RS422/
RS485)
SCB41

Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console
or CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area)
of the CPU Unit. After settings are written, they become effective by turning
the power ON, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or executing the STUP command.
In the following, the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings
are shown.
Allocated DM
Area words
Port 2

Setting

DM32010
DM32011

8200

DM32016

000@

0000 to 0009

Setting Contents

(*1)

1:N NT Link Mode
Baud rate (standard)
@ = The highest unit number of the connected
PTs (0 to 7)

Set any value between 0000 and 0009 hex for the baud rate. The same
baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between 0000
and 0009 hex.

For example, when connecting PTs with model numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6 to port
2 in the NT Link (1:N), set a value of 8200 hex for D32010, 0000 hex for
DM32011, and 0006 hex for D32016.
Connecting to a CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Unit
CS/CJ-series Rack-mounting Units:
CS1W-SCU31-V1 (Port 1 and 2 are both RS-422A/485 ports.)
CJ1W-SCU31-V1 (Port 1 and 2 are both RS-422A/485 ports.)
CJ1W-SCU41(-V1) (Port 1 is an RS-422A/485 port.)
Setting the Front Switches
Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit using the rotary
switches on the front of the Unit. Set the number or symbol in the setting display window in the following way using a flat-blade screwdriver. When using a
CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Unit set the switches as shown below.

111

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port

2-wire or 4-wire selector (WIRE): 4 (4-wire = RS-422A), or

2 (2-wire = RS-485)
Terminating resistance switch (TERM): ON (terminator ON = terminating
resistance enabled).
DM Area Allocation Settings
From the Programming Device (i.e., a Programming Console or CX-Programmer), write the settings directly to the CPU Unit's DM Area Setup Area. After
the settings have been written, they will be enabled when the power supply is
cycled, the Unit is restarted, the communications port is restarted, or a STUP
instruction is executed.
The DM Area words that are allocated and the contents of the settings are
given in the following table.
m = DM 30000 + 100 × unit number
Allocated DM Area words
Port 1
Port 2
m
m+1

m+10
m+11

8200

m+6

m+16

000@

Using the High-speed NT
Link (1:N) Method

Setting

0000 to 0009

Setting Contents

(*1)

1:N NT Link Mode
Baud rate (standard)
@ = The highest unit number
of the connected PTs (0 to
7)

Set any value between 0000 and 0009 hex for the baud rate. The same
baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between 0000
and 0009 hex.

Compatible Host Units
Only OMRON’s CS/CJ-series PLCs support the high-speed 1:N NT Link
through RS-422A/RS-485. The high-speed 1:N NT Link must be established
through a Serial Communications Board/Unit. (Even CS/CJ-series Units without the “-V1” suffix can be connected via a high-speed 1:N NT Link by mounting a Serial Communications Board/Unit.)
Be sure to check the model number of the PLC and Board/Unit before trying
to establish the high-speed 1:N NT Link.
The following table shows which CS-series PLCs can be connected to an
NT631/NT631C with the high-speed 1:N NT Link through RS-422A/RS-485.
PLC
Series
CS
Series

CPU Units with
Built-in NT Link
(1:1) Function

CPU Unit that becomes
connectable by installing a
Communications Board/Unit
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)(*1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)

(*1)

CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H(*1)

Model
Name
CS1G
CS1H
CS1D

CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H(*1)
CS1D-CPU65H/67H(*2)
CJ
Series

CJ1G-CPU44/45(*3)
CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H(*3)
CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H(*3)

CJ1G
CJ1H
CJ1M

CJ1M-CPU11/12/13/21/22/23(*3)
*1

112

A CS1W-SCB41(-V1) Serial Communications Board or CS1W-SCU31-V1
Serial Communications Unit is required.

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
*2

This CPU Unit is for a Duplex-CPU Unit System. The CS1W-SCB41(-V1)
Serial Communications Board cannot be used. Use the CS1W-SCU31-V1
Communications Unit.

A CS1W-SCU31-V1 or CS1W-SCU41(-V1) Serial Communications Unit is
required.

Settings at the Host
Connecting to a CS-series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with an RS-422A/485 port for CSseries CPU Units:
CS1W-SCB41(-V1) (Port 2 is an RS-422A/485 port.)
Reference:

CS-series Serial Communications Boards and Units with lot number 991220
(12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link. Boards and Units
with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.
Setting the Front Switches
Set the switches on a Serial Communications Board as follows.
2-wire or 4-wire selector (WIRE): 4 (4-wire = RS-422A), or

2 (2-wire = RS-485)
Terminating resistance switch (TERM): ON (terminator ON = terminating
resistance enabled).
RDY
COMM1
COMM2

Port 1
RS-232C

PORT1

Terminator Switch (TERM)
Set to ON (right side).
OFF

ON TERM
4

WIRE

PORT2
(RS422/
RS485)

Port 2
RS-422A/485

Wire Selection Switch (WIRE)
RS-422A: Set to 4 (right side) for 4-wire type.
RS-485: Set to 2 (left side) for 2-wire type.

SCB41

Allocation DM area settings for CPU Unit
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console
or CX-Programmer) directly into the allocation DM area (system setting area)
of the CPU Unit. After settings are written, they become effective by turning
the power ON, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or executing the STUP command.
In the following table, the relevant word addresses in the allocation DM area
and settings are shown.
Allocated DM Area
words
Port 2
DM32010

Setting

8200

Setting Contents

1:N NT Link Mode

113

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Allocated DM Area
words
Port 2
DM32011
DM32016
*1

Setting

000A
000@

Setting Contents

Baud rate (standard)
@ = The highest unit number of the connected
PTs (0 to 7)

For example, when connecting PTs with model numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6 to
port 2, set the value 8200 hex to DM32010, 000A hex to DM32011, and
0006 hex to DM32016.

Connecting to a CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Unit
CS/CJ-series Rack-mounting Units:
CS1W-SCU31-V1 (Port 1 and 2 are RS-422A/485 port.)
CJ1W-SCU31-V1 (Port 1 and 2 are RS-422A/485 port.)
CJ1W-SCU41(-V1) (Port 1 is an RS-422A/485 port.)
Setting the Front Switches
Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit using the rotary
switches on the front of the Unit. Set the number or symbol in the setting display window in the following way using a flat-blade screwdriver. When using a
CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Unit set the switches as shown below.
2-wire or 4-wire selector (WIRE): 4 (4-wire = RS-422A), or

When using the Memory
Link Method

Setting

Setting Contents

m
m+1

m+10
m+11

8200
000A

1:N NT Link Mode
Baud rate (standard)

m+6

m+16

000@

@ = The highest unit number of the connected PTs (0 to 7)

With the memory link method, the connection can be made to a personal
computer and an FA computer with RS-422A.
When connecting to the host with the memory link method, it is necessary to
create a program for the memory link at the host side.

114

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port

The following are the communications conditions that can be used with the
memory link method. For the host (a personal computer, an FA computer,
etc.), its setting should be compatible to one of the communications conditions listed in the following table. Set the same communications conditions at
the NT631/NT631C by the memory switch. (page 160).

5-2-2

Item
Input/Output board

RS-422A

Setting at Host

Communications speed
Data bits length

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.
7 bits, 8 bits

Stop bits length
Parity

1 bit, 2 bits
None, even, odd

Flow control

None, XON/XOFF

Direct Connection between RS-422A Ports at Both Units
The connection method in which the RS-422A ports of an NT631/NT631C
and a host are connected is described here.
Host Link Unit, CPU Unit,
Communications Unit/Board

NT631/NT631C
RESET
RDA
TRM
RDB
SDA
SDB
CSA
CSB
24V

SYSMAC
CS/CJ-series PLC,
C-series PLC,
CVM1/CV series
PLC, SRM1

PR I NTER PORT B PORT A

+DC

Serial port B
(RS-422A/485, terminal block)

9-pin connector or
25-pin connector

RS-422A cable with connectors (max. length: 500 m)

Connecting an NT631/NT631C and Host (RS-422A)
NT631/NT631C

Host
RS-422A

Wiring When Connecting a C-series Host Link Unit or CPM1 (Host Link)
Applicable Units:
C200H-LK202-V1
3G2A5-LK201-EV1
C500-LK203
3G2A6-LK202-EV1

RDA

NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation

TRM

RDA (-)

RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB

RS-422A/
485
terminal
block

Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire

TRM

RDB (+)

−

SDA (-)

SDB (+)

−

RSA (-)

SDB (+)

RSB (+)

RDA (-)

Functional
ground

8
9

24V
+DC

PLC side
Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
FG
hood

RDB (+)
RS-422A
terminal
block

−
Functional
ground

(9-pin type)

For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables on page 125.

115

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Wiring When Connecting CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, or SRM1
Applicable Units:
CPM1-10CDR-@
CPM1A-10CD@-@

CPM1-20CDR-@
CPM1A-20CD@-@

CPM1A-30CD@-@
CPM2A-30CD@@-@

CPM1A-40CD@-@
CPM2A-40CD@@-@

CPM2A-60CD@@-@
CPM2C-10@@@@@@-@

CPM2C-20@@@@@@-@

SRM1-C02-V2

Connect to the PLC through a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
RDA

NT631/NT631C side

TRM

Abbreviation

RDA (-)

RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB

RS-422A/
485
terminal
block

Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire

PLC side
Abbreviation

RDB (+)

SDB (+)
SDA (-)

SDB (+)

RDB (+)

RSA (-)

RDA (-)

Functional
ground

RS-422A
terminal
block

SG
SDB
SDA

SDA (-)

RSB (+)

TRM

RDB
RDA

(9-pin type)

24V
+DC

For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables on page 125.
Wiring When Connecting a CS-series Serial Communications Board, CS/
CJ-series Serial Communications Unit, C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Communications Board, CQM1H Serial Communications Board, or
CVM1/CV-series Host Link Unit
Applicable Units:
CS1W-SCU31-V1
CJ1W-SCU31-V1/CJ1W-SCU41(-V1)
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H
CS1D-CPU66H/67H (See note.)
C200HE-CPU32/42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE/85-ZE
CQM1H-CPU51/61
CV500-LK201 (communications port 2)

Note

116

A Serial Communications Board cannot be installed.

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
RDA

Abbreviation

TRM

RDA (-)

RDB
SDA
SDB

RS-422A/
485
terminal
block

RSA
RSB

Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire

PLC side

NT631/NT631C side

Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
FG
hood

TRM

SDA (-)

RDB (+)

SDB (+)

SDA (-)

−

SDB (+)

−

RSA (-)

−

RSB (+)

RDA (-)

Functional
ground

7
8
9

RS-422A
terminal
block

−
RDB (+)
−

24V
+DC

(9-pin type)

For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables on page 125.
Wiring When Connecting a CVM1/CV-series CPU Unit
Applicable Units:
CV500-CPU01-EV1

CV1000-CPU01-EV1

CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV@

CVM1-CPU11-EV@

CVM1-CPU21-EV@

CVM1/CV-series CPU Units whose model names do not have the suffix -EV@
cannot be connected by any connection method.
RDA

Abbreviation

TRM

RDA (-)

RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB

RS-422A/
485
terminal
block

PLC side

NT631/NT631C side
Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire

Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
FG
hood

TRM

SDA (-)

RDB (+)

SDB (+)

SDA (-)

−

SDB (+)

RSA (-)

RSB (+)

Functional
ground

7
8
9

RS-422A
terminal
block

RDA (-)
−
RDB (+)
−

(9-pin type)

24V
+DC

For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables on page 125.
Wiring for a Memory Link Connection
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram.
RDA

Abbreviation

TRM

RDA (-)

RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB

Host side

NT631/NT631C side

RS-422A/
485
interface

Abbreviation
Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire Connector
hood

TRM

SDA (-)

RDB (+)

SDB (+)

SDA (-)

SDB (+)

RSA (-)

RDA (-)

RSB (+)

RDB (+)

RS-422A
connector

Functional
ground

24V
+DC

For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables on page 125.

117

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port

5-2-3

Direct Connection between RS-485 Ports at Both Units
The connection method in which the RS-485 ports of an NT631/NT631C and
a host are connected is described here.
NT631/NT631C
CPU Unit

CS/CJ-series PLC,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E

Serial port B
(RS-422A/485, terminal block)

9-pin connector

RS-485 cable with connectors (max. length: 500 m)

Reference:

When RS-485 is used at the PT side, only the NT Link (1:N) method (standard
or high-speed) can be used.

Connecting an NT631/NT631C and Host
Host

NT631/NT631C
RS-485

Wiring When Connecting a CS-series Serial Communications Board, CS/
CJ-series Serial Communications Unit, C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Communications Board, or CQM1H Serial Communications Board
Applicable Units:
CS1W-SCU31-V1
CJ1W-SCU31-V1/CJ1W-SCU41(-V1)
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H
CS1D-CPU66H/67H (See note.)
C200HE-CPU32/42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE/85-ZE
CQM1H-CPU51/61

Note

A Serial Communications Board cannot be installed.

RDA

NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation

TRM

RDA (-)

RDB
SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB

RS-422A/
485
interface

Short-circuit tool
Shielding wire

TRM

SDA (-)

RDB (+)

SDB (+)

SDA (-)

−

SDB (+)

RSA (-)

RSB (+)

Functional
ground

7
8
9

24V
+DC

PLC side

Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
FG
hood

RS-422A
interface

RDA (-)
−
RDB (+)
−

(9-pin type)

For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables on page 125.

118

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port

5-2-4

1:N Connection among RS-422A Ports
The connection method in which the RS-422A ports of multiple NT631/
NT631Cs and one host are connected in a 1:N connection is described here.
CPU Unit
CS/CJ-series PLC,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E

RS-422A cables
(max. total length 500 m)

9-pin connector

NT631/NT631C

Serial port B
(RS-422A/485, terminal block)
NT631/NT631C

NT631/NT631C

Reference:

• Communications using the RS-422A standard NT link (1:N) method is
possible only when a Serial Communications Board is installed in a CSseries PLC, a Serial Communications Unit is installed in a CS/CJ-series
PLC, a Communications Board is installed in a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, or a
CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed in a CQM1H.
• Communications using the RS-422A high-speed NT link (1:N) method is
possible only when a Serial Communications Board is installed in a CSseries PLC or a Serial Communications Unit is installed in a CS/CJ-series
PLC.

119

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Connecting between
NT631/NT631C Units

NT631/NT631C

Host

RS-422A

NT631/NT631C side

RDA

NT631/NT631C side

Short-circuit tool
Abbreviation

TRM

RDA (-)

RDB

RS-422A/
485
interface

SDA
SDB
RSA

Abbreviation

TRM

RDB (+)

SDA (-)

SDB (+)

RSA (-)

RSB (+)
Functional
ground

RSB

TRM

RDA (-)

TRM

RDA

RDB
RS-422A/
485
interface

SDA
SDB
RSA

RSB (+)
Functional
ground

RSB

Shielding wire

24V
+DC

Host
RS-422A

Wiring When Connecting a CS-series Serial Communications Board, CS/
C-series Serial Communications Unit, C-series C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Communications Board, or CQM1H Serial Communications Board
Applicable Units:
CS1W-SCU31-V1
CJ1W-SCU31-V1/CJ1W-SCU41(-V1)
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H
CS1D-CPU66H/67H (See note.)
C200HE-CPU32/42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-(Z)E

120

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
C200HX-CPU65-ZE/85-ZE
CQM1H-CPU51/61

Note

A Serial Communications Board cannot be installed.
PLC side

NT631/NT631C side

RDA

Abbreviation

TRM

Shielding wire

RDA (-)

RDB
SDA

TRM

SDA (-)

RDB (+)

SDB (+)

RS-422A/
485
interface

SDB
RSA
RSB

SDA (-)

−

SDB (+)

−

RSA (-)

−

RSB (+)

RDA (-)

Functional
ground

−

RDB (+)

Next PT

RS-422A
interface

−

(9-pin type)

24V
+DC

Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
FG
hood

For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables on page 125.

5-2-5

1:N Connection among RS-485 Ports
The connection method in which the RS-485 ports of multiple NT631/
NT631Cs and one host are connected in a 1:N connection is described here.
CPU Unit
CS/CJ-series or
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
PLC

RS-485 cables
(max. total length 500 m)

9-pin connector

NT631/NT631C

Serial port B
(RS-422A/485, terminal block)
NT631/NT631C

NT631/NT631C

Reference:

• Communications using the RS-485A standard NT link (1:N) method is
possible only when a Serial Communications Board is installed in a CSseries PLC, a Serial Communications Unit is installed in a CS/CJ-series
PLC, a Communications Board is installed in a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, or a
CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed in a CQM1H.
• Communications using the RS-485A high-speed NT link (1:N) method is
possible only when a Serial Communications Board is installed in a CSseries PLC or a Serial Communications Unit is installed in a CS/CJ-series
PLC.

121

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Connecting between NT631/NT631C Units
NT631/NT631C

Host

RS-485

∗

NT631/NT631C side

NT631/NT631C side
Abbreviation

RDA

RDA (-)

TRM
RDB

RS-422A/
485
terminal
block

SDA
SDB

Short-circuit tool

∗

RDA

RDA (-)

TRM

RDB (+)

SDA (-)

SDB (+)

RSA (-)

RSB (+)

RSA

Abbreviation

TRM
RS-422A/
485
terminal
block

RDB
SDA
SDB

RSB (+)

Functional
ground

RSA

Functional
ground

Shielding wire

RSB

24V
+DC

The relay terminal block is not included in this figure. Insert the relay terminal
block so as to achieve the wiring configuration shown below.
NT631/NT631C

Host
RS-485

122

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
C200HE-CPU32/42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE/85-ZE
CQM1H-CPU51/61

Note

A Serial Communications Board cannot be installed.

Abbreviation

TRM

Shielding wire

RDA (-)

RDB
RS-422A/
485
terminal
block

SDA
SDB
RSA
RSB

Pin number Abbreviation
Connector
FG
hood

TRM

SDA (-)

RDB (+)

SDB (+)

SDA (-)

−

SDB (+)

−

RSA (-)

−

RSB (+)

RDA (-)

Functional
ground

−

RDB (+)

Next PT

PLC side

NT631/NT631C side

RDA

RS-422A
connector

−

(9-pin type)

24V
+DC

For details on handling shield wires, refer to 5-2-8 Handling the Shield on RS422A/485 Cables on page 125.

5-2-6

Recommended Connectors, Cables and Crimp Terminals
Connectors and Cables Recommended for RS-422A/485
When making an RS-422A/485 connecting cable, as far as possible use the
recommended parts indicated in the table below. When using the memory link
method, however, use a connector that matches with the RS-422A port at the
CPU Unit (CP) side. Some Units come supplied with one connector and connector hood.
Check the required parts and prepare them in advance.
Name
Connector

Model
XM2A-0901

Maker
9-pin type
Made by OMRON

Connector
hood

XM2S-0911

9-pin type
Made by OMRON

XM2S-0911-E

9-pin type
Made by OMRON
Tachii Electric Wire
Co., Ltd.

Cable

TKVVBS4P-03

Remarks
Delivered with the following
Units:
CS/CJ-series CPU Units,
C-series C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Delivered with the following
Units:
CVM1/CV-series CPU Units
CV500-LK201
Delivered with the following
Units:
C-series C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Delivered with the following
Units:
CVM1/CV-series CPU Units
CV500-LK201
Delivered with the following
Units: CS/CJ-series PLCs

123

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port
Name
Crimp terminals

Model
1.25-N3A
(fork type) *1

Maker
Japan Solderless
Terminal MFG

Y1.25-3.5L (fork Molex Inc.
type) *1
*1

Remarks
Recommended cable size:
AWG22 to 18
(0.3 to 0.75 mm2)

Crimp terminals of common use for M3 and M3.5

The terminal screws of the NT631/NT631C are M3.5 specification. When wiring, use crimp terminals for M3.5 use. Tighten terminal screws with a tightening torque of 0.8 N⋅m.
The terminal screws of the RS-422A adaptor (CPM1-CIF11) are M3 specification. When wiring, use crimp terminals for M3 use. Tighten terminal screws
with a tightening torque of 0.5 N⋅m.
Note

1. Make sure to tighten screws at the connectors after cable connection.
2. Always use crimp terminals for wiring at terminal blocks.
Examples of Applicable Terminals
• For M3.5
Round type

Fork type
7 mm max.

7 mm max.

• For M3
Round type

Fork type
6.2 mm max.

5-2-7

6.2 mm max.

Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS-422A/485
Communications
The serial port B connector of the NT631/NT631C has a terminal resistance
setting terminal (TRM).
In RS-422A/485 communications, a terminal resistor must be set at the device
at the end of the communications cable, but not at any other device.
The NT631/NT631C has a built-in terminal resistor, and whether or not the
terminal resistance is applied is set by shorting or opening the terminal resistance setting terminals (TRM). The terminal resistance is 120 Ω.
When carrying out RS-422A/485 communications using serial port B, short
between terminals at the NT631/NT631C at the end of the RS-422A/485
cable. Leave these terminals open at NT631/NT631C PTs other than the one
at the end of the cable.
When not using RS-422A/485 communications, the terminal resistance setting is ineffective.
Short-circuit tool

RDA
TRM
RDB
SDA

124

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port

TRM-RDA
terminals

Note

Reference:

Function

Shorted

Terminal resistance is applied.
Short only at the NT631/NT631C connected to the end of an
RS-422A/485 cable.

Open

Terminal resistance is not applied.
Leave the terminals open when connecting an NT631/NT631C
anywhere other than at the end of the RS-422A/485 cable.

Before connecting or disconnecting cables between devices, make sure that
the power supply to all of the connected devices (NT631/NT631C, PLC, etc.)
is OFF.
• The internal circuit of the NT631/NT631C is shown below.
+

RDA
Terminal resistor (120 Ω)
TRM

Making a connection here inserts a terminator between
+ (RDB) and - (RDA).

RDB

• For details on setting the terminal resistance of the host, refer to Setting
methods for each type of the communications.

5-2-8

Handling the Shield on RS-422A/485 Cables
Perform the following procedures to connect, process the shield, and connect
to ground for communications systems using the RS-422A/485. Incorrect connection may result in communications errors with the host.
Connecting the Ground Wire
The PT has a functional ground terminal (FG:
1,2,3...

1. Ground according to Figure (a) for normal grounding.
• Connect the ground terminal (GR) of the devices to the functional ground
(FG:
).
Make sure that each signal line is grounded at only one point and ground
to 100 Ω max.
• Short the LG terminal of the PLC to the ground terminal (GR).
• Use a wire gauge of at least 2mm2 for the ground wire.
• Refer to the manual for individual Communications Units for details on
proper wiring procedures.
2. Do not ground the functional ground (FG:
) of the PT if it is mounted to
the same panel as devices that generate noise, such as motors or inverters, as shown in Figure (b).
Preparing the Shield of RS-422A/485 Connectors
Always prepare RS-422A/485 cable shields properly. Otherwise, communications errors may occur with the host.
Ground only one end of the shield when connecting the ground terminal (GR)
of the devices to the functional ground (FG:
), and grounding each signal
line at only one point and to 100 Ω max, as shown in Figure (a).
Ground both ends of the shield when not grounding the functional ground
(FG:

) of the PT, as shown in Figure (b).

125

Section 5-2

Connecting to the Host’s RS-422A/485 Port

When using a CJ1M-CIF11 alone or combined with an NT-AL001, be sure to
connect, process the shield, and connect to ground as shown in Figure (b).
Example of Recommended Wiring

Signal line

126

Signal line

SECTION 6
System Menu Operation
This section describes the operation of the System Menu, focusing on the procedure to start up the NT631/NT631C.
Functions which are convenient when using the NT631/NT631C and those that are useful for system maintenance are
also explained here.
6-1
6-2
6-3

6-4

6-5

System Menu Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129

Starting the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129

6-2-1

Operation at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129

Operation Modes and the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

130

6-3-1

Relationships among Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

130

6-3-2

Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

132

6-3-3

Operations with the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

133

Memory Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

135

6-4-1

Clearing Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

135

6-4-2

Initializing Display History Record Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

137

6-4-3

Initializing Alarm History Record Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

138

6-4-4

Initializing the Recipe Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

140

6-4-5

Initializing the Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

141

6-4-6

Initializing the Memory Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

143

Operations in the System Installer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

144

6-5-1

Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode . . . . . .

144

6-5-2

Clearing/Installing the System Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

145

6-5-3

Changing the System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

147

6-5-4

Clearing Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

148

6-6

Transmitting the Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

149

6-7

Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches

152

6-7-1

About Communications Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

152

6-7-2

Setting the Host Link Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

155

6-7-3

Setting the NT Link (1:1) Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

157

6-7-4

Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method (Standard/High-speed) . . . . . . .

158

6-7-5

Setting the Memory Link Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

160

6-7-6

Setting the Communications Type for Serial Port B . . . . . . . . . . . .

162

6-8

Starting Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

163

6-9

Various System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

164

6-9-1

Memory Switch Setting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

164

6-9-2

Setting the Start-up Wait Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

165

6-9-3

Setting the Key Press Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

166

6-9-4

Setting the Buzzer Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

166

6-9-5

Setting the Printer Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

168

127

128

6-9-6

Setting the Print Method (NT631C Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

169

6-9-7

Setting Screen Saver Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

170

6-9-8

Setting the Screen Saver Start-up Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

173

6-9-9

Setting the History Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

175

6-9-10 Setting the Resume Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

177

6-9-11 Setting the Automatic Reset Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

179

6-9-12 Setting the Time-out Interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

181

6-9-13 Setting the Retry Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

182

6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

184

6-11 System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

187

6-11-1 I/O Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

187

6-11-2 Displaying/Setting the Calendar and Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

191

6-11-3 Checking the PT Setting Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

193

6-11-4 Displaying and Printing the Display History Record . . . . . . . . . . . .

194

6-11-5 Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record . . . . . . . . . . . . .

196

6-11-6 Checking Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

198

6-11-7 Device Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

201

6-11-8 Checking Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

209

6-12 Programming Console Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

214

6-12-1 Usable Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

215

6-12-2 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

216

6-12-3 Method of Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

217

6-13 Device Monitor Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

220

6-13-1 Compatible Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

221

6-13-2 Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

221

6-13-3 Method of Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

223

6-14 Version Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

223

6-14-1 Method of Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

224

System Menu Operation Flow

6-1

Section 6-1

System Menu Operation Flow
Follow the procedure below when using the NT631/NT631C for the first time
or changing the system program.

Create the Screen Data

Create the data to be displayed on the NT631/NT631C by using the Support
Tool.
For details on creating screen data, refer to the NT-series Support Tool Ver.
4.@ for Windows Operation Manual (V061-E1-@).

Start Up the NT631/
NT631C (Display the
System Menu) (page 129)

Turn ON the power to the NT631/NT631C.
If no screen data has been registered, an error message is displayed. In this
case, press the OK touch switch on the error message screen to display the
System Menu.
If screen data has been registered and the RUN mode is established, perform
the appropriate operations on the touch panel to display the System Menu.

Initialize the Memory
(page 135)

If necessary, initialize the memory of the NT631/NT631C by operation from
the System Menu.

Transmit the Screen Data
(page 149)

Connect the Support Tool to the NT631/NT631C and transmit the screen data
from the Support Tool to the NT631/NT631C.
For details on connecting the Support Tool, refer to 3-2 Connecting to the
Support Tool (page 35).

Set the Memory Switches
(pages 152, 164, 184)

Select the System Menu and set the operations of the NT631/NT631C — for
example the conditions for communications with the host — using the memory switches.

Start Operation (page 163)

Connect the NT631/NT631C to the host and start operation.

System Maintenance
(page 187)

If an error occurs during operation, check the I/Os, settings, etc., by referring
to this guide.

6-2

Starting the NT631/NT631C
After checking that the hardware has been connected correctly, switch on the
power to the NT631/NT631C to start it up.
This section describes the operation of the NT631/NT631C when it is started
up.

6-2-1

Operation at Startup
The NT631/NT631C operates as follows when the power is switched ON, or
when it is reset.

Initial Processing

Self diagnosis — including a check on the internal memory of the NT631/
NT631C and a system program check — and the internal processing required
for startup, are performed.
If an error occurs during initial processing, an error screen is displayed.
If there is an error in the system program, the system program must be reinstalled. For details on the installation procedure, refer to 6-5 Operations in
the System Installer Mode.

129

Operation Modes and the System Menu
Memory Unit Check and
Processing

Section 6-3

Check if a Memory Unit is installed. If a Memory Unit is installed, processing
(screen data and system program reading/writing) is executed in accordance
with its DIP switch settings (page 39).
If there is an error in the screen data, an error screen is displayed. Pressing
the OK touch switch on the error screen will return the display to that immediately before the error occurred. It is also possible to display the System Menu
from the error screen by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel
simultaneously. If there is an error in the system program, the main menu of
the system installer mode is displayed. If this is the case, reinstall the proper
system program.
Initialize the memory or change the settings as required.

Start of Communications
with the Host

Communications with the host start in accordance with the communications
method set in the system memory of the NT631/NT631C. During the interval
until communications are established, the system initialization screen (screen
No. 9000) is displayed.
For details, refer to 6-8 Starting Operation.
If the system initialization screen remains on, display the System Menu by
pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously, and check
the settings for the communications conditions for communications with the
host.

Operation Start

The RUN mode is established, and operation starts in accordance with the
screen data in the NT631/NT631C.
When changing the settings or checking the statuses, perform the appropriate
operation by displaying the System Menu. For details on displaying the System Menu, refer to 6-3-3 Operations with the System Menu (page 133).

6-3

Operation Modes and the System Menu
The NT631/NT631C operates in four modes: the RUN, Transmit, Maintenance, and Expansion modes. These modes are selected from the System
Menu.
In addition, the NT631/NT631C also features the System Installer mode which
is used specifically for installing the system program.
The System Installer mode is selected by operation at the panel when the
NT631/NT631C power is switched ON.

6-3-1

Relationships among Modes
The relationships among the System Menu, each of the operation modes, and
the System Installer mode, are indicated in the figure below.
For details on system menu operation, refer to 6-3-3 Operations with the System Menu (page 133).

130

Section 6-3

Operation Modes and the System Menu

[Transmit Mode]

[RUN Mode]

In this mode, screen
data and other data are
transmitted between the
Support Tool and the
NT631/NT631C.

This is the mode in which
the NT631/NT631C
operates.In this mode the
NT631/NT631C can be
controlled from the host,
and various display and
I/O operations are
possible.

To change system
settings or screen
data contents.

When system
settings and screen
data registration have
been completed.
To change system
settings or screen
data contents.

SYSTEM MENU

[Maintenance Mode]
In this mode,
NT631/NT631C
maintenance operations,
such as initialization of
the memory, checking
settings, and the I/O
check, are executed.

Quit

Power ON

Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode

[Expansion Mode]

Expansion Mode

If there is no system
program, or if the
settings for data
control are changed...
[System Installer Mode]

In this mode, the
Programming Console
function is used, or check
the version of system
program.

In this mode, the system program of the
NT631/NT631C is installed, display of
the System Menu is enabled or disabled,
and screen data changes are enabled
and disabled, among other operations.

Items in the System Menu

The items displayed in the system menu and their functions are as follows.
Menu Item
Quit
Transmit Mode

Function
Clear the System Menu screen and return to the RUN mode
screen.
Display the Transmit Mode screen to allow transmission for
screen data between the Support Tool and the NT631/NT631C.
For details on transmission of screen data, refer to 6-6 Transmitting the Screen Data.

131

Operation Modes and the System Menu

Section 6-3

Menu Item
Function
Maintenance Mode Display the Maintenance Mode menu to allow system maintenance of the NT631/NT631C, and various NT631/NT631C settings.
Expansion Mode
Display the Expansion Mode menu to allow selection of the
expansion functions supported by the NT631/NT631C. The following expansion functions are supported:
• Version Display
Displays the version of system program, the date it was created, and the PT model. For details, refer to 6-14 Version Display.
• Programming Console Function
Allows the NT31/NT31C to be used as a Programming Console for a CS/CJ-series PLC, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1,
CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), or SRM1.
For details, refer to 6-12 Programming Console Function.
• Device Monitor Function
Allows the NT31/NT31C to change the PLC’s operating mode
and display/change the contents of words in a CS/CJ-series
PLC, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/
HE(-Z), or SRM1. For details, refer to 6-13 Device Monitor
Function in this manual or 2-16 Device Monitor Function in the
Reference Manual.

Functions of the System
Installer Mode

The following functions can be executed in the System Installer mode.
• Setting the display language
• Clearing and installing system programs
• Disabling/enabling display of the System Menu.
• Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory
• Clearing screen data
For details on these functions, refer to 6-5 Operations in the System Installer
Mode.

6-3-2

Menu Tree
The System Menu allows the various functions of the NT631/NT631C to be
executed by using touch switches displayed on the touch panel. The menu
tree, starting from the System Menu, is shown below.
For details on System Menu operations, refer to 6-3-3 Operations with the
System Menu (page 133).
The menu tree may differ according to the system program installed in the
NT631/NT631C. The menu tree for the system program that is installed in the
NT631/NT631C on shipment is shown below.

132

Section 6-3

Operation Modes and the System Menu
SYSTEM INSTALLER MODE
Exit System Installer
Download System Program (page 145)
Change System Settings (page 147)
Erase Screen Data (page 148)

SYSTEM MENU
MEMORY INIT. MENU

Quit
Transmit Mode (page 149)
Maintenance Mode
Expansion Mode

Quit
Screen Data (page 135)
Display History (page 137)
Alarm History (page 138)
Recipe Table (page 140)
Memory Table (page 141)
Memory Switch (page 143)

MAINTENANCE
MODE MENU
Quit
Memory Init.
Memory Switch
I/O Settings
Calendar Check (page 191)
PT Settings (page 193)
Display History
Alarm History
Screen Data Disp. (page 198)
I/O Check

MEMORY
SWITCH MENU
Start-up Wait Time (page 165)
Key Press Sound (page 166)
Buzzer Sound (page 166)
Printer Controller (page 168)
Print Method (page 169)
Screen Saver Movement (page 170)
Screen Saver Start up Time (page 173)
Hist. Disp. Method (page 175)
Resume Function (page 177)
Comm. Auto-return (page 179)
Time-out Interval (page 181)
Retry Counts (page 182)
Comm. A Method (page 152)
Comm. B Select (page 162)
Comm. B Method (page 152)

I/O SETTINGS MENU
I/O CHECK MENU

Quit
Contrast Adjust (page 187)
Brightness Adjust (page 191)

Quit
I/F Check
Device Check

DISPLAY HISTORY MENU
EXPANSION
MODE MENU

I/F CHECK MENU

Quit
Programming Console Function (page 214)
Version Display (page 223)
Device Monitor Function (page 220)

Quit
Tool Comm. (page 209)
Comm. Port A (page 210)
Comm. Port B (page 210)
Printer (page 213)

DEVICE CHECK MENU

Quit
Sort by Occurrence (page 194)
Sort by Frequency (page 194)

ALARM HISTORY MENU
Quit
Sort by Occurrence (page 196)
Sort by Frequency (page 196)

Quit
Buzzer Check (page 202)
LED Check (page 203)
LCD Check (page 204)
Backlight Check (page 204)
Screen Memory (page 205)
Touch Switch (page 207)
Battery (page 208)

6-3-3

Operations with the System Menu
This section describes how to use the menus, including how to call the System Menu, how to call the System Installer mode, and how to select menu
items.

Calling the System Menu

The System Menu can be displayed by either of the following two methods.
• Touching the corners of the touch panel
• Pressing a touch switch that displays the System Menu

Reference:

• If display of the System Menu is disabled by the setting made in the System Installer mode, the System Menu cannot be displayed (this does not
apply if an error has occurred).

133

Section 6-3

Operation Modes and the System Menu

• At the same as the System Menu is displayed, the operation of the
NT631/NT631C stops and the RUN LED goes OFF.
Touching The Corners of The Touch Panel
When two of the four corners of the touch panel (see the figure below) are
touched simultaneously, the System Menu is displayed.
RUN mode
POWER

[SYSTEM MENU]
RUN

Quit

Press any two of the four
corners at the same time.

Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Expansion Mode

Note that the touch switches used to call the System Menu are not displayed
at corners on the screen. If a touch switch displayed in a corner is pressed
first, the touch switch will function and the System Menu will not be displayed.
Especially, when the touch switch has switch screen function, as a result of
screen switch over, it means the corner is not pressed even if it is kept pressing. To successfully call the System Menu, first press a corner where no touch
switch is displayed, and then press any other corner regardless of the presence of a touch switch.
Reference:

With the NT631/NT631C, the System Menu can be displayed even if the
screen has touch switches registered at all four corners.
Pressing a Touch Switch That Displays The System Menu
There is a control key that has the function of displaying the System Menu.
By registering the touch switch for System Menu display ([MENU]) on a
screen when creating it, the System Menu can be displayed just by pressing
this switch.

Calling the System
Installer Mode

If the NT631/NT631C has no system program installed, or if the system program is destroyed, the System Installer mode is automatically established
when the power is switched ON.
To establish the System Installer mode in order to install a system program or
make settings for data management, either turn the power ON, or reset the
NT631/NT631C, while pressing the touch switch at the top left corner of the
touch panel (size: 7.2 mm × 7.2 mm).
Switch the power to the NT631/NT631C ON while pressing this touch switch.

POWER

RUN

Selecting Menu Items

134

The menu items in the System Menu are displayed on the NT631/NT631C
screen as touch switches. Menu items can be selected simply by pressing
them.

Section 6-4

Memory Initialization
Example:

Displaying the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen by pressing Maintenance Mode in the System Menu.
Ver 4.12

Switching from the
System Menu to the RUN
Mode

Reference:

6-4

Press Maintenance Mode.

Return to the RUN mode by selecting Quit in the System Menu and other
menus.

Unlike previous PT models, the NT631/NT631C does not return to the RUN
mode automatically if no operations are performed.

Memory Initialization
The NT631/NT631C has the following initialization functions. Use them as
necessary.
• Clearing screen data

Reference:

6-4-1

page 135

• Initializing memory tables

page 141

• Initializing memory switches

page 143

• Initializing display history record data

page 137

• Initializing alarm history record data

page 138

• Initializing recipe tables

page 140

If writing to the screen data memory has been disabled by the System Setting
setting in the System Installer mode, memory initialization is not possible.

Clearing Screen Data
Use this function if the screen data has been corrupted and the NT631/
NT631C cannot be started up correctly.
This operation clears (initializes) only the screen data and contents of the calculation tables. The memory switch settings and display history/alarm history
record data are retained.

135

Section 6-4

Memory Initialization
Reference:

• When this function is used, all of the screen data contents registered in
the NT631/NT631C up to that point are cleared. Check that the created
screens are backed up at the Support Tool before using it.
• The screen data can be cleared in the System Installer mode too
(page 148).
• The following types of data can be initialized individually.
Contents of numeral/character string memory tables (page 141)
Memory switch settings (page 143)
Display history record data (page 137)
Alarm history record data (page 138)
Clear the screen data by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Init..

Select Screen Data.

Select Yes.
The screen data is cleared. During
clearance, the message Erasing Now...
is displayed.

136

Section 6-4

Memory Initialization

If No is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU
screen without clearing the screen data.
On completion of screen data clearance, the NT631/NT631C returns to the
MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.
After the screen data has been cleared, if an attempt is made to set the
NT631/NT631C to the RUN mode before screen data has been transmitted
from the Support Tool or Memory Unit, an error message will be displayed and
the RUN mode will not be established.

6-4-2

Initializing Display History Record Data
The display history record function keeps a record of the order of display of
the screens displayed during operation, and the number of times each screen
is displayed. These records are kept only for screens for which the History
attribute has been set.
The maximum number of records is 1024 for sort by occurrence (order of display occurrence) and 255 for sort by frequency (order of the number of times
each screen has been displayed).
Use the display history record initialization function to clear the history record
data to 0, for example when the screen data has been changed, etc. Also, if
Alarm (Use Ring Buffer) under History Setting of System in PT Configuration
(Tools) has not been checked, no more records will be stored after the maximum number of records has been kept, and therefore the records must be
periodically initialized. If Alarm (Use Ring Buffer) is checked, when the maximum number of records is reached the oldest record is deleted and the newest data is recorded.
Reference:

The NT631/NT631C also allows the display history record data to be
initialized by controlling the PT status control area from the host. For details,
refer to 2-2-1 PT Status Control Area in the Reference Manual.

137

Section 6-4

Memory Initialization

Initialize the display history record data by following the menu operation from
the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Init..

Select Display History.

Select Yes.
The display history record data is
initialized. During initialization, the message
Initializing is displayed.

If No is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU
screen without initializing the display history record data.
On completion of display history record data initialization, the message Finished is displayed and the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT.
MENU screen.

6-4-3

Initializing Alarm History Record Data
The alarm history record function continually checks the status of host bits
that have been designated in advance with a bit memory table, and records
the time when any of the bits is set to 1 (comes ON), and the number of times
that each bit comes ON.

138

Memory Initialization

Section 6-4
The maximum number of records is 256 for sort by occurrence (order of error
occurrence) and 255 for sort by frequency (order of the number of times each
error has occurred).
Use the alarm history record initialization function to reset the alarm history
record data to 0, for example when the screen data has been changed, etc.
Also, if Screen (Use Ring Buffer) under History Setting in the PT Environment
Settings – System Settings has not been checked, no more records will be
stored after the maximum number of records has been kept, and therefore the
records must be periodically initialized. If Screen (Use Ring Buffer) is
checked, when the maximum number of records is reached the oldest record
is deleted and the newest data is recorded.

Reference:

The NT631/NT631C also allows the alarm history record data to be initialized
by controlling the PT status control area from the host. For details, refer to 22-1 PT Status Control Area in the Reference Manual.

139

Section 6-4

Memory Initialization

Initialize the alarm history record data by following the menu operation from
the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Init..

Select Alarm History.

Select Yes.
The alarm history record data is initialized.
During initialization, the message
Initializing is displayed.

If No is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU
screen without initializing the alarm history record data.
On completion of alarm history record data initialization, the message Finished is displayed and the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT.
MENU screen.

6-4-4

Initializing the Recipe Tables
You can initialize the recipe tables (i.e., all the recipe data) edited in the
NT631/NT631C. Here, “initializing” the recipe tables means to restore the battery backup memory (“recipe data memory”) to the values in flash memory at
that time. If, after downloading from the Support Tool, you do not upload the
data even once, initialization will restore the initial values set using the Support Tool. The values will not be cleared.

140

Section 6-4

Memory Initialization

Initialize the recipe tables by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Init..

Select Recipe Table.

Select Yes.
The recipe tables are initialized.
During initialization, the message
Initializing is displayed.

If No is selected, the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU
screen without initializing the recipe tables.
On completion of memory table initialization, the message Finished is displayed and the NT31/NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.

6-4-5

Initializing the Memory Tables
It is possible to initialize the numeral memory tables and character string
memory tables in the NT631/NT631C.
When these tables are initialized, the values are returned to those set by the
Support Tool (they are not cleared).

141

Section 6-4

Memory Initialization

When the memory tables are initialized, they are returned to their initial values
regardless of the setting made for the resume function (page 177).
If ON is set for the Resume Function memory switch, the initial values set with
the Support Tool will not be recorded in the memory tables unless they are initialized.
Reference:

• If OFF is set for the Resume Function memory switch, the memory tables
can be initialized just by switching the NT631/NT631C power off and back
on again, or by resetting the NT631/NT631C (page 177).
• The bit memory table merely reflects the statuses of bits at the host and
therefore cannot be initialized.
Initialize the memory tables by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Init..

Select Memory Table.

Select Yes.
The memory tables are initialized.
During initialization, the message
Initializing is displayed.

142

Section 6-4

Memory Initialization

If No is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU
screen without initializing the memory tables.
On completion of memory table initialization, the message Finished is displayed and the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.

6-4-6

Initializing the Memory Switches
Initialization returns all the memory switches of the NT631/NT631C to their
status on shipment.
Initialize the memory switches by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Init..

Select Memory Switch.

Select Yes.
The memory tables are initialized.
During initialization, the message
Initializing is displayed.

If No is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU
screen without initializing the memory switches.
On completion of memory switch initialization, the message Finished is displayed and the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen.

143

Section 6-5

Operations in the System Installer Mode
After initialization, the memory switch statuses are as follows.
Memory Switch
Start-up Wait Time

Status

Key Press Sound
Buzzer Sound

ON
OFF

Printer Controller
Print Method

ESC/P
Tone (NT631C only)

Screen Saver Movement
Screen Saver Start up Time

Display erased
010

Hist. Disp. Method
Resume Function

From New Data
OFF

Comm. Auto-return
Time-out Interval

OFF
01

Retry Counts
Comm. A Method

005

Comm. B Select
Comm. B Method

RS-232C
None

Host Link (communications speed = 9600 bps)*

* The communications conditions for a bar code reader are initialized as follows:
Data bits: 7 bits; stop bit: 1 bit; parity: none; flow control: RS/CS.

6-5

Operations in the System Installer Mode
The following functions can be executed in the System Installer mode:
• Setting the display language (see below)
• Clearing/installing the system program (page 145)
• Disabling/enabling display of the System Menu (changing the system settings) (page 147)
• Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory (changing the system settings) (page 147)
• Clearing screen data (page 148)
For details on calling the System Installer mode, refer to Calling the System
Installer Mode (page 134).
The version code displayed beside the System Installer title on the screen
indicates the version of the System Installer Mode. For details, refer to 3-5
Using a Memory Unit.

6-5-1

Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode
The first setting made in the System Installer mode is to select whether the
display language is to be English or Japanese.

144

Section 6-5

Operations in the System Installer Mode

Select English or Japanese.
From here on, this manual assumes that
English has been selected here.

The System Installer mode menu is
displayed.
If there is no system program or the
system program has been corrupted,
the message System Program not
exist or incorrect. is displayed at the
bottom of the screen.

6-5-2

Clearing/Installing the System Program
Use this function when the system program of the NT631/NT631C has been
corrupted, or when installing a new system program.
Reference:

• In order to install a system program, the system installer must also be
installed at the Support Tool. The system installer is an accessory with the
Support Tool (NT-ZJCAT1-EV4). When installing the Support Tool in a
personal computer, install the system installer also. For details on the
method for installing the system installer at the Support Tool side, and the
operating procedure, refer to the NT-series Support Tool Ver. 4.@ for Windows Operation Manual (V061-E1-@).
• When the system program is cleared by mistake, it becomes impossible
to use the NT631/NT631C at all. Check that the system installer is
installed at the Support Tool side before deleting the program. However,
note that the registered screen data and memory switch settings are
retained.
• It becomes possible to install the system program inside the Memory Unit
automatically by installing the Memory Unit at startup (Refer to 3-5 Using
a Memory Unit).
Clear/install the system program by following the menu operation from the
System Installer mode menu shown below.

145

Section 6-5

Operations in the System Installer Mode
Clearing the System Program

Select Download System Program.

Select Yes.
The system program is cleared. During
clearance, the message Erasing ... is
displayed.

• If Return to Menu is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the System
Installer mode menu without clearing the system program.
• If clearance fails, a screen asking whether you wish to try again is displayed.
On completion of system program clearance, the NT631/NT631C enters the
standby status for downloading of the system program.
Downloading the System
Program

On normal completion of system program clearance, the standby status for
system program downloading is automatically established.

When the NT631/NT631C enters this
status, transmit the system program from
the system installer at the personal
computer.
During downloading, the progress of
transmission is indicated on the screen.

Select Run System.

If Abort is selected during standby for downloading or during downloading, a
screen asking whether you wish to download again is displayed.

146

Operations in the System Installer Mode

Section 6-5

When the system program is started, the NT631/NT631C starts up normally.
If no screen data has been registered, an error message will be displayed
indicating that screen data hasn’t been registered. Transfer the screen data
and proceed.
Reference:

6-5-3

If the new system program is not downloaded successfully after deleting a
system program, it is not possible to use the NT631/NT631C at all. After
deleting the system program, be sure to download a new one.

Changing the System Settings
The NT631/NT631C allows the following settings to be made to prevent the
screen data and memory switch settings from being changed or deleted by
operating errors.
Disabling/enabling System Menu Display
When System Menu display is disabled by this setting, the System Menu cannot be displayed by touch panel operations or by using the touch switches.
However, if a error occurs, the System Menu can be displayed from the error
message screen.
Disabling/enabling Writing to The Screen Data Memory
When writing to the screen data memory is disabled by this setting, it is
impossible to use the following System Menu functions.
• Switching to the Transmit mode
• Displaying the memory switch setting screens
• Checking the screen data memory
• Displaying the initialization menu
• Displaying the calendar/time setting screen (the calendar/time display
screen can be displayed)

147

Section 6-5

Operations in the System Installer Mode

Change the system settings by following the menu operation from the System
Installer mode menu shown below.

Select Change System Settings.

Select Display System Menu or Screen
Memory Protect.
Each time either of these items is
selected, the setting switches from
Disabled to Enabled or vice versa.

Select OK.
The settings are written to the
NT631/NT631C while the screen is
displayed.

• If Cancel is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the System Installer
mode menu without changing the settings. The settings remain as they
were before the operation was started.
• If writing of the settings fails, a screen asking whether you wish to try
again is displayed.
After the settings have been written, the System Installer mode menu screen
is redisplayed.

6-5-4

Clearing Screen Data
If the screen data has been corrupted and the NT631/NT631C cannot be
started normally, use this function to clear the screen data.
Note that only the screen data is cleared (initialized), and the memory switch
settings and the display history/alarm history record data are retained.
Reference:

148

Section 6-6

Transmitting the Screen Data

• If the screen data is cleared in the System Installer mode, the message
Screen Data Corrupted may be displayed on switching to the RUN mode.
If this happens, initialize the screen data again from the MEMORY INIT.
MENU screen.
Clear the screen data by following the menu operation from the System
Installer mode menu shown below.

Select Erase Screen Data.

Select Yes.
The screen data is cleared. During
clearance, the message Erasing ... is
displayed.

• If Return to Menu is selected, the NT631/NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT. MENU screen without clearing the screen data.
• If screen data clearance fails, a screen asking if you wish to try again is
displayed.
On completion of screen data clearance, the NT631/NT631C returns to the
System Installer mode menu screen.
After the screen data has been cleared, if an attempt is made to set the
NT631/NT631C to the RUN mode before screen data has been transmitted
from the Support Tool or Memory Unit, an error message will be displayed and
the RUN mode will not be established.

6-6

Transmitting the Screen Data
The screen data is created with the Support Tool and then transmitted to the
NT631/NT631C. This section explains how to transmit the screen data.
For details on how to create the screen data and the operation of the Support
Tool, refer to the Reference Manual and the NT-series Support Tool Ver. 4.@
for Windows Operation Manual (V061-E1-@).
Reference:

• The screen data can be transmitted also from the Memory Unit installed
in the NT631/NT631C. For details on this method, refer to 3-5 Using a
Memory Unit.
• The screen data can be transmitted at a faster rate by setting High for
Baud Rate on the Comms. Setting... window of the Support Tool.

149

Section 6-6

Transmitting the Screen Data

• If writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting made for
System Setting in the System Installer mode, screen data transmission is
not possible.
Screen Data Composition
and Transmission Units

The screen data comprises the following types of data.
• User screen data (screen units)
• System memory (memory switch) settings
• Direct connection information
• Numeral memory table data
• Character string memory table data
• Bit memory table data
• Mathematical table data
• Mark information
• Image/library data
• Recipe table data
It is possible to transmit the screen data (data for all the screens) in file units,
or to transmit individual data or the data of individual screens in data units. (It
is not possible to transmit table data in data units.)
When data is transmitted in file units, all of the screen data in the NT631/
NT631C is cleared and then the new data is transmitted.
When data is transmitted in data units, first the previous data is invalidated,
then the new data is registered as valid data. Since the previous data is not
cleared, free memory area in the NT631/NT631C will be insufficient when
transmissions in data units are repeated. If this happens, write the screen
data again by data transmission in file units.

Transmitting Screen Data
from the Support Tool

To transmit screen data from the Support Tool to the NT631/NT631C, follow
the procedure below.
Operation

1,2,3...

1. Connect the NT631/NT631C to a personal computer in which the Support
Tool has been installed and turn the power to the NT631/NT631C ON.
2. Turn ON the power to the personal computer and start up the Support Tool.
3. Establish the Transmit mode by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below at the NT631/NT631C.

150

Section 6-6

Transmitting the Screen Data
Ver 4.12

Select Transmit Mode.

Select Tool Transmit.

4. Open the screen data to be transmitted at the Support Tool, then select
Download (NTST PT) in the Support Tool’s Connect menu and specify the
data to be transmitted.
5. During screen data transmission, the transmission status is displayed.
6. On completion of screen data transmission, press the Quit touch switch.
The NT631/NT631C returns to the Transmit mode.
If the screen data cannot be successfully transmitted from the Support Tool,
use the communications check functions of the NT631/NT631C to check if
communications between the NT631/NT631C is normal or not (page 209).
Precautions to Be
Observed When
Transmitting Screen Data

If any of the following, or a system error, occurs during transmission of screen
data, the transmitted screen data will not be registered correctly in the NT631/
NT631C. If this happens, the NT631/NT631C may not enter the RUN mode
when started up, or there may be unpredictable malfunctions such as failure
to display screens during operation. In this case, the screen data must be
retransmitted in file units to register it correctly.
• The power to the NT631/NT631C is interrupted or the NT631/NT631C is
reset.
• The power to the personal computer on which the Support Tool is running
is interrupted or the computer is reset.
• The cable connecting the NT631/NT631C to the personal computer on
which the Support Tool is running is disconnected or has a broken wire.
• The Quit touch switch on the NT631/NT631C screen is pressed to end
screen data transmission.

151

Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches

Section 6-7

• Screen data transmission is stopped by operation at the Support Tool.
Note

6-7

When transferring the data in units of screens, if there are changes in memory
table and/or direct access, transfer such data along with the screen data.

Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by
Using Memory Switches
The NT631/NT631C can be connected to the host by the following 7 types of
communications methods can be used to communicate with a host.
• Host link

• Memory link method

• NT Link (1:1)

• Mitsubishi A-computer link method

• NT Link (1:N)

• Mitsubishi FX method

• High-speed NT Link (1:N)
The NT631/NT631C has the following two ports, either of which can be used
for communications with the host, depending on the requirements.
• Serial port A (exclusively for RS-232C, 9-pin connector)
• Serial port B (RS-232C/RS-422A (selectable), 25-pin connector)
The method for setting the communications method for communications with
the host is described here.
For details on setting the communications conditions for a bar code reader,
refer to 6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function.
Reference:

• Apart from the host, it is also possible to connect the Support Tool or a
bar code reader to serial port A. When a bar code reader is connected at
serial port A, the host must be connected at serial port B. When serial
port A is being used for communications with the host, the host must be
disconnected so that the Support Tool can be connected.
• There are four memory switch setting screens. The conditions for communications with the host are set on the fourth screen (the screen on which
4/4 is displayed). For details on setting memory switches other than those
for setting the conditions for communications with the host, refer to 6-9
Various System Settings.
• When using the Mitsubishi A-computer link method and Mitsubishi FX
method, a system program for multi-venders is required. Install the system program to the NT631/631C by the system installer (refer to
page 145). For details, refer to PLC Connection Manual (V042-E1-@).
• When using PLCs manufactured by Allen-Bradley, GE Fanuc, or Siemens,
refer to NT31/631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual (V060-E1-@).

6-7-1

About Communications Conditions

Items Set for
Communications
Conditions

152

The following settings are made for the communications conditions for communications between the NT631/NT631C and the host.

Section 6-7

Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches

Port Communications Method/Communications Type Settings
Setting Item
Function
Comm. A Method Set the communications method used at serial port
A. Depending on the communications method, further communications condition settings may be necessary.

Setting Options
A system program for OMRON
model.
None/Host Link/NT Link (1:1)/
NT Link (1:N) (standard or highspeed)/Bar-Code Reader
Memory link

Comm. B Select

RS-232C/RS-422A

155
157
158
184
160
162

A system program for OMRON
model.
None/Host Link/NT Link (1:1)/
NT Link (1:N) (standard or highspeed)
Memory link

155
157
158
160

Set whether serial port B is to be used for RS-232C
or RS-422A communications.
Comm. B Method Set the communications method used at serial port
B. Depending on the communications method, further communications condition settings may be necessary.

Page

Communications Condition Settings for The Host Link Method
Setting Item
Comm. Speed
(for host link only)

Function
Sets the communications speed
for communications with the host.

Setting
Options
9600 bps/
19200 bps

Page
155

Communications Condition Settings for The NT Link (1:1) Method
No further communications conditions need to be set.
Communications Conditions Settings for The NT Link (1:N) Method
Setting Item
Unit No.
(for NT Link (1:N)
only)
Comm. Speed

Function

Setting
Options
Set the unit number of the NT631/ 0 to 7
NT631C.
Sets the communications speed
for communications with the host.

Page
158

Standard or
high-speed

Setting The Conditions for Communications with The Memory Link
Method
Setting Item

Function

Data bits

Set the data bits length.

Stop bits
Parity

Set the stop bits length.
Set the parity.

Comm. Speed

Setting
Options
7, 8 bits

Page
160

1, 2 bits
None, even,
odd
Set the communications speed for 1200, 2400,
communications with the host.
4800, 9600,
19200, 38400
bps

Flow control

Set the flow control and its
method.

None, RS/CS,
XON/XOFF

Response

Set whether the response is car- Yes, No
ried out for normal process of
communications command or not.

153

Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches
Possible Combinations of
Communications Method
Settings

Section 6-7

The combinations of communications methods that can be set with the
NT631/NT631C are indicated in the table below. Combinations other than
these listed below cannot be set (when using a system for multi-venders, refer
to the PLC Connection Manual (V042-E1-@) or NT31/631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual (V060-E1-@)).

Serial port B
None

Serial port A
NT Link
NT Link
(1:1)
(1:N)

Host Link

Bar-code
reader

Memory
Link

None
Host Link

❍
❍

❍
×

❍
❍

❍
×

NT Link (1:1)
NT Link (1:N)

❍
❍

×
×

❍
❍

×
×

Memory Link

❍

❍: Possible combination

×: Impossible combination
Combinations other than those indicated above cannot be set.
Reference:

154

When using serial port B for communications with the host, and serial port A
for the transmission of screen data from the Support Tool, set the settings of
serial port A to None.

Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches

6-7-2

Section 6-7

Setting the Host Link Method
Set the communications conditions for the host link method at serial port A or
serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Display the fourth memory switch
screen by pressing the [↓] (next screen)
or [↑] (previous screen) touch switch.

Press the touch switch corresponding to
the port at which the host link method is
to be set (Comm. A Method or Comm. B
Method) to display the setting option Host
Link.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.

Press the Set touch switch to the right of
the port at which the setting has been
made.

155

Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches

Section 6-7

Press the Comm. Speed touch
switch to display the communications
speed to be set.
The setting option changes each
time the touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.

Press Quit.
The communications speed is set.

• To quit the communications speed setting screen without setting the communications speed, press the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C
returns to the memory switch setting screen (4/4) and the previous communications speed remains in effect.
On completion of communications speed setting, the NT631/NT631C returns
to the memory switch setting screen (4/4).
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press
the Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/
NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings,
press the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.

156

Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches

6-7-3

Section 6-7

Setting the NT Link (1:1) Method
Set the communications conditions for the NT Link (1:1) method at serial port
A or serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown
below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Display the fourth memory switch
screen by pressing the [↓] (next screen)
or [↑] (previous screen) touch switch.

Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the NT Link (1:1) method is to
be set (Comm. A Method or Comm. B
Method) to display the setting option NT
Link (1:1).

The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press
the Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/
NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings,
press the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.

157

Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches

6-7-4

Section 6-7

Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method (Standard/High-speed)
Set the communications conditions for the NT Link (1:N) method at serial port
A or serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown
below.
The communications speed determines whether the 1:N NT Link is standard
or high-speed.
Standard: Standard 1:N NT Link
High-speed: High-speed 1:N NT Link
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Display the fourth memory switch
screen by pressing the [↓] (next screen)
or [↑] (previous screen) touch switch.

Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the NT Link (1:N) method
(standard or high-speed) is to be set
(Comm. A Method or Comm. B Method) to
display the setting option NT Link (1:N).
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.

158

Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches

Section 6-7

Press the Set touch switch to the right of the
port at which the setting has been made.
In this example, serial port A is used.

Press the Unit No. touch switch to display
the unit number to be set. Press the Comm.
Speed touch switch to display the
communications speed, standard or 115.2kbps high-speed. (The Comm. Speed
setting determines which method of 1:N
NT Link is used.)
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed. In this example,
serial port A is used for a standard 1:N NT
Link.
Press Quit.
The unit number is set.

• To quit the unit number/communications speed setting screen without
confirming the unit number/communications speed settings, press the
Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the memory switch
setting screen (4/4) with the previous settings still in effect.
Reference:

• Unit numbers are numbers assigned to each PT when multiple PTs are
connected to one host, so that the host can identify the individual PTs.
The units numbers that can be set differ according to the host model, as
follows.
• C200HE(-ZE):
Unit numbers 0 to 3 (maximum of 4 PTs per host port)
• C200HG(-ZE), C200HX(-ZE):
Unit numbers 0 to 7 (maximum of 8 PTs per host port)
When making the settings, make sure there is no duplication of unit numbers
among PTs.
On completion of unit number setting, the NT631/NT631C returns to the
memory switch setting screen (4/4).
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.

] (next

• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press
the Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/
NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings,
press the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.

159

Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches

6-7-5

Section 6-7

Setting the Memory Link Method
Set the communications conditions for the host link method at serial port A or
serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.
Check the communications settings of the host to be used.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Display the fourth memory switch
screen by pressing the [↓] (next screen)
or [↑] (previous screen) touch switch.

Press the touch switch corresponding to the
port at which the memory link method is to
be set (Comm. A Method or Comm. B
Method) to display the setting option
Memory Link.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.

Press the Set touch switch to the right of the
port at which the setting has been made.
In this example, serial port A is used.

160

Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches

Section 6-7

Display the data bits to be set (7 bits or 8 bits)
by pressing the Data Bit Length touch switch.
Display the stop bits to be set (1 bit or 2 bits)
by pressing the Stop Bit Length touch switch.
Display the parity to be set (None, even, odd)
by pressing the Parity Bit touch switch.
Display the communications speed to be set
(1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps.)
by pressing the Comm. Speed touch switch.
Display the condition of the flow control to be
set (None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF) by pressing
Flow Control touch switch.
If the RS-422A is selected for serial port B
setting, RS/CS is not displayed.
Display presence or absence of the response
by pressing the Response touch switch.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.
In this example, serial port A is used.
Press the Quit touch switch.

161

Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches

6-7-6

Section 6-7

Setting the Communications Type for Serial Port B
Set the communications type (RS-232C or RS-422A) for serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Display the fourth memory switch
screen by pressing the [↓] (next screen)
or [↑] (previous screen) touch switch.

Press the Comm. B Select touch switch to
display the communications type to be
set.The setting option changes each time
the touch switch is pressed.

Reference:

If serial port B is used for RS-485 communications, RS-422A must be set as
its communications type.
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press
the Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/
NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings,
press the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.

162

Section 6-8

Starting Operation

6-8

Starting Operation
After completing screen data transmission and setting the communications
conditions, connect the NT631/NT631C to the host and start operation.
Note

Switching to the RUN
Mode and Starting
Operation

Check the operation of all screen data and host programs carefully before
using them. If incorrect, the system may operate unpredictably.
Press the Quit touch switch on the System Menu screen or other screen. The
NT631/NT631C switches to the RUN mode and starts operation.
The operation at the start is as follows.
Display of The System Initialization Screen
When establishing the communications with a host, the System initializing
character string is displayed on the screen. If the communications with the
host cannot be established, the System initializing screen remains up. If this is
the case, check the settings at the host and the PT side, the cables and wiring.
In addition, creating screen number 9000 enables the display of a screen
other than the System initialization screen.
Transmission of The Contents of Memory Tables
If the Resume Function memory switch is set to ON, or if the initial values of
the memory tables are used, the contents of the numeral/character-string
memory tables are copied to the allocated words at the host.

↓
Display of The Startup Screen
The startup screen is displayed on reading the contents (screen number of
the screen to be displayed) of the first word of the PT status control area.
If the contents are not correct for a screen number, or there is no data registered for the set screen number, an error message is displayed.
Confirming the
Communications between
the NT631/NT631C and the
Host

Execute the host program and confirm that the following operations are performed normally.
• Confirm that the NT631/NT631C screens switch in accordance with the
host program.
If the screens do not switch correctly, check the connection between
the host and the NT631/NT631C, and also check if the hardware settings are correct. For details, refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the
Host from the RS-232C Port, or SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host
from the RS-422A/485 Port.
• Confirm that the operation results of touch switch and numeric value/character string input at the NT631/NT631C are sent to the host correctly by
displaying the contents of the host words and bits using a Programming
Device (e.g. CX-Programmer).
If the results of operations at the NT631/NT631C are not sent to the
host correctly, check the setting of the display elements. For details on
setting display elements, refer to the description of each display element in the Reference Manual.

163

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

6-9

Various System Settings
The NT631/NT631C allows a variety of functions which are convenient during
operation to be set with memory switches. This section describes the memory
switch settings relating to the operation environment.
Since the memory switch settings are backed up to the flash memory by the
battery in the NT631/NT631C, they are not cleared when the power is
switched OFF.

6-9-1

Memory Switch Setting Screens
There are four memory switch setting screens. The required screen can be
displayed by using the [ ] (next screen) and [ ] (previous screen) touch
switches.
The four memory switch setting screens are shown below.

[ ] (next screen)

[ ] (previous screen)

[ ] (next screen)

[ ] (previous screen)

[ ] (next screen)

[ ] (previous screen)

Memory Switch Settings
A list of the memory switch settings is presented below.

164

• Start-up Wait Time

page 165

• Key Press Sound

page 166

• Buzzer Sound

page 166

• Printer Controller

page 168

• Print Method

page 169

• Screen Saver Movement

page 170

• Screen Saver Start up Time

page 173

• Hist. Disp. Method

page 175

• Resume Function

page 177

• Comm. Auto-return

page 179

• Time-out Interval

page 181

• Retry Counts

page 182

• Comm. A Method

page 152

[ ] (previous screen)

Section 6-9

Various System Settings
(For the bar code reader, refer to page 184.)
• Comm. B Select

page 162

• Comm. B Method

page 152

For details on each setting, refer to the pages indicated.

6-9-2

Setting the Start-up Wait Time
The Start-up Wait Time is the time lapse until the NT631/NT631C switches to
the RUN mode after its power has been switched ON or after it has been
reset. Set this item if it takes some time for the host to start operation. Nothing
is displayed during the Start-up Wait Time.
The setting range is 0 to 10 seconds. The default (factory) setting is 00sec.
Set the system start-up wait time by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Press Start-up Wait Time to display the
required time lapse.
The setting option changes each time
the touch switch is pressed, according
to the following sequence.
01 02 03 .... 09 10 00 01 ....

To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press
the Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/
NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings,
press the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.

165

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

6-9-3

Setting the Key Press Sound
It is possible to set whether or not the key sound is sounded when a touch
switch on the NT631/NT631C screen is pressed.
• ON: When a touch switch is pressed, the key sound sounds for 0.2 seconds.
• OFF: The key sound does not sound when touch switches are pressed.
The default (factory) setting is ON.
Set the key press sound by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Press Key Press Sound to display ON or
OFF.
The setting option changes each time
the touch switch is pressed.

6-9-4

Setting the Buzzer Sound
The NT631/NT631C has a function for sounding a buzzer in response to an
instruction from the host, or when an error occurs. It is possible to set whether
or not the buzzer actually sounds with the memory switches.

166

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

• ON:
The buzzer sounds in response to instructions and when an error occurs.
• OFF:
The buzzer does not sound in response to instructions or when errors
occur.
• ERROR ON:
The buzzer sounds only when an error occurs.
The default (factory) setting is OFF.
Reference:

• There are other instructions and settings relating to the buzzer, but this
memory switch setting has the highest priority.
• For details on the buzzer, refer to 2-15-5 Buzzer Function in the Reference Manual.
Set the buzzer sound by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Press Buzzer Sound to display ON,
OFF, or ERROR ON.
The setting option changes each
time the touch switch is pressed.

167

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

6-9-5

Setting the Printer Controller
The NT631/NT631C has a function for printing out data at a printer connected
to it in response to an instruction from the host or operation at the NT631/
NT631C. Three types of printer can be connected to the NT631/NT631C:
select the type used with this memory switch setting.
• ESC/P:
Printers that conform to Epson’s ESC/P 24-J83C (color) printer control
specifications or printers that conform to Epson’s ESC/P 24-J82 (monochrome) control specifications.
• PC-PR201H:
Printers that can emulate the PC-PR201H, made by NEC Corp.
• PCL 5:
Printers that conform to the PCL 5 printer control specifications.
Note that the NT631 can only be used with the monochrome Tone setting and
does not support color printing.
For the NT631, the Print Method is fixed as Tone.
The default (factory) setting is ESC/P.
Reference:

• In addition to this setting, NT631C has the Print Method setting
(page 169).
• For details on the print function, refer to 2-15-7 Print Function in the Reference Manual.
Set the printer controller setting by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.

168

Section 6-9

Various System Settings
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Press Printer Controller to display the
required printer type.
The setting option changes each time
the touch switch is pressed.

6-9-6

Setting the Print Method (NT631C Only)
The NT631/NT631C has a function for printing out data at a printer connected
to it in response to an instruction from the host or operation at the NT631/
NT631C.
When using the NT631C, the currently displayed screen image or other data
can be printed out in color. You can select whether screen data is actually
printed out in color, or in monochrome tones that represent colors, with this
memory switch setting.
When PCL 5 is set for Printer Controller, the setting is fixed as Tone.
• Color: Color images are printed in color.
• Tone:

Color images are printed in monochrome tones.

The default (factory) setting is Tone.
Reference:

• In addition to this setting, NT631C has the Printer Controller setting
(page 168).

169

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

• For details on the print function, refer to 2-15-7 Print Function in the Reference Manual.
Set the print method setting by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Press Print Method to display the required
printing method.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.

6-9-7

Setting Screen Saver Movement
The NT631/NT631C has a function to prevent the formation of an afterimage
by turning off the screen display if no operation is performed for a certain
period of time, and then displaying character strings at random positions and
in random colors (the colors only change for the NT631C).
The Screen Saver Movement setting determines whether or not these character strings are displayed while the screen display is off.
If Display is selected, the character string stored in character string memory
table No. 0 is displayed.

170

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

If Display erase is selected, the character string is not displayed, and the
backlight is also turned off while the screen display is off.
The default (factory) setting is Display erased.
The screen saver can be canceled, and former screen redisplayed, by any of
the following operations.
• Touching any part of the touch panel
• Screen switching due to PT status control area operations
• Screen switching due to bit memory table operations
• Execution of any of the following PT status control bit operations:
• Changing the backlight mode
• Screen printing (change from OFF to ON)
• Screen display (change from OFF to ON)
Reference:

• The time before the screen is turned OFF is set by the Screen Saver Start
up Time setting. For details, refer to 6-9-8 Setting the Screen Saver Startup Time (page 173).
• Even if its operation has been set with the Screen Saver Movement setting, the screen saver function will not be executed if 000 is set for Screen
Saver Start up Time.
• Screen saver function is enabled only through RUN mode of NT631/
NT631C. In System Menu or System Installer mode, this function is not
started.

171

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

Set the screen saver operation by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the second memory
switch setting screen.

Press Screen Saver Movement to display
Display or Display erased.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.

172

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

6-9-8

Setting the Screen Saver Start-up Time
The NT631/NT631C has a function to maximize the service life of the backlight and prevent the formation of an afterimage by turning off the screen display and the backlight if no operation is performed for a certain period of time.
The Screen Saver Start up Time setting determines the time interval before
the screen saver function operates.
The setting range is 0 to 255 minutes. The default (factory) setting is 10 minutes. If 000 is set, the screen saver function does not operate.
The screen saver can be canceled, and previous screen redisplayed, by any
of the following operations.
• Touching any part of the touch panel
• Screen switching due to PT status control area operations
• Screen switching due to bit memory table operations
• Execution of any of the following PT status control bit operations:
• Changing the backlight mode
• Screen printing (change from OFF to ON)
• Screen display (change from OFF to ON)
Reference:

• It is possible to display the character string stored in character string
memory table No. 0 at random positions and in random colors while the
screen display is off. For details, refer to 6-9-7 Setting Screen Saver
Movement (page 170). Note however that, when this feature is used, the
backlight does not go off.
• For details on the screen saver function, refer to 6-9-7 Setting Screen
Saver Movement (page 170).
• Screen saver function is enabled only through RUN mode of NT631/
NT631C. In System Menu or System Installer mode, this function is not
started.

173

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

Set the screen saver start-up time by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the second memory
switch setting screen.

Set a time in the input field to the right of
Screen Saver Start up Time.
Each of the digits can be incremented or
decremented by pressing the associated +
and - keys.

174

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

6-9-9

Setting the History Display Method
The NT631/NT631C features the display history record function, which
records the time at which screens are displayed during operation and the
number of times they are displayed, and the alarm history record function,
which continually monitors bit statuses at the host and records the time when
bits come ON and the number of times they come ON.
The Hist. Disp. Method setting determines whether — when these record data
are displayed in sort by occurrence — the records are displayed in a progression from newest to oldest or from oldest to newest.
• From Old Data:
The records are displayed in sequence from the oldest to newest.
• From New Data:
The records are displayed in sequence from the newest to oldest.
The default (factory) setting is From New Data.
Reference:

• When the voltage of the NT631/NT631C’s built-in battery becomes low,
the history record contents cannot be retained.
• For details on the display history record function and the alarm history
record function, refer to 2-15-1 Display History Record Function and 2-152 Alarm History Record Function in the Reference Manual.

175

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

Set the history display method by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the second memory
switch setting screen.

Press Hist. Disp. Method to display the
required display order.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.

176

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

6-9-10 Setting the Resume Function
The NT631/NT631C has a function to keep the contents of the memory tables
even when the power to the NT631/NT631C is OFF and write back them to
the host when the power is turned ON.
If the resume function is OFF, the memory tables are initialized to these initial
values on switching to the RUN mode. If the resume function is ON, these are
not initialized and are kept the battery-backed up contents.
When the memory table is initialized, its contents are reset to the initial state
that is set by the Support Tool.
When the system is started up the next time, the screen is displayed using the
previous contents of the memory table.
• ON:

The resume function is used.

• OFF:

The resume function is not used.

The default (factory) setting is OFF.
Reference:

• When the voltage of the NT631/NT631C’s built-in battery becomes low,
the memory table contents cannot be retained even if ON is set for the
resume function.
• For details on the resume record function, refer to 2-15-3 Resume Function in the Reference Manual.

177

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

Set the resume function by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the second memory
switch setting screen.

Press Resume Function to display the
required setting.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.

178

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

6-9-11 Setting the Automatic Reset Function
The NT631/NT631C has a function for ignoring communications errors and
automatically returning to the RUN mode when they occur.
The Comm. Auto-return setting determines whether the automatic reset function is effective or not.
• ON:
When a communications error occurs, the NT631/NT631C automatically
returns to the RUN mode without displaying an error screen (the System
Initializing screen may be displayed).
• OFF:
When a communications error occurs, an error screen is displayed and
operation stops. Pressing OK on the error screen returns the NT631/
NT631C to the RUN mode.
The default (factory) setting is OFF.
Reference:

• If a communications error occurs when OFF is set for Comm. Auto-return,
the NT631/NT631C makes the number of attempts at communications
with the host specified by the setting for the Retry Counts touch switch
(page 182). If communications cannot be re-established in any of these
attempts, an error screen is displayed.
• For details on communications errors, refer to 7-2-5 Communications
Errors and Their Remedies (page 233).

179

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

Set the automatic reset function by following the menu operation from the
System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the third memory
switch setting screen.

Press Comm. Auto-return to display the
required setting.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.

180

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

6-9-12 Setting the Time-out Interval
The NT631/NT631C goes into the time-out error status if no response is
received from the host within a fixed time. The Time-out Interval setting specifies the time lapse at which time-out is judged to have occurred.
The setting range is 1 to 10 seconds. The default (factory) setting is 1 second.
Reference:

Whether or not an error screen is displayed when a time-out error occurs is
determined by the setting for the Comm. Auto-return memory switch.
Set the time-out interval by following the menu operation from the System
Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the third memory
switch setting screen.

Press Time-out Interval to display the
required time lapse.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed, according to the
following sequence.
01 02 03 .... 09 10 01 ....

To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.

181

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

6-9-13 Setting the Retry Count
The NT631/NT631C does not immediately display an error screen when a
communications error occurs, but tries to re-establish communications. The
Retry Counts setting specifies the number of attempts to be made to re-establish communications. If communications cannot be recovered within this number of attempts, the following happens depending on the setting made for the
Comm. Auto-return memory switch (page 179).
Comm. Auto-return ON:
Operation in the RUN mode is continued without displaying an error screen.
Regardless of the setting made for Retry Counts, attempts to re-establish
communications are repeated until normal communications are achieved.
Comm. Auto-return OFF:
The RUN mode is ended and an error screen is displayed. On pressing the
OK touch switch on the error screen, the screen displayed immediately before
is redisplayed and attempts are made to re-establish communications.
The System Menu can be displayed from the error screen by pressing any two
of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously.
The setting range is 0 to 255 times. The default (factory) setting is 5 times.
Reference:

182

For details on communications errors, refer to 7-2-5 Communications Errors
and Their Remedies (page 233).

Section 6-9

Various System Settings

Set the retry count by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the third memory
switch setting screen.

Set a number of times in the input field to
the right of Retry Counts.
Each of the digits can be incremented or
decremented by pressing the associated +
and - keys.

183

Section 6-10

Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function

6-10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
The NT631/NT631C has a bar code reader input function which allows a bar
code reader to be connected and bar code data to read as character strings
into character string input fields.
This section describes the communications conditions for the bar code reader
and the setting method for confirming the input data.
Reference:

• For details on bar code reader types and connection methods, refer to 3-4
Connecting a Bar Code Reader in this manual and for details on how to
use a bar code reader refer to 3-7 Input of Numeric Values and Character
Strings in the Reference Manual.
• The bar code reader is connected to serial port A. This means that serial
port B must be used for communications with the host.

Communications Condition Settings for Bar Code Readers
Setting Item

Function

Setting Options

Page

Data bit length
Stop bit length

Sets the bit length for the data bits.
Sets the stop bit length for the data.

7* or 8 bits
1 or 2* bits

Parity bit
Communications
speed
Input method

Sets the parity bit for the data.
Sets the communications speed for the bar code reader

None, odd, even*
186
4800, 9600*, or 19200 bps 186

Sets the method for confirming data when it is input to a
Manual*, Auto
character string input field.
Manual: The data is confirmed with a touch switch. The data
can be corrected and character strings can be added.
Auto: The data is automatically confirmed when it is input.

* Default (factory) setting

184

186
186

186

Section 6-10

Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function
Setting the
Communications
Conditions and Setting
Method

Set the bar code reader communications conditions and method of confirmation at input by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown
below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Memory Switch.

Press [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) to display the fourth memory
switch setting screen.

Press Comm. A Method to select Bar-Code
Reader.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.

185

Section 6-10

Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function

Press the Set touch switch to the right of
Comm. A Method.

Display the required setting for each item
by pressing the touch switches.
The setting option changes each time the
touch switch is pressed.

Press Quit.

• Pressing Abort on the communications condition/confirmation method
setting screen causes the NT631/NT631C to return to the memory switch
setting screen (4/4) without executing setting (with the previous settings
still effective).
On completion of communications condition/confirmation method setting, the
NT631/NT631C returns to the memory switch setting screen (4/4).
To set other memory switches, select the relevant screen using the [ ] (next
screen) or [ ] (previous screen) touch switch, then make the setting.
• To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen, press
the Quit touch switch. The settings made last will be set and the NT631/
NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.
• To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings,
press the Abort touch switch. The NT631/NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect.

186

Section 6-11

System Maintenance

6-11 System Maintenance
The NT631/NT631C has the following maintenance and check functions.
Item
I/O Settings

Function
Adjustment of display panel contrast and brightness of the backlight.

Page
187

Calendar Check
PT Settings

Display and setting of the time data of the NT631/NT631C clock function.
191
Direct connection setting of the screen data in the NT631/NT631C and display of the 193
setting statuses of the serial ports.

Display history record
Alarm history record

Display and printing of display history record data.
Display and printing of alarm history record data.

194
196

Screen data check
I/O
Device check
check I/F check

Display of each screen stored in the NT631/NT631C.
Checking of the I/O functions of the NT631/NT631C.

198
201

Checking of the communications functions of the NT631/NT631C.

209

This section describes how to use these functions.

6-11-1 I/O Settings
This function is used to adjust the contrast of the display panel and the brightness of the backlight.
With the NT631/631C, you can adjust the contrast and brightness settings
using either of the following two methods.
Setting from the System Menu
Adjusting the contrast: Select System Menu/Maintenance Mode/I/O Settings/
Contrast Adjust.
Adjusting the brightness: Select System Menu/Maintenance Mode/I/O Settings/Brightness Adjust.
Setting Using Special Screen During PT Operation
You can set the brightness and contrast by displaying the screen with the following number, using a touch switch with a switch screen function, or by specifying the display screen in the PT status control area.
Screen number 9030: Brightness and contrast adjustment screen.
Contrast Adjustment (for
NT631C-ST141@-EV1
only)

The NT631C-ST141@-EV1 allows the contrast to be adjusted in 100 steps.
The CONTRAST ADJUST screen enables you to make the adjustment while
actually checking the contrast on the screen. Once the contrast has been set,
it remains in effect even if the power is turned OFF or the NT631/NT631C is
reset (and even if the voltage of the built-in battery becomes low).

187

Section 6-11

System Maintenance
Setting from the System Menu

Adjust the contrast of the display panel by following the menu operation from
the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select I/O Settings.

Select Contrast Adjust.

Adjust the contrast with the touch switches
in the left half of the screen.
[ ]: Increase 10 steps
[ ]: Increase 1 step
[ ]: Decrease 1 step
[ ]: Decrease 10 steps

Press Quit.
The contrast is set and the NT631/NT631C
returns to the I/O SETTINGS MENU screen.

188

Section 6-11

System Maintenance

Setting Using Brightness and Contrast Adjustment Screen
Display screen number 9030 using either a touch switch with switch screen
function, or by specifying the display screen in the PT status control area.

Adjust the contrast with the touch switches in
the right half of the screen.
[
[
[
[

]:
]:
]:
]:

Increase 10 steps
Increase 1 step
Decrease 1 step
Decrease 10 steps

Press Quit.
The contrast is set, and the NT631/NT631C
returns to the previous screen.

Backlight Brightness
Adjustment (for NT631CST141@-EV@ only)
Reference:

The NT631C-ST141@-EV@ allows the brightness of the backlight to be
adjusted in 3 steps. The BRIGHTNESS ADJUST screen enables you to make
the adjustment while actually checking the brightness on the screen.
In the NT631C-ST153@-EV3, adjustment is not possible even though this
screen is displayed.

189

Section 6-11

System Maintenance

Adjust the backlight brightness by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select I/O Settings.

Select Brightness Adjust.

Adjust the contrast with the High, Middle, and
Low touch switches in the left half of the
screen.

Press Quit.
The contrast is set and the NT631/NT631C
returns to the I/O SETTINGS MENU screen.

190

Section 6-11

System Maintenance

Adjust the brightness with the touch switches
(High, Middle, Low) in the left half of the
screen.

Press Quit.
The brightness is set, and the
NT631/NT631C returns to the previous
screen.

6-11-2 Displaying/Setting the Calendar and Clock
The NT631/NT631C has a clock function for setting and displaying the date
and time.
This section describes how to display and set the clock data by menu operation from the System Menu.
Reference:

• The clock function does not strictly check the date and day of the week
settings. When setting the clock data, be sure to set the correct date and
day of the week. If a mistake is made — for example entering a value in
the range 13 to 19 when entering the month — the buzzer sounds three
times.
Make sure that the data is correct when the month changes.
• Numeral memory tables 247 to 255 are reserved for the clock function.
Clock data can be displayed and set during operation of the NT631/
NT631C by using these numeral memory tables.
• For details on the clock function, refer to 3-10 Display and Setting of Calendar Clock in the Reference Manual.
• No clock data is set on shipment from the factory.
• The clock data is backed up by the built-in battery of the NT631/NT631C.
If the battery voltage becomes low, the clock data cannot be retained
when the power to the NT631/NT631C is turned OFF or the NT631/
NT631C is reset and the clock function will not operate correctly.
• When writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting made
for System Setting in the System Installer mode, it is not possible to set
the date and time.

191

Section 6-11

System Maintenance

Display/set clock data by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Calendar Check.

Press Set.
If you are just checking the display, press
Quit at this point; the NT631/NT631C will
return to the MAINTENANCE MODE
MENU screen.

Set the date.
Each of the digits of the year, month, date,
hour, minute, and second settings, and the
day of the week setting, are touch switches:
press these touch switches to change the
corresponding settings.

Press Quit.
The clock data is set and the NT631/NT631C
returns to the date and time display.

Pressing Abort causes the NT631/NT631C to return to the date and time display without executing setting (with the previous settings still effective).

192

Section 6-11

System Maintenance

6-11-3 Checking the PT Setting Status
The direct connection settings of the NT631/NT631C screen data, and the
settings for serial port A and serial port B, can be checked.
Screen Configuration and
Display Contents

There are the following three PT setting status screens.

[ ] (next screen)

[ ] (previous screen)

[ ] (next screen)
[ ] (previous screen)

Display Contents of The First Screen
Item
Screen Data Type

Meaning
The host type set for the screen data

PT Control Area

Word at the host to which the PT status control area is allocated

PT Notification Area

Word at the host to which the PT status notify area is allocated
Window Control Area Word at the host to which the window control area is allocated
Numeric Expression

Expansion I/F
Compatibility

Default for the method of interpretation of the contents of host
words to which numeral memory tables are allocated (numeric
value storage method).
Type of Unit installed at the expansion interface connector
Sets whether or not to use NT30/620 compatible mode for
screen data. (Sets whether to operate as a normal NT31/631
or emulate many key NT30/620 characteristics.)

Display Contents of The Second Screen
Item

Meaning

Comm. Port A
Comm. Method

Communications type set for serial port A (fixed as RS-232C)
Communications method set for serial port A

Comm. Setting

Communications conditions set for serial port A (display contents differ according to the communications method)

Display Contents of The Third Screen
Item
Comm. Port B
Comm. Method
Comm. Setting

Meaning
Communications type set for serial port B (RS-232C/RS422A)
Communications method set for serial port B
Communications settings set for serial port B (display contents differ according to the communications method)

193

Section 6-11

System Maintenance
Display Method

Display the PT setting statuses by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select PT Settings.

Switch the screen as required by pressing
the [↓] (next screen) or [↑] (previous
screen) touch switch.

Press Quit.
The NT631/NT631C returns to the
MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.

6-11-4 Displaying and Printing the Display History Record
The display history record function is a function that records the order of display of each screen during operation, and the number of times each screen is
displayed. Only the screens for which the display history screen attribute has
been set in advance are processed by this function.
The record data can be displayed, and printed out at a printer connected to
the NT631/NT631C by operation from the System Menu.
This section explains how to display and print out the display history record
data recorded in the NT631/NT631C.
Note that there are two display methods sort by occurrence (display time
order) and sort by frequency (order of number of times displayed).

194

Section 6-11

System Maintenance
Reference:

• With the NT631/NT631C, the record data can also be displayed by calling
screen No. 9001 (sort by occurrence) or screen No. 9002 (sort by frequency) during the RUN mode.
• For details on the display history record function, refer to 2-15-1 Display
History Record Function in the Reference Manual.
• The order of display for sort by occurrence display (from oldest record or
from newest record) is set with the Hist. Disp. Method memory switch
(page 175).
• The printing method and other information must be set in advance with
the Printer Controller (page 168) and Print Method (page 169) memory
switches.
Display and print the display history record data by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Display History.

Select Sort by Occurrence or Sort by
Frequency.

195

Section 6-11

System Maintenance

If necessary, select the next or previous
screen by pressing [↓] (next screen) or
[↑] (previous screen).
The example screen to the left shows a
display for the sort by occurrence
method (from oldest record).

If required, press Prt. to print the display
history record data.

Press Quit.
The NT631/NT631C returns to the DISPLAY
HISTORY MENU screen.

Example Print-out
All of the recorded data is printed out in the same order as on the currently
displayed screen.
Example:
Sort by occurrence, from oldest record
No.

Scrn

YY/MM/DD HH:MM

Comment

1
2

98/01/12
98/01/12

10:21
11:53

Coolant Error
Motor Error

3
4

8
98/01/13
2000 98/01/13

09:35
14:22

Compressor Error
Emergency Stop

01/01

6-11-5 Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record
The alarm history record function is a function that continually monitors, during operation, the status of bits at the host designated in advance with a bit
memory table, and records the time when these bits come ON, and the number of times they come ON.
The record data can be displayed, and printed out at a printer connected to
the NT631/NT631C by operation from the System Menu.
This section explains how to display and print out the alarm history record
data recorded in the NT631/NT631C.
Note that there are two display methods sort by occurrence (ON time order)
and sort by frequency (order of number of times the bits have come ON).

196

Section 6-11

System Maintenance
Reference:

• With the NT631/NT631C, the record data can also be displayed by registering an alarm history display element on the screen.
• For details on the alarm history record function, refer to 3-8 Using the
Alarm List/History Function of NT31, NT31C, NT631,and NT631C Reference Manual (V064).
• The order of display for sort by occurrence display (from oldest record or
from newest record) is set with the Hist. Disp. Method memory switch
(page 175).
• The printing method and other information must be set in advance with
the Printer Controller (page 168) and Print Method (page 169) memory
switches.
Display and print the alarm history record data by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Alarm History.

Select Sort by Occurrence or Sort by
Frequency.

197

Section 6-11

System Maintenance

If required, press Prt. to print the display
history record data.

Press Quit.
The NT631/NT631C returns to the
ALARM HISTORY MENU screen.

Example Print-out
All of the recorded data is printed out in the same order as on the currently
displayed screen.
Example:
Sort by occurrence method, from oldest record
No.

Comment

YY/MM/DD HH:MM

1
2

Remote I/O Error
PIC Unit Error

98/02/06
98/02/07

16:02
09:21

Cycle Time Over

98/02/17

15:44

01/01

6-11-6 Checking Screen Data
The NT631/NT631C allows the registered screens (Nos. 1 to 3999) to be displayed and checked by operation from the System Menu.
Reference:

• Window screens cannot be displayed by operation from the System
Menu.
• Only the user screens (Nos. 1 to 3999) can be displayed. Screens for system use cannot be displayed.

198

Section 6-11

System Maintenance
Specifying The Display Method

Specify the display method for the screens as indicated in the table below.
Setting Item

Function

Display of Lamp/
Touch SW No.

Allows designation of whether the bit number of the lamp bit set for a lamp or touch
switch is displayed or not.
The display format is as follows L@❍❍❍❍❍❍❍ (@: area type, ❍❍❍❍❍❍❍: bit number).

Display of Memory
Table No.

Allows designation of whether the table numbers of numeral and character string
memory tables are displayed or not.
The display format for numeral memory tables is N❍❍❍❍ and the display format for
character string memory tables is S❍❍❍❍.
This function is valid for the following display elements.
- Numeral displays
- Character string displays
- Bar graphs
- Numeral setting input fields (including thumbwheel type)
- Character string input fields
Allows designation of whether image/library code numbers are displayed or not.

Display of image/
Library No.
Display of Broken
Line Frame

Setting
Options
ON, OFF*

ON, OFF*

Allows designation of whether or not broken line frames are displayed around the dis- ON, OFF*
play elements for showing the positions registered.

* Default (factory) setting
Reference:

Each setting of the screen data check is effective only on this menu. Exiting
from this screen data check menu resets the settings to the default (all the
settings are set to OFF).
Operations On The SCREEN DATA CHECK Screen
The function shown below can be set on the SCREEN DATA CHECK screen.
Use this function as required when displaying complex screens on which multiple display elements have been registered overlapping each other.
a) Equivalent to 2 touch switches (14.4 mm)
NT631 : 14.4 mm
NT631C : 13.2 mm
c)
b) Equivalent to 2 touch switches (14.4 mm)
NT631 : 14.4 mm
NT631C : 13.2 mm

a. Display the previous display element on the upper most portion of the
screen in the order in which the display elements were registered (excluding fixed display elements).
b.

Display the next display element on the upper most portion of the
screen in the order in which the display elements were registered (excluding fixed display elements).

Return to the screen on which screens are specified.

199

Section 6-11

System Maintenance
Displaying the SCREEN
DATA CHECK Screen

Display the SCREEN DATA CHECK screen by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select Screen Data Disp.

Specify the screen to be displayed in the
input field in the middle of the screen.
Each of the digits can be incremented
or decremented by pressing the
associated + and - keys.

Press Set.

Press the touch switches to specify the
display method in each case.
The setting option changes each time a
touch switch is pressed.

200

Section 6-11

System Maintenance

Press Quit to return to the screen number
selection screen.

Press Disp.

Touching the top or bottom of the screen
changes the way the display elements
overlap each other in the order in which they
are registered.
In this example, the bottom portion of the
touch switch, which is under the lamp, will be
displayed over the lamp.

When you have finished checking the screen,
press the central part of the screen to return
to the screen number selection screen.

If you wish to continue by checking another screen, repeat the operation,
starting by specifying the screen number.
To end the operation, press Quit on the screen number selection screen. The
NT631/NT631C returns to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen.

6-11-7 Device Check
The NT631/NT631C provides checks on the functions of the following items.
• Buzzer

page 202

• LED

page 203

• LCD

page 204

• Backlight

page 204

• Screen data memory

page 205

• Touch switches

page 207

• Battery voltage

page 208

201

Section 6-11

System Maintenance
Checking the Buzzer
Reference:

Check if the buzzer sounds correctly.
The buzzer will sound in this check regardless of the setting made with the
Buzzer Sound memory switch.
Check the buzzer by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select I/O Check.

Select Device Check.

Select Buzzer Check.

• If the buzzer functions correctly, it will sound continuously. At this time, the
Buzzer Check touch switch will be displayed in reverse video.
• To stop the buzzer while it is sounding, press the Buzzer Check touch
switch again.

202

Section 6-11

System Maintenance
Checking the RUN LED

Check if the RUN LED functions normally.
Check the RUN LED by following the menu operation from the System Menu
shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select I/O Check.

Select Device Check.

Select LED Check.

• If the RUN LED is functioning normally, it will operate as follows. At this
time the LED Check touch switch will be displayed in reverse video.
Lit in green - OFF - lit in red - OFF - lit in green...
• To end the LED check, press the LED Check touch switch on the DEVICE
CHECK MENU screen again.

203

Section 6-11

System Maintenance
Checking the LCD (Screen
Display)

Check if the LCD display (or EL display for NT631) functions normally by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select I/O Check.

Select Device Check.

Select LCD Check.

• The check screen displays all the dots on the screen: either press anywhere on the touch panel or wait for three seconds and all the dots will be
cleared.
With the NT631C, the display and clearance of all the dots on the
screen is repeated for each color in turn (red green blue magenta cyan
yellow white black).
On completion of the display and clearance of all dots, the NT631/
NT631C returns to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.
• Touch the touch panel to discontinue the LCD check. Even if 3 seconds
have not passed, the check will proceed to the next color.
Checking the Backlight
(for NT631C only)

204

Check if the backlight functions normally with the NT631C by following the
menu operation from the System Menu shown below. This function is not
available with the NT631.

Section 6-11

System Maintenance
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select I/O Check.

Select Device Check.

Select Backlight Check.

• If the backlight is normal, it flashes. At this time, the Backlight Check
touch switch is displayed in reverse video.
• To end the backlight check, press the Backlight Check touch switch again.
Screen Data Memory
Check
Reference:

Check if the screen data memory is functioning normally.
• In the screen data memory check, a write test is performed on the screen
data memory. Since all the screen data in the NT631/NT631C is lost in
this check, confirm that this data is backed up at the Support Tool or
Memory Unit before executing it.
• If writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting for System
Settings in the System Installer mode, it is not possible to execute a
screen data check.
• Once a screen data check has been started, it cannot be stopped.

205

Section 6-11

System Maintenance

Check the screen data memory by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select I/O Check.

Select Device Check.

Select Screen Memory.

Press Execute.

• During the check, the message Checking Now... is displayed.
• On normal completion of the check, the message Memory Check OK is
displayed.
• If an error is discovered in the check, the message Memory Check NG is
displayed.

206

Section 6-11

System Maintenance

After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT631/NT631C
returns to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.
Checking Touch Switches

Check whether or not the touch switches function normally by following the
menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select I/O Check.

Select Device Check.

Select Touch Switch.

Press the touch switches displayed on
the screen. A touch switch is normal if it
is displayed in reverse video while
pressed.

207

Section 6-11

System Maintenance

To end the check, press the touch switch at the top right corner (NT631: displayed in reverse video; NT631C: displayed in yellow). The NT631/NT631C
will return to the DEVICE CHECK MENU.
Reference:

• The host is not notified of the operation of touch switches pressed during
the I/O check.
• The check cannot be performed until the touch switch at the top right corner is displayed in reverse video (for NT631) or displayed in yellow
(NT631C). Start the check after the status of the touch switch at the top
right corner has changed.

Checking the Battery
Voltage

Check the voltage of the NT631/NT631C’s built-in battery by following the
menu operation from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select I/O Check.

Select Device Check.

Select Battery.

208

Section 6-11

System Maintenance

The voltage is within the normal range. or
The voltage is lowered. is displayed.

After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT631/NT631C
returns to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen.
Note

When The voltage is lowered is displayed, replace the built-in battery immediately. For details on the replacement method, refer to 7-3-1 Replacing the Battery (page 241).

6-11-8 Checking Interfaces
The NT631/NT631C allows the following communications functions to be
checked.
• Communications with the Support Tool page 209

Checking
Communications with the
Support Tool

• Communications at serial ports

page 210

• Communications with printers

page 213

Check communications with the Support Tool by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select I/O Check.

Select I/F Check.

209

Section 6-11

System Maintenance
Select Tool Comm..

The check on communications with the
Support Tool starts.

If communications with the Support Tool is normal, data transmitted from the
Support Tool is displayed as hexadecimal data when received by the NT631/
NT631C.
After confirming the result of the test, press Quit. The NT631/NT631C returns
to the I/F CHECK MENU screen.
Checking
Communications at Serial
Ports

Check communications at the serial ports (A, B).
Check Screen
The check screen and check method differ according to the communications
method set for the port to be checked.
For Host Link
Example: Serial port A while using the host link

Press Execute to start the check. The data for checking communications is
sent to the host, and is displayed as the Sending Data in hexadecimal.
• If communications with the host are normal, the reply from the host is displayed at Received Data in hexadecimal.
• If a communications error occurs while checking the communications conditions with the host, a communications error screen is displayed. Since
this indicates that there is a communications fault, check the communications cables and settings.

210

Section 6-11

System Maintenance
For NT Link (1:1, 1:N Standard, or 1:N High-speed)
Example: Serial port B while using the NT Link (1:N)

Press Execute to start the check. The data for checking communications is
sent to the host, and is displayed as ∗∗ symbols at Sending Data.
• If communications with the host are normal, the reply from the host is displayed at Received Data as ∗∗ symbols.
• If a communications error occurs while checking the communications conditions with the host, a communications error screen is displayed. Since
this indicates that there is a communications fault, check the communications cables and settings.
For Memory Link
Example: Serial port A while using the memory link

The check is started as soon as the check screen is displayed. Send the command from the host.
• If communications with the host are normal, the data received from the
host is displayed in hexadecimal text code at Received Data.
• If nothing is displayed at Received Data when the command is sent from
the host, there is a communications fault: check the communications
cables and settings.
For a Bar Code Reader

The check starts when the check screen is displayed. Read data with the bar
code reader in this status.
• If communications with the bar code reader are normal, the read character strings are displayed in hexadecimal text code at Received Data.

211

Section 6-11

System Maintenance

• If nothing is displayed at Received Data when data is read with the bar
code reader, there is a communications fault: check the communications
cables and settings.
Check Method
Check communications with the serial ports by following the menu operation
from the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select I/O Check.

Select I/F Check.

Select Comm. Port A or Comm. Port B.
The check screen is displayed (Check
screen, page 210).

After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT631/NT631C
returns to the I/F CHECK MENU screen.

212

Section 6-11

System Maintenance
Checking
Communications with a
Printer

Check communications with a printer by following the menu operation from
the System Menu shown below.
Ver 4.12

Select Maintenance Mode.

Select I/O Check.

Select I/F Check.

Select Printer.

Confirm that a printer is connected to the
NT631/NT631C, then press Execute:
Printer Interface Check will be printed out
at the printer.

• While data is being sent to the printer, the message Checking Now... is
displayed.
• When the sending of data to the printer is completed, Finished Normal by
Printer Interface Check is displayed.

213

Programming Console Function

Section 6-12

• If data does not reach the printer within 60 seconds after sending starts,
the message ‘Finished Printer output failed’ is displayed.
After confirming the result of the check, press Quit. The NT631/NT631C
returns to the I/F CHECK MENU screen.

6-12 Programming Console Function
The NT631/NT631C has been equipped with the Programming Console function, which allows it to be used like a C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console
for CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CS/CJseries PLC, or SRM1 PLCs.
Except for recording (saving) ladder programs on cassette tape and replaying
(reading) them, almost all the functions of a Programming Console can be
executed.
Note

When the programmable controller functions are used, carefully check that
the system is safe before carrying out the following operations.
• Changing monitor data
• Switching the operating mode
• Forced set or reset
• Changing a present value or set value

214

Section 6-12

Programming Console Function

6-12-1 Usable Systems
The Programming Console function can be used with an NT631/NT631C connected to a PLC when using the communications method indicated below.
Communications Method
NT Link (1:1)

Applicable PLCs
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E(*1)
C200HG-CPU43/63-(Z)E(*1)

Connected Port
CPU Unit’s built-in
RS-232C port

C200HX-CPU44/64-(Z)E(*1)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE(*1)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE(*1)
CPM2A-30CD@@-@(*1)
CPM2A-40CD@@-@(*1)
CPM2A-60CD@@-@(*1)
CPM2C-10@@@@@@-@(*2)
CPM2C-20@@@@@@-@(*2)
CQM1-CPU4@-EV1(*1)
CQM1H-CPU21/51/61(*1)
SRM1-C02-V2
CPM1-10CDR-@
CPM1-20CDR-@
CPM1A-10CD@-@
CPM1A-20CD@-@
CPM1A-30CD@-@
CPM1A-40CD@-@
NT Link (1:N)

Reference:

CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H
CS1D-CPU66H/67H
CJ1G-CPU44/45
CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H
CJ1M-CPU11/12/13/21/22/23

Peripheral port (*3)

CPU Unit’s built-in
RS-232C port
Peripheral port (*4)

The peripheral port Programming Console always has priority. If a Programming Console is connected later, the Programming Console function
of the NT631/NT631C is invalidated and operation from the NT631/
NT631C becomes impossible.

The CPM2C-CN111 Connecting Cable splits the PLC’s Communications
Port into a RS-232C port and a peripheral port.

An RS-232C cable cannot be connected to the peripheral port. An RS232C adapter (CPM1-CIF01) is required.

The RS-232C cable cannot be directly connected to the peripheral port. An
RS-232C converting cable (CS1W-CN118) is required.

Note that the Programming Console function cannot be used with CPM1,
CQM1, and C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E PLCs of the following lot numbers.
CPM1: @@@5, @@*6
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.

215

Programming Console Function

Section 6-12

CQM1: @@@3, @@@4, @@@5, @@*6
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.
C200HX/HG/HE: @@@5 @@*6
where * is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y.

6-12-2 Connection Method
CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/
HG/HE(-Z)E, or SRM1

The connection method is exactly the same as for the NT Link (1:1). Refer to
SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or SECTION 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting
to the PLC.
* When using the Programming Console function with a CQM1H, turn ON pin
7 of the DIP switch on the front of the CQM1H’s CPU Unit.

CPM1 or CPM2A

The connection method is the same as for the NT Link (1:1). With a CPM1,
connect the RS-232C cable to the peripheral port via a CPM1-CIF01 RS232C Adapter or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
Refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to the PLC.

CPM2C

The connection method is the same as for the NT Link (1:1). Connect to the
PLC’s communications connector with a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/
118 Connecting Cable, a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or a CPM1-CIF11
RS-422A Adapter.
Refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to the PLC.
* When using the Programming Console function with a CPM2C, turn ON pin
2 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPM2C’s CPU Unit.

CS/CJ-series PLC

The connection method is exactly the same as for the NT Link (1:N) (standard
or high-speed). Refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS232C Port or SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port
for details on connecting to the PLC. The standard or high-speed 1:N NT Link
can be used.
The Programming Console function can be used only when the PT’s unit number is set to 0. Only one Unit using the Programming Console function can be
connected to each of the PLC’s ports (built-in RS-232C port and peripheral
port).
Make sure that the PT’s highest unit number is set to 0 in the CS/CJ-series
PLC setup.
With the CS/CJ-series PLC, the Programming Console function can not be
used simultaneously at both the built-in RS-232C port and peripheral port.
Furthermore, the Programming Console function can not be started at the
RS-232C port while a Programming Console is connected to the peripheral
port.

216

Section 6-12

Programming Console Function

6-12-3 Method of Use
The Programming Console screen is displayed by operating the system menu
as described below.
Ver 4.12

Select Expansion Mode.

Select Programming Console.

The Programming Console screen is
displayed.
Press the Programming Console sheet
keys (touch switches) for the operation.
Press the Quit touch switch to exit the
screen.
An error is displayed if a wrong
communications protocol is selected
or a Programming Console is
connected to the peripheral port.(*1)
*1

Reference:

Key Operations

With the CS1G/CS1H, the Programming Console function can not be used
simultaneously at both the built-in RS-232C port and peripheral port.

If an error screen is displayed, the System Menu can be displayed from the
error screen by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel
simultaneously. Pressing the OK touch switch on the error screen will return
the display to that immediately before the error occurred, but only if the cause
of the error is removed. If this does not happen, press two of the four corners
of the touch panel to display the System Menu.
Mode Selection Keys, Mode Lock Key
The display element on the Programming Console screen shown below comprises the mode selection keys, which change the operation mode of the PLC,
and the mode lock key, which prevents unintended mode changes.

Mode selection keys

Mode lock key

217

Section 6-12

Programming Console Function

The RUN, MONITOR, and PROGRAM mode selection key elements are
touch switches and pressing them causes the PLC operation mode to change
(unlike an actual Programming Console, it is possible to switch directly
between the RUN mode and the PROGRAM mode.)
When the Programming Console function is started, the PLC operation status
is read and reflected at the PLC.
The mode lock key element is also a touch switch, and it alternates between
the lock ON (with no key displayed) and lock OFF (with key displayed) states
when pressed. During the lock ON state, mode selection key operations are
ineffective. The mode displays change as indicated in the figures below during
the lock ON status and during the lock OFF status.
When the Programming Console function starts, the lock ON status is established.
If the RUN, MONITOR, or PROGRAM mode selection key is pressed in the
lock OFF status, the mode changes and the lock ON status is established.
During Lock OFF
RUN mode

MONITOR mode

PROGRAM mode

During Lock ON
RUN mode

MONITOR mode

PROGRAM mode

Programming Console Keyboard
The Programming Console keyboard used on the screen when the Programming Console function is used is comprised entirely of touch switches (shown
by the dashed line frames in the figure below). On pressing a touch switch, a
key operation is executed. However, since there is a discrepancy between the
size of the displayed keys and the size of the touch switches, take care to
press as close to the center of the key as possible by referring to the figure
below.
In addition, if the connected host is the CS1G/CS1H, the Programming Console key sheet for the CS-series is automatically displayed.

218

Programming Console Function

Section 6-12

Standard Programming Console Key Sheet

Programming Console Key Sheet for CS1 Series

Differences with Respect
to Programming Consoles

• Programs cannot be stored (recorded) or read (replayed). If it is necessary to store or read a program, use a Programming Device.
• It is not possible to adjust the volume of the key press sound. Whether or
not the key press sound sounds is determined by the setting for the Key
Press Sound memory switch of the NT631/NT631C. It sounds when the
setting is ON and does not when the setting is OFF (page 166).
• If an error occurs when using the Programming Console function, an error
screen is displayed. Whether or not the buzzer sounds at this time is
determined by the setting for the Buzzer Sound memory switch of the
NT631/NT631C (page 166).

219

Section 6-13

Device Monitor Function
Reference:

A communications error will occur if you use the Programming Console
function to change the communications settings (in the PLC Setup) that
govern the port to which the NT631/NT631C is connected. In this case, the
Programming Console function will be unusable.

6-13 Device Monitor Function
The NT31/NT31C has been equipped with the Device Monitor function which
can be used to change the PLC’s operating mode, read/change words in the
PLC’s data areas, and display the PLC’s error log of a CS/CJ-series PLC,
CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, or SRM1.
The Device Monitor can perform the following operations:
• Changing the PLC’s operating mode
• Displaying/changing the contents of words, displaying/changing the status
of bits, force-setting/force-resetting the status of bits (Registration Monitor)
• Listing the contents of a range of words (Continuous Monitor)
• Displaying the error log and clearing errors (Error Log)
This section provides an overview of the Device Monitor function and explains
how to connect to the PLC. For more details, refer to 2-16 Device Monitor
Function in the Reference Manual.
!Caution Be sure that it is safe to proceed before using the Device Monitor function to
perform one of the following operations from the PT.
Changing monitored data
Switching the PLC’s operating mode
Force setting or force resetting bits
Changing PVs or SVs
Reference:

• The Device Monitor function can be used with Ver. 3.0 and higher versions of the PT system program only.
• The Device Monitor functions are almost identical to the functions of the
Data Access Console (DAC).
• The Device Monitor function cannot be used with host link or memory link
communications.

220

Section 6-13

Device Monitor Function

6-13-1 Compatible Systems
The following table shows the combinations of communications methods and
PLCs that can support the PT’s Device Monitor function.
Communications
method

PLC model

1:1 NT Link

C200HS-CPU21/23/31/33
C200HE-CPU32/42 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CPM1-10CDR-@*1
CPM1-20CDR-@*1
CPM1A-10CD@-@*1
CPM1A-20CD@-@*1
CPM1A-30CD@-@*1
CPM1A-40CD@-@*1
CPM2A-30CD@@-@
CPM2A-40CD@@-@
CPM2A-60CD@@-@
CPM2C-10@@@@@@-@*2
CPM2C-20@@@@@@-@*2
CQM1-CPU4@-EV1
CQM1H-CPU21/51/61
SRM1-C02-V2

1:N NT Link

C200HE-CPU32/42 (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64 (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CQM1H-CPU21/51/61
SRM1-C02-V2
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H
CS1D-CPU65H/67H
CJ1G-CPU44/45
CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H
CJ1M-CPU11/12/13/21/22/23

A CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter is required.

Use a Conversion Cable (CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118), CPM1CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect to
the PLC.

6-13-2 Connection Method
CQM1H or C200HX/HG/
HE(-Z)E

The 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link can be used. The connection method is
exactly the same as for the 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link. Refer to SECTION 4
Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or SECTION 5 Connecting to
the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to the PLC.

CQM1 or C200HS

The 1:1 NT Link can be used. The connection method is exactly the same as
for the 1:1 NT Link. Refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS232C Port or SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port
for details on connecting to the PLC.

221

Device Monitor Function
CPM1, CPM2A, or SRM1

Section 6-13
The 1:1 NT Link can be used in all CPU Units and the 1:N NT Link can also be
used in -V2 and higher versions of the SRM1. The connection method is
exactly the same as for the 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link. With a CPM1, connect
the RS-232C cable to the peripheral port via a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C
Adapter or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
Refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to the PLC.

CPM2C

The 1:1 NT Link can be used. The connection method is the same as for the
NT Link (1:1). Connect to the PLC’s communications connector with a
CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, a CPM1-CIF01 RS232C Adapter, or a CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter.
Refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to the PLC.

CS/CJ-series PLC

The 1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed) can be used. The connection
method is exactly the same as for the 1:N NT Link.
Refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port or SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port for details on connecting to the PLC.

222

Section 6-14

Version Display

6-13-3 Method of Use
The Device Monitor screen is displayed by operating the system menu as
described below.
Ver 4.12

Select Expansion Mode.

Select Device Monitor.
An error message will be displayed if
the wrong communications protocol is
selected.

The Device Monitor screen is displayed.

Reference:

If an error screen is displayed, the System Menu can be displayed from the
error screen by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel
simultaneously. Pressing the OK touch switch on the error screen will return
the display to that immediately before the error occurred, but only if the cause
of the error is removed. If this does not happen, press two of the four corners
of the touch panel to display the System Menu.
For more details on operations of the Device Monitor function, refer to 2-16
Device Monitor Function in the Reference Manual.

6-14 Version Display
Use the Version Display function to check the version of the NT631/NT631C’s
system program. The Version Display screen shows the model, creation date,
and version of the system program installed in the NT631/NT631C.

223

Section 6-14

Version Display

6-14-1 Method of Use
The Version Display screen is displayed by operating the system menu as
described below.
Ver 4.12

Select Expansion Mode.

Select Version Display.

The system program's version information
will be displayed as described below. Press
the Quit touch switch to exit the Version
Display screen and return to the Expansion
Mode screen.
• PT Model:
• System program:
• Version
• Date

PT model number
System program name
System program version
Date program was created.

This screen is an example. Actual screens
will show the information specific to the PT
and system program being used.
After checking the version information, press the Quit touch switch to exit the
Version Display screen and return to the Expansion Mode screen.
Reference:

• The PT model always shows the model number of the ivory model of the
PT. The B suffix will not be displayed, even for black models.
• The system program’s version number is also displayed in the upper-right
corner of the System Menu.
• The creation date does not always match the file date of the system program installed with the System Installer.

224

SECTION 7
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
This section describes the action to take when NT631/NT631C errors occur, and how to carry out maintenance and
inspection to prevent the occurrence of errors.
7-1

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

226

7-2

Responding to Displayed Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

229

7-2-1

Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies . . . . . .

229

7-2-2

Errors Occurring during Operation and Their Remedies. . . . . . . . .

231

7-2-3

Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission .

232

7-2-4

Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies . . . . . . . .

232

7-2-5
7-3
7-4

Communications Errors and Their Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

233

Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

235

7-3-1

Replacing the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

241

Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

242

225

Section 7-1

Troubleshooting

7-1

Troubleshooting
When a fault relating to the operation of the NT631/NT631C occurs, find the
symptoms in the table below and respond by following the corresponding
Remedy indicated in the table.
Note

1. Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or resetting.
2. Do not disassemble the PT for repair or modification.

NT631/NT631C
Symptoms
Power LED fails to come
ON

Cause
Power is not being supplied.

Power supply fuse has blown.
Nothing is displayed on the Screen No. 0 has been read at the
screen.
host side.

Cannot communicate with
the Support Tool

Cannot communicate with
the host
Cannot switch from the
system initializing screen.
Communications error
message is displayed
when communicating to
the host.

The system startup waiting time has
not elapsed yet.
The Transmit mode has not been
established.
Not connected to the Support Tool.
The PT model setting and direct connection setting at the Support Tool do
not match the NT631/NT631C.
Memory switch settings do not match.

Remedy
Check the connections and make sure that power is
supplied correctly. (3-1-3 Power Supply Connection,
page 33)
Contact your OMRON service center.
This is not an error. Change the screen number from
screen number 0. (Setting the screen number to 0
turns the screen off.)
This is not an error. The display will appear after the
waiting time has elapsed.
Display the System Menu and select the Transmit
mode. (6-6 Transmitting the Screen Data)
Check the installation of the connector cable. (3-2
Connecting to the Support Tool)
Using the PT Configuration settings of the Support
Tool, set the PT model and direct connection settings
that match the NT631/NT631C.
Check the communications setting in the Memory
Switch menu of the Maintenance mode, and match
the communications protocol settings for the host and
NT631/NT631C. (6-7 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches)

NT631/NT631C and host are not cor- Check that the type, length, and installation of the
rectly connected.
connector cable match the specifications. (SECTION
4 Connecting to the Host from the RS-232C Port, and
SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS422A/485 Port)
In an RS-422A/485 connection, the
terminator setting is incorrect.

The buzzer has sounded
and the RUN LED is OFF.

The touch panel does not
respond.

The PLC mode has
changed to the monitor
mode.

226

Make the NT631/NT631C and PLC termination resistance settings correctly. (SECTION 4 Connecting to
the Host from the RS-232C Port, and SECTION 5
Connecting to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port)
In an NT link (1:N) connection, there Make the settings again so that there is no duplicais duplication in the unit numbers.
tion. (6-7-4 Setting the NT Link (1:N) Method (Standard/High-speed), page 158)
The power to the NT631/NT631C, NT- Check the power supply.
AL001 or host is OFF.
Malfunction due to external noise
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.
The NT631/NT631 has developed
Contact your OMRON service center.
trouble.
Malfunction due to external noise

Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.

The touch panel is broken.

Test the touch panel with I/O Check in the MAINTENANCE MODE menu. If there is an error, contact
your OMRON service center.

The NT631/NT631C changes the
mode when Host Link communications are used.

This is an NT631/NT631C specification. When using
a PLC that can also be connected using the NT link
method, use an NT link connection (there is no mode
change with the NT link method).

Section 7-1

Troubleshooting
NT631/NT631C
Cause
Symptoms
The graph display does not One of the percentage display setchange.
tings — −100%, 0%, or 100% — is
incorrect.
The trend graph display
does not agree with the
actual time axis.

The cycle for graph display update
processing is longer than the set
sampling cycle.

The Programming Console The communications settings are
function cannot be used.
incorrect.

The Device Monitor function cannot be used.

Remedy
Set the −100%, 0%, and 100% values in the following
relationship:
−100% value < 0% value < 100% value
Delete other elements on the same screen as the
trend graph that are allocated to the host and have a
high update frequency. Or lengthen the sampling
cycle.
Set the communications method as follows when
using the Programming Console function.
• With C-series PLC: 1:1 NT Link
• With CS/CJ-series PLC:
1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)

A Programming Console is connected.

It is not possible to use a Programming Console and
the Programming Console function at the same time.
Disconnect the Programming Console.

The PLC does not support the Programming Console function.

Not all PLCs support the Programming Console function. Check the model of PLC you are using. (6-12
Programming Console Function)

The system program for other vendor’s PLCs has been installed. (PLC
models other than OMRON.)
The communications settings are not
correct.

The Programming Console function can be used only
when the system program for OMRON PLCs is
installed. Install the correct system program.
Set the communications method as follows when
using the Device Monitor function.
• With C-series PLCs: 1:1 NT Link or 1:N NT Link
• With CS/CJ-series PLCs:
1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)

The PLC does not support the Device Not all PLCs support the Device Monitor function.
Monitor function.
Check the model of PLC you are using. Refer to 6-13
Device Monitor Function for details.
The system program installed in the
PT is for a PLC maker other than
OMRON.
The memory table display
contents differ from the initial value set at the Support Tool.

Since the memory table is allocated
to the host memory, the display is
updated in accordance with the contents of the host memory.

The Device Monitor function can be used only when
the PT is connected to a PT with the system program
for OMRON PLCs installed. Install a system program
that supports the Device Monitor function.
When the contents of the memory table are set as a
fixed value, do not allocate the memory table to the
host.

The battery voltage has dropped and
the data in the memory table has
been destroyed.
Since ON is set for the resume function, the initial values of the screen
data memory are not written to the
memory tables.

Replace the battery and execute memory table initialization. (7-3-1 Replacing the Battery, page 241, and
6-4-5 Initializing the Memory Tables, page 141)
Execute memory table initialization. (6-4-5 Initializing
the Memory Tables, page 141)
If the resume function does not need to be used, use
the NT631/NT631C with the resume function OFF.
(6-9-10 Setting the Resume Function, page 177)

The numeral memory table is specified as the destination for a mathematical table’s results.

Calculations are executed continuously while the PT
is operating and the calculation results are automatically written to the memory table. Specify another
numeral memory table or a word in the host.

227

Section 7-1

Troubleshooting
NT631/NT631C
Symptoms
Updating of numeric values and text is delayed.

Cause
Malfunction due to external noise
There are too many numeral/text displays on the displayed screen.
The cycle time is extended due to
heavy processing at the host.

Some of the elements
arranged on a normal
screen are not displayed.

In an RS-422A/485 connection, there
is illegal branching or an erroneous
terminator setting.
The quantity of read data exceeds the
stipulated restriction.

The total of the element coefficients
for the displayed screen is greater
than 1024.
On an overlapping screen, Since the data is transmitted from the
some of the set elements host in screen units, the number of
are not displayed.
elements on the overlapping screen
has exceeded the maximum permissible without being checked by the
Support Tool.
The System Menu cannot Display System Menu under Change
be called up.
System Settings in the System
Installer mode is set to Disabled.
The following System
Screen Memory Protect under
Menu operations are not
Change System Setting in the Syspossible.
tem Installer mode is set to Disabled.
- Establishing the Transmit Screen Memory Protect has been set
mode
to Disabled because the PT power
supply was turned OFF during dele- Displaying the memory
tion of screen data.
switch setting screens
- Screen data memory
check
- Displaying the initialization menu
- Displaying the calendar/
time setting screen
Cannot input numeric val- The upper/lower (max./min.) limit
ues
check for numeric value input is in
effect.

The display is too faint.
Cannot input numeric values/character strings.

Window screen does not
open

The contrast is too high.
Bit 5 of the PT status control area
(numeral/character string input) is set
to 1 (ON).
The interlock function is set for the
input field and the controlling interlock
bit is OFF.
Bit 6 of the PT status control area (PT
window opening) is set to 1 (ON).

Remedy
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.
Reduce the number of numeral/text displays on the
screen for which updating is delayed.
Shorten the host cycle time.
Wire correctly by referring to SECTION 5 Connecting
to the Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
Check the maximum number of elements by referring
to Display Restrictions in Appendix A of the Reference Manual, creating the screen data again, and
transmitting all of the screen data in a batch to the
NT631/NT631C.
Check the maximum number of elements by referring
to Display Restrictions in Appendix A of the Reference Manual, creating the screen data again, and
then sending all the screen data in a batch to the
NT631/NT631C.
In the System Installer mode, set Display System
Menu to Enabled (page 147).
In the System Installer mode, set Screen Memory
Protect to Enabled (page 147).
Do not turn the PT power OFF during deletion of
screen data.
In the System Installer mode, first change the setting
for Screen Memory Protect to Enabled, then repeat
the screen data delete operation (page 148)

Check the screen data’s upper/lower (max./min.) limit
check setting for numeric value input, and correct it if
necessary. Refer to 2-12 Inputting Numeric Values in
the Reference Manual for details.
Reduce the contrast (page 187).
Set bit 5 to 0 (OFF). Refer to 2-2-1 PT Status Control
Area (Host ↔ PT) in the Reference Manual for
details.
Inputs are prohibited in input fields when the corresponding interlock bit is OFF. Check the status of the
corresponding interlock bit and turn it ON.
Set bit 6 to 0 (OFF). Refer to 2-2-1 PT Status Control
Area (Host ↔ PT) in the Reference Manual for
details.

Cannot switch screens
with touch switches

Bit 4 of the PT status control area (PT Set bit 4 to 0 (OFF). Refer to 2-2-1 PT Status Control
screen switching) is set to 1 (ON).
Area (Host ↔ PT) in the Reference Manual for
details.

Touch switch does not
work. (Buzzer sounds.)

The interlock function is set for the
Touch switches are disabled when the corresponding
touch switch and the controlling inter- interlock bit is OFF. Check the status of the correlock bit is OFF.
sponding interlock bit and turn it ON.

228

Section 7-2

Responding to Displayed Error Messages
NT631/NT631C
Symptoms
The display is dim.

Insufficient contrast or brightness

The display is too faint.

Backlight defective, or its life has
expired
The contrast is too high.

The digits in numeral display come out as *.

7-2

Cause

The number of digits of a numeric
value in a numeral memory table
exceeds the set number.

Remedy
Increase the contrast/brightness (pages 187 and
189).
Replace the backlight (page 235).
Reduce the contrast (page 187).
• Confirm the values of the PLC words allocated to
the numeral memory table.
• Allocate one PLC word to each numeral memory
table.

Responding to Displayed Error Messages
When the NT631/NT631C displays an error message, find the corresponding
symptoms in the appropriate table below and respond by following the Remedy indicated in the table.
For details of the error messages displayed when using Memory Unit and corrective action to take for them, refer to 3-5 Using a Memory Unit.

7-2-1

Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies
The table below shows the errors that can occur when the power to the
NT631/NT631C is turned ON and when operation starts, and their remedies.

Message
[No Comm. Protocol]
Set the comm. Protocol by MAINTENANCE MODE.

Cause
No communications protocol has
been set.
Communications protocol and
screen data type are mismatched

Remedy
Using the memory switches, set the communications method to be used for communications with the host. (6-7 Setting
Conditions for Communications with Host
by Using Memory Switches)

[Screen Data Error]
Screen Data corrupted.
Initialize Screen Memory, and download
Screen Data again.

- The power was switched OFF
during screen data initialization,
checking, or transmission.
- Transmission of screen data
was interrupted.
- Illegal data has been written to
the screen data memory.
No screen data is registered.

Initialize the screen data memory by operation at the System Menu, then re-transmit
the screen data. (6-4-1 Clearing Screen
Data, page 135)
If the problem persists, contact your
OMRON service center.

[No Screen Data]
No Screen Data is saved in Screen Memory.
Download Screen Data using by the Support Tool.
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT
MODE, and download Screen Data
again.
[No Direct Connection Info.]
Allocated words have not been set
for the PT status control area and
No Direct Connection Information is set
PT status notify area.
in Screen Data.
Set Direct Connecting Information in
Screen Data using by the Support Tool.
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT
MODE and download Screen Data again.
[Incorrect Screen Data]
Screen Data in Screen Memory do not
match with the System Program.
Initialize Screen Memory, and download
Screen Data again.

Transmit screen data from the Support
Tool.

Allocate words for the PT status control
area and PT status notify area with the
Support Tool and then transmit the direct
connection information to the NT631/
NT631C.

The type of registered screen data Initialize the screen data memory, then
does not match that at the NT631/ transmit the correct screen data. (6-4-1
NT631C.
Clearing Screen Data, page 135)

229

Responding to Displayed Error Messages
Message
[No Starting Screen]
Specified Starting Screen is not saved.
Fix Screen Data using by the Support
Tool.
Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT
MODE and download Screen Data again.
[Touch Panel is disconnected]

[Memory Switch Corrupted]
Because Memory Switch setting was
last. Initialized Memory Switch setting.
Press Confirm to return to the SYSTEM
MENU.

Cause
No data is registered for either the
screen number set in the PT status control area or the Initial
Screen set with the Support Tool.
Or the screen number which does
not exist are registered.

Section 7-2
Remedy
Either specify a screen number for which
data is registered at the PT status control
area, or set the screen as the Initial
Screen in the System settings under PT
Configuration at the Support Tool.

The touch panel cable (film cable) If this message appears after the backlight
inside the NT631/NT631C is dis- is replaced, reinstall the touch panel propconnected.
erly referring to Replacing the Backlight
(page 236). If the message keeps appearing, contact your OMRON service center.
The memory switches have been Set the memory switches again using the
initialized due to discovery of an
System Menu and the System settings
error in the memory switch setunder PT Configuration at the Support
tings.
Tool. (SECTION 6 System Menu Operation)
If the problem recurs, contact your
OMRON service center.

[Calendar Data Error]
Calendar Data is incorrect.
Set to the MAINTENANCE MODE and
set Calendar Data.

There is an error in the date/time
values due, for example, to low
battery voltage.

[Backup Data Error]
Memory table and History data was initialized by backup failure.
It can be caused by lowered voltage of
the battery.

Check the battery voltage by checking the
Initialization has been executed
because of an error in the backup color of the RUN LED and with the battery
check in the System Menu; if the voltage is
data area.
low, replace the battery with a new one.
(Checking the Battery Voltage, page 208,
and 7-3-1 Replacing the Battery,
page 241)
The re-transmit the memory table data
from the Support Tool.
If the voltage is normal and the problem
recurs, contact your OMRON service center.
Protocol settings for serial port A Refer to Possible Combinations of Comand serial port B are mismatched. munications Method Settings on page 154
and set the protocol of serial port A and
serial port B so that their settings are
matched.
* Set serial port A to None when connecting the Support Tool and the host at the
same time.

[With memory switch setting screen]
Invalid Comm. Method

230

Check the battery voltage by checking the
color of the RUN LED and with the battery
check in the System Menu; if the voltage is
low, replace the battery with a new one.
(Checking the Battery Voltage, page 208,
and 7-3-1 Replacing the Battery,
page 241)
If the battery voltage is confirmed to be
normal, set the calendar clock correctly
from the System Menu. (6-11-2 Displaying/Setting the Calendar and Clock,
page 191)

Section 7-2

Responding to Displayed Error Messages

7-2-2

Errors Occurring during Operation and Their Remedies
The table below shows the errors that can occur during operation of the
NT631/NT631C and their remedies.

Message
[Address Setting Error]
Addressing Error exists in the
Screen.
Correct address setting by the
Support Tool.

Cause
Remedy
The host side allocated words and Set correct words and bits after checking the area
bits set with the Support Tool are used at the host side by referring to PLC Memory
incorrect.
Map in Appendix D of the Reference Manual or
the Operating Manual for the PLC being used.

[Memory Table No. Error]
Memory table No. is out of limit.
Correct the table No. by the Support Tool.

The memory table number set
with the Support Tool is outside
the range for the number of memory tables set in the system memory.

Either increase the number of memory tables in
the System settings under PT Configuration at
the Support Tool, or set the memory table number
again within the established range.

[Programming Console Error]
Setting of Programming Console
Function is inadequate. It can be
caused by:
• This PLC does not support Programming Console Function.
• Protocol mismatch. Set the PLC
to NT Link.
• “PROGRAMMING CONSOLE” is
connected to PLC.

The communications settings are
incorrect.

Set the communications method/communications port as follows when using the Programming
Console function.
• With C-series PLCs: 1:1 NT Link
• With CS/CJ-series PLCs:
1:N NT Link (standard or high-speed)

The PLC used does not support
the Programming Console function.

Not all PLCs support the Programming Console
function. Check the model of the PLC you are
using. (6-12 Programming Console Function)

A Programming Console is connected.

It is not possible to use a Programming Console
and the Programming Console function at the
same time. Disconnect the Programming Console.
[Programming Console Error]
The connecting cable is defective. Check the cable connection and perform a conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the cable.
Programming Console Function
does not RUN. It can be caused
Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
by:
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding,
page 34.
• Connecting cable is faulty.
It is not possible to use a Programming Console
• “PROGRAMMING CONSOLE” is A Programming Console is connected.
and the Programming Console function at the
connected to PLC.
same time. Disconnect the Programming Con• Protocol mismatch between the
sole.
PT and PLC. Set the PLC to NT
Link.
The communications conditions at Set the communications conditions at the PLC to
the PLC have been changed in
match the conditions set in the System Menu.
accordance with the NT631/
NT631C Programming Console
function.

231

Section 7-2

Responding to Displayed Error Messages

7-2-3

Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission
The table below shows the errors that can occur when the NT631/NT631C
data is initialized, and during data setting and transmission, and their remedies.

Message
[Flash Memory Error]
Flash Memory I/O Error.
If this happens frequently, Flash
Memory may be broken.
Press Reset Switch to restart.

Cause
There is a hardware fault, or the
flash memory (memory for storing
screen data) has reached the end
of its service life.

Remedy
If the same message is displayed even after
clearing the screen data or transmitting screen
data several times, contact your OMRON service
center.

Hardware fault, or system pro[Calendar Data Error]
gram error
Calendar Data is incorrect.
Set to the MAINTENANCE MODE
and set Calendar Data.

[Tool Transmit Error]
∗∗∗∗ Error detected while downloading by the following case:
• faulty connecting cable.
• corrupted data by noise.

Set the calendar clock again from the System
Menu. If the problem recurs, delete the program
in the System Installer mode, then re-install the
program. (6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System
Program, page 145)
If this does not solve the problem, contact your
OMRON service center.
The connecting cable is defective. Check the cable connection and perform a conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the cable.
(Appendix F Making the Cable for Connecting a
PLC)
Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding,
page 34.
Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding,
page 34.

[Tool Transmit Error]
Check Sum Error occurs while
downloading by the following
case:
• corrupted data by noise.
The connecting cable is defective. Check the cable connection and perform a con[Tool Transmit Error]
ductivity test. If there is a fault, replace the cable.
Time-out Error occurs while downloading by the following case:
• faulty connecting cable.
[Tool Transmit Error]
Reception was failed by Buffer
Over Flow Error.

7-2-4

The receive buffer has overflowed. Retransmit the data from the Support Tool.

Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies
This section describes the errors that may occur in the System Installer mode
of the NT631/NT631C, and the remedies for these errors.
Message

System Program not exist or
incorrect.

Cause

- The system program has not
been installed.
- The system program has been
deleted due to a hardware fault,
or because the flash memory
(memory for storing the system
program) has reached its life.
Unable to erase System Program. Hardware fault, or flash memory
(memory for storing the system
program) has reached its life.

232

Remedy
Select Download System Program and download
the system program (6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the
System Program, page 145)
If this does not solve the problem, contact your
OMRON service center.

If the same message is displayed on repeating
selection of Download System Program and
attempting to delete the system program several
times, contact your OMRON service center (6-5-2
Clearing/Installing the System Program,
page 145)

Section 7-2

Responding to Displayed Error Messages
Message
Unable to download System Program.

Cause
- A communications error
occurred during downloading of
the system program.
- Illegal data has been written
into the screen data memory.
- Hardware fault, or flash memory
(memory for storing the system
program) has reached its life.

Unable to write System Settings.

Hardware fault, or flash memory
(memory for storing the system
program) has reached its life.

Unable to erase Screen Data.

Hardware fault, or flash memory
(memory for storing the system
program) has reached its life.

7-2-5

Remedy
Select Download System Program and download
the system program again (6-5-2 Clearing/Installing the System Program, page 145)
Also refer to 7-2-3 Errors Occurring on Screen
Data Initialization and Transmission (page 232),
and take the corrective action described for tool
transmission errors.
If this does not solve the problem, contact your
OMRON service center.
If the same message is displayed on repeating
writing of system settings several times, contact
your OMRON service center.
If writing is normally terminated after the error
message was once displayed, the Memory
Switch setting for system program may have been
altered. In such a case, check and reset the setting in the Memory Switch menu of the Maintenance mode.
If the same message is displayed on repeating
screen data deletion several times, contact your
OMRON service center.

Communications Errors and Their Remedies
This section describes the errors relating to communications that can occur
during operation, and their remedies.

Operation When a
Communications Error
Occurs

When a communications error occurs, the error message is displayed at the
NT631/NT631C, and the buzzer sounds, provided the setting made for Buzzer
Sound in the System Menu is other than OFF. An error message is displayed
provided the setting for the Comm. Auto-Return memory switch is not ON
(note that some error messages are displayed even if the setting is ON).

Operation When
Communications Errors
Occur

When an error message is displayed, after removing the cause of the error,
press the OK touch switch displayed on the screen. The NT631/NT631C will
return to the screen that was displayed before the error occurred, and operation will restart.

Display of
Communications Errors

For communications errors, the name of the port at which the error occurred,
the error classification (send or receive error), the details of the error, the
probable cause, and the remedy, are displayed as shown below.
Example:
Parity error at serial port A

Receive Errors
The following errors can occur when receiving data.
• Parity error
• Framing error

233

Section 7-2

Responding to Displayed Error Messages
• Overrun error
• FCS (sum value) error
• Time out error
• Data over flow error
• PLC unit No. error (Host Link only)

• NAK received (in the case of the Host Link, the end code is also displayed)
• Undefined command error
Send Errors
The following errors can occur when receiving data.
• Time out error
• Data over flow error
Probable Causes and
Remedies
Error Details
Parity Error
Framing Error
Over-run Error

FCS (Check Sum) Error

Time-out Error

The remedies to take in accordance with the displayed cause are indicated in
the table below.
Displayed Probable Cause
Communications parameters/
conditions set incorrectly.
The connecting cables are not connected correctly.

Noise caused data corruption during
communications.
Noise caused data corruption during
communications.
The PLC is transmitting incorrect
data.
The connecting cables are not connected correctly. (Send/Receive)

The communications service of the
host is stopped. (Send/Receive)
Time-out Interval is too short. (Send)
Time-out Interval is too short.
(Receive)

PLC Unit No. Error

Check the communications cable connection and
perform a conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace
the cable. For details on communications cables,
refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the
RS-232C Port, and SECTION 5 Connecting to the
Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
Check that the host is capable of communicating with
the NT631/NT631C (confirm that the communications settings of the host and NT631/NT631C match).
Set a longer value for Time-out Interval at the host
side.
Set a longer value for Time-out Interval in the System
Menu. (6-9-12 Setting the Time-out Interval,
page 181) It may also be possible to solve the problem by shortening the host cycle time.

The unit # does not match that set on Re-set the unit number at the host side to 0.
the PLC.
Noise caused data corruption during
communications.

234

Remedy
Check if the settings at the host for parity bit, frame
length, communications speed, stop bit length and
flow control agree with those at the NT631/NT631C.
Check the communications cable connection and
perform a conductivity test. If there is a fault, replace
the cable. For details on communications cables,
refer to SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the
RS-232C Port, and SECTION 5 Connecting to the
Host from the RS-422A/485 Port.
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.
Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.
Check the operation at the host side.

Carry out grounding work in accordance with the
conditions by referring to 3-1-4 Grounding, page 34.

Section 7-3

Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
Error Details
NAK received

Displayed Probable Cause

Remedy
Check the settings for allocated words and bits.
If noise is a possible factor, distance the cable from
sources of noise and insert a noise filter in the power
supply line.
If using the equipment in a location subject to a lot of
noise, use a cable with a high degree of protection
against noise for the transmission route. Also make
the cable as short as possible.

Undefined Command Error The host is not supported.
Instruction level 3 is not effective.

Check the PLC model used for the host.
Check that the instruction level setting for the host is
level 1, 2, 3.
Set flow control method in the host.
Increase transmission interval.

Data Over Flow Error

7-3

——

Communications command from the
host is too long.
(With memory link)
Command transmission to the host is Check the communications cable.
not possible.
Check the control method at the PT and the host.
Increase the communications on speed when it to
slow.

Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
Carry out maintenance work in order to ensure that the NT631/NT631C is
always used in its optimum condition.

WARNING
Do not attempt to take the unit apart and do not touch any
internal parts while the power is being supplied. Doing either
of these may result in electrical shock.

Spare PT

It is advisable to have a spare NT631/NT631C available to minimize system
downtime in the event of an NT631/NT631C failure or if the screen display
becomes difficult to read due to deterioration of the display unit.

Backlight (for NT631CST141@-EV2/ST151@-EV2
only)

When the backlight in the display is getting dim and the screen cannot be read
easily, replace the backlight. The backlight can be replaced at the rear of the
NT631C-ST141@-EV2/ST151@-EV2 while it is mounted in an operation
panel. The backlight for NT631C-ST152@-EV2 and NT631C-ST153@-V3
cannot be replaced by the user. Contact your OMRON service center when
the backlight needs to be replaced.
Replaceable Backlight Model
NT631C-CFL01 (for NT631C-ST151@-EV2)
The backlight for the NT631C-ST152@-EV2/ST153@-EV3 cannot be replaced by the user. Contact your OMRON service center when the battery
needs to be replaced.
NT631C-CFL02 (for NT631C-ST141@-EV2)
Guide to Backlight Replacement
Use the following as a guide to backlight replacement.
NT631C-ST141@-EV2: Approx. 25,000 hours
NT631C-ST151@-EV2: Approx. 30,000 hours

235

Section 7-3

Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C

The life of the backlight varies, particularly in accordance with the temperature
in the environment in which it is used. It should be replaced when it becomes
dim and the screen becomes hard to read.
The life expectancy of the backlight for the NT631C-ST152@-EV2/ST153@EV3 at high brightness is 50,000 hours. The backlight cannot be replaced by
the user, however. Contact your OMRON service center when the backlight
needs to be replaced.
Notes on Replacing the
Backlight

Pay attention to the following points when replacing the backlight.
• Carry out the replacement work in a location where there is no danger
that dust or foreign bodies will enter the Unit, and where no water will drip
onto it.
Do not touch the printed circuit boards of the NT631C-ST141@-EV2/
ST151@-EV2 with your bare hands.
Also, discharge the static electricity from your body before starting the
work.
• Do not carry the Backlight Unit by holding only its cable, or pull on the
cable. Do not subject the backlight to excessive force or shock.
• Do not disassemble the product to repair or modify it.

Replacing the Backlight

Use the following procedure to replace the backlight.

WARNING
Switch OFF the NT631C-ST141@-EV2/ST151@-EV2 power
before replacing the backlight. Otherwise you could sustain
an electric shock.

Replace the backlight by following the procedure given below:

NT631C-CFL01 (for NT631C-ST151@-EV2)
Procedure
1,2,3...

1. Turn the power supply to the PT OFF.
Be sure to do so to avoid an electric shock.
2. Disconnect the terminal block wiring, the communications cable, and the
printer cable. If a Memory Unit or Interface Unit is mounted, remove that
Unit also.
3. Loosen four screws at corners on the rear face of the NT631C, and remove
the rear case.
Be careful not to lose these screws.
From this step on, exert added care not to touch any electronic parts or
printed circuit boards inside the Unit. Otherwise the PT may sustain static
damage.
4. Disengage two backlight connectors at the top and the bottom, and pull out
the touch panel cable.

236

Section 7-3

Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C

Removing and Fitting The Touch Panel Cable
Removing The Touch Panel Cable:
Pull the arrow-marked sections up to the cable side to unlock the connector,
and remove the cable.

Fitting The Touch Panel Cable:
While unlocking the connector, insert the touch panel cable fully. Then, lock
the connector.
Locked

Unlocked

Not locked
completely

5. Loosen two mounting screws, and remove the backlight.
When loosening or tightening screws for backlights, be sure to use a magnetized Phillips screwdriver. If any screw falls inside the Unit, it must be extricated without fail.

6. Fit new backlights.
The backlight for the top is different from that for the bottom.
Each backlight has three projections. Slot these projections into slits on the
Unit, and tighten the screws while lightly holding the backlight by fingers.
Make sure that the cable does not come out of the backlight. If it comes
out, put it in the backlight and then tighten the screws.
The tightening torque must be 0.2 N·m.

237

Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C

Section 7-3

7. Engage backlight connectors at the top and the bottom respectively in
place. The backlight cable has a polarity; refer to the figure below.

8. Fit the touch panel cable. Be sure to lock the connector as in step 4 after
fitting.
9. Close the rear case, and tighten four screws. Make sure that the internal
cable is not trapped.
10. Reconnect the wiring, cables, and Units disconnected in 2, and tighten the
screws at a torque of 0.4 N·m.
Turn the power on, and check that the RUN LED is not flashing and that no
buzzer is sounding.
If the RUN LED flashes at 1-s intervals and a buzzer sounds intermittently,
the touch panel cable is disconnected. Follow the above steps from 1, and
check the lock status of the connector.
11. Before starting normal operation, confirm that the following tests can be
executed correctly by using the I/O check in the Maintenance menu. Also
perform a communications test with the host.
• Touch switch
• Backlight
12. On confirming that all the tests in 11 can be executed normally, start operation.

238

Section 7-3

Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C
NT631C-CFL02 (for NT631C-ST141@-EV2)
Procedure
1,2,3...

Removing and Fitting The Touch Panel Cable
Removing The Touch Panel Cable:
Pull the arrow-marked sections up to the cable side to unlock the connector,
and remove the cable.

Fitting The Touch Panel Cable:
While unlocking the connector, insert the touch panel cable fully. Then, lock
the connector.
Locked

Unlocked

Not locked
completely

5. Loosen mounting screws, and remove backlights.
Shift the backlight to the right, and pull it out.
When loosening or tightening screws for backlights, be sure to use a magnetized Phillips screwdriver. If any screw falls inside the Unit, it must be extricated without fail.

239

Section 7-3

Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C

6. Fit new backlights.
The backlight for the top is different from that for the bottom.
Fit projections and dents of the backlight with those on the fixture, and shift
the backlight to the left. Check that the backlight is in contact with the left
end of the fixture and the cable comes out from the notch without being
trapped.
When the backlight is correctly fit, tighten the screws at a torque of
0.1 N·m.
Top part

Fixture

Backlight fixture on the PT
Cable

Mounting screw

Backlight

Backlight
Bottom part
Backlight fixture on the PT

Cable
Backlight

Mounting screw

Fixture
Backlight

7. Engage backlight connectors at the top and the bottom respectively in
place. The backlight cable has a polarity; refer to the figure below.
White

Red

White

8. Fit two touch panel cables at the top. Be sure to lock the connectors as in
step 4 after fitting.
9. Close the rear case, and tighten four screws. Make sure that the internal
cable is not trapped.

240

Maintenance of the NT631/NT631C

Section 7-3

10. Reconnect the wiring, cables, and Units disconnected in 2, and tighten the
screws at a torque of 0.4 N·m.
Turn the power on, and check that the RUN LED is not flashing and that no
buzzer is sounding.
If the RUN LED flashes at 1-s intervals and a buzzer sounds intermittently,
the touch panel cable is disconnected. Follow the above steps from 1, and
check the lock status of the connector.
11. Before starting normal operation, confirm that the following tests can be
executed correctly by using the I/O check in the Maintenance menu. Also
perform a communications test with the host.
• Touch switch
• Backlight
12. On confirming that all the tests in 11 can be executed normally, start operation.

7-3-1

Replacing the Battery
The NT631/NT631C uses a lithium battery to back up the memory contents.
The battery life is about 5 years if the NT631/NT631C is used in a location
where the ambient temperature is 25°C. If the temperature at the location of
use is higher than this, the battery life will be shorter. Change the battery at
suitable intervals in accordance with the operating environment of the NT631/
NT631C.
It is advisable to keep a spare battery so that the battery can be replaced
immediately when replacement becomes necessary.
Battery Type
3G2A9-BAT08 (for both NT631 and NT631C)
Guide to Replacement
Replace the Battery in the following cases.
If the power supply to the PT is left turned OFF after a low battery voltage has
been detected, the memory backed up by the battery may be corrupted.
Replace the Battery within 5 minutes of turning OFF the power supply to the
PT.
• When 5 years have passed since the installation of a new battery.
• When the RUN LED is lit in orange (during operation) or in red (when
stopped).
• When the message The voltage is lowered. is displayed on switching on
the power or resetting the NT631/NT631C.
• When The voltage is lowered is displayed in the Battery check in the battery check menu of the Maintenance mode.
Battery Replacement Method
Replace the battery by following the procedure given below.
To protect the contents of the memory, the battery must be replaced within 5
minutes.

Procedure
1,2,3...

1. Keep the power ON for at least 5 minutes and then turn it OFF.

241

Section 7-4

Inspection and Cleaning
Reference:

Unless the power is kept ON for at least 5 minutes, the memory contents
cannot be retained for more than 5 minutes without a battery.
2. Insert a flat blade screwdriver at the top of the battery cover located at the
left of the rear face of the NT631/NT631C and pull it toward you.

3. Remove the battery that is secured under the battery cover, grip the cable,
and pull the connector straight out.

4. Insert the connector of the new battery into the connector on the NT631/
NT631C and fit the battery under the battery cover.
When inserting the battery connector, make sure that the projection on it
faces to the left, and press it fully home while keeping it straight.
The connector of the new battery must be connected within 5 minutes after
disconnecting the old battery’s connector. However, the battery can be replaced while the NT631/NT631C power is on, and in this case there is no
time restriction.

5. Close the battery cover, making sure that the cable is not trapped.

7-4

Inspection and Cleaning
Clean and inspect the NT631/NT631C regularly to ensure that it is always
used in its optimum condition.

Cleaning Method

If the display is dirty the screen is difficult to see. Clean the screen from time
to time as follows.
• In daily cleaning, wipe the display with a soft dry cloth. If the soiling is particularly heavy, attempting to remove it by wiping with a dry cloth may
damage the front sheet of the Unit. In this case, wipe with a damp cloth.
• If the soiling cannot be removed with a dry cloth, wet the cloth with diluted
neutral detergent (2%), wring it out well and wipe the display with it.
• If rubber or vinyl products, tape, etc., are left stuck to the display for long
periods they will cause staining. If such items are stuck to the display,
remove them during cleaning.
Note

242

Never use volatile solvents such as benzene or thinners, or chemical dusters.

Section 7-4

Inspection and Cleaning
Inspection Method

In normal environments, inspect the NT631/NT631C at intervals of between 6
months and a year. In environments that are extremely hot and humid, or very
dusty environments, shorten the inspection interval.
Items Required for The Inspection
Prepare the following items before starting the inspection.
• Screwdrivers (Phillips, flat head)
• Tester (or digital voltmeter)
• Industrial alcohol
• 100% cotton cloth
• Hygrometer (required in some cases)
• Thermometer (required in some cases)
• Synchroscope (required in some cases)
• Pen-writing oscilloscope (required in some cases)
Points Inspected
Inspect the following points to determine if there is any divergence from the
stated criteria. If there is, either improve the surrounding environment so that
the values fall within the stated range, or adjust the NT631/NT631C, for example by re-tightening screws.

Point
Inspected

Inspection Details

Power supply
voltage

Fluctuation in power supply terminal
voltage

Ambient environmental conditions

Ambient temperature (temperature in
the operation panel)
Ambient humidity (humidity in the
operation panel)

Presence/absence of dust
Mounting condi- Looseness of mounting brackets, etc.
tions
Connector connections of connecting
cable
Looseness of screws in external wiring
Conditions of external connecting
cables
Components
Brightness of the backlight
with limited lives (NT631C only)

Note

Criterion

Inspection
Instrument

Permissible voltage fluctuation range
20.4 to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC –15% to
+10%)
0 to 50°C

Tester

Thermometer

35% to 85% RH

Hygrometer

Dust must not be settled
To be no looseness

Visual inspection
Phillips screwdriver

To be fully inserted and locked, with no
looseness

Phillips screwdriver

To be no looseness

Phillips screwdriver

Faults such as incipient disconnection

Visual inspection

Must be sufficiently bright.
Visual inspection
Backlight life:
(Under the normal range of ambient temperature and humidity)
NT631C-ST141@-EV2: Approx.
25,000 hours or longer
NT631C-ST151@-EV2: Approx.
30,000 hours or longer
NT631C-ST152@-EV2/ST153@-EV3:
Approx. 50,000 hours or longer
(Brightness setting is not available for
the NT631C-ST151/152@-EV2/
ST153@-EV3 and the backlight cannot be replaced.)

1. Do not disassemble for repairs or modification.

243

Section 7-4

Inspection and Cleaning

2. The disposal of the Unit (including batteries to be disposed and backlight)
may be regulated by national or local authorities. Dispose of them in accordance with the laws and regulations of the relevant country and local authority.
Reference:

• Desire on replacing the NT631/NT631C
• When replacing the NT631/NT631C after discovering a fault during
inspections, note the following points:
• Be sure to switch the power OFF before starting replacement.
• After replacement, check that the new NT631/NT631C is not subject to
the same error.
• If a faulty Unit is returned for repairs, write as detailed a description of the
fault as possible and send this description together with the Unit to the
OMRON address indicated on the back cover of this book.

244

Appendix A
Specifications
General Specifications
Item
NT631-ST211@-EV2

Specifications
NT631C-ST141@-EV2

NT631C-ST153@-EV3

Rated power supply voltage 24 VDC
Allowable power supply
20.4 VDC to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC –15% to +10%)
voltage range
Allowable power interruption time

No regulation

Power consumption
Power starting time

30 W max.
200 ms max.

18 W max.
---

Operating ambient temperature

0 to 50°C

0 to 40°C

Storage ambient tempera- –20 to +60°C*1
ture
Operating ambient humidity 35% to 85% (with no condensation)
Operating environment

No corrosive gases

Noise immunity

Common mode: 1000 Vp-p (between power supply terminals and panel)
Normal mode:
300 Vp-p
Pulse width of 100 ns to 1 µs, pulse rise time of 1 ns
10 to 57 Hz with 0.075-mm 57 to 150 Hz with 9.8 m/s2
single amplitude for 30 min- and 10 to 57 Hz with
utes each in X, Y, and Z
0.075-mm single amplitude for
directions
30 minutes each in X, Y, and Z
directions

Vibration resistance
(operating)

Shock resistance
(operating)
Dimensions

0 to 50°C*1

10% to 90%*1 (with no condensation)
Conforms to IEC61000-4-4.
2 kV (power line)

5 to 9 Hz with 3.5-mm single
amplitude and 9 to 150 Hz
with 9.8 m/s2 acceleration
10 times each in X, Y, and Z
directions (1 octave/min)

147 m/s2 3 times each in X,Y, and Z directions
315 × 250 × 54 (W × H × D) mm
(With Expansion Unit mounted: 315 × 250 × 74 (W × H × D) mm)

Panel cutout dimensions

+0.5
303 +0.5
0 × 238 0 mm
Circle of panel pressure 1.6 to 4.8 mm

Weight

2.5 kg max.

Degree of protection

Front panel: Protection equivalent to oil-proof IP65 (NEMA4). *2
D-type grounding (Ground to 100 Ω or less)

Grounding

*1: Use the NT631C-ST153@-EV3 within the following temperature and humidity ranges.

245

Appendix A

Specifications

Humidity (%)

Storage
Wet bulb temperature (°C)

Operating

Temperature (°C)

*2: The NT631/NT631C may not be used at a location where it is exposed to splashing oil for a long period.

246

Appendix A

Specifications

Performance Specifications
Display Specifications
Item
NT631-ST211@-EV2
Display panel

Display device

EL
(monochrome)

Specification
NT631C-ST141@-EV2
Color STN LCD
(with backlight)

Number of dots (resolution) 640 dots horizontally × 480 dots vertically
5.76 mm
Size of a standard charac- 5.28 mm
ter
Effective display area
211 mm horizontally ×
229 mm horizontally ×
158 mm vertically
172 mm vertically
(10.4 inches)
(11.3 inches)
View angle
(No restriction)
Up/down: ±30°
Left: 55°
Right: 45°

Backlight
(white cold
cathode tube)

Indicators

NT631C-ST153@-EV3
Color TFT high-precision LCD
(with backlight)
5.28 mm
211 mm horizontally ×
158 mm vertically
(10.4 inches)
Up: 35°
Down: 65°
Left: 60°
Right: 60°

Display color

Orange, black
(2 colors)

8 colors (and intermediate colors can be displayed with tiling patterns)

Life expectancy

30,000 hours min. (until 50,000 hours min.
brightness reduced by
(until brightness reduced by 50%)
30%)

Contrast adjustment

(Not provided)

Adjustable in 100 levels (Not provided)
by operation at the
touch panel

Life expectancy

---

25,000 hours min.*1

Replacement

---

Brightness adjustment

(Not provided)

Can be replaced from
Cannot be replaced by
the rear by the user
the user
Adjustable in 3 levels by (Not provided)
touch switch operation
at the touch panel*2

Automatic turn-off function
POWER (green LED)

Can be set to turn off in 1 to 255 minutes, or to remain on
Lit while power is being supplied

RUN

Lit in green: Operating normally, Memory Unit automatic transmission completed
Flashing in green: Memory Unit automatic transmission being executed,
Memory Unit automatic transmission error
Lit in orange: Low battery voltage (during operation)
Lit in red: Low battery voltage (when operation is stopped)

50,000 hours min.*1

*1: Time taken for brightness to reduce to half at normal temperature and humidity
*2: Sharp brightness adjustment is not available.

247

Appendix A

Specifications

Panel Specifications
Item
Touch panel

Specification
Type: Resistive type
Number of switches: 768 (32 horizontally × 24 vertically)
Maximum number that can be registered on one screen: 256
Cell size: NT631-ST211@-EV2
5.9 × 5.9 mm
NT631-ST141@-EV2
6.5 × 6.5 mm
NT631-ST153@-EV3
5.9 × 5.9 mm
Input: Pressure-sensitive type
Operating force: 1 N minimum
Life expectancy: One million operations minimum

External Interface Specifications
Item
Serial communications Serial port A

Serial port B connector*

Specification
Conforms to EIA RS-232C.
D-SUB 9-pin connector (female)
+5 V (250 mA max.) output at pin No. 6

Parallel interface

EIA RS-232C (Serial port B terminal block selectable by memory switch
setting)
D-SUB 9-pin connector (female)
EIA RS-422A/485 (Serial port B connector selectable by memory switch
setting)
Terminal block
Conforms to Centronics standard, 20-pin half pitch connector

Expansion interface

Dedicated connector

Serial port B terminal
block*

* Serial port B is used for either a connector or terminal block.
Note Check that the current capacity of the equipment to be supplied is within 250 mA before using the +5 V
output of pin No. 6.
The +5 V output of the Unit delivers +5 V ± 5% and 250 mA maximum.

248

Appendix A

Specifications

Programming Environment
Item

Specification

Programming System
Programming Tool

Programming support software
Programming support software
NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.@), made by OMRON

Special Features
Item

Specifications

Buzzer

Three kinds of buzzer sound (continuous, short intermittent, and long intermittent)
ON:
On reception of a command from the host, display of a screen with a buzzer
setting, or display of an error screen such as for a receive error.
OFF:
On reception of a command from the host, or display of a screen with no
buzzer setting.
Setting: Set “ON” for “Buzzer Sound” in the memory switch menu, or set “ERROR
ON” for the buzzer to sound only when an error occurs.
The buzzer sounds three times in response to prohibited input.

Touch switch input sound

Touch switches
Input sound: Sounding for 0.2 seconds
Setting: Set “ON” for “Key Press Sound” in the memory switch menu.
- Memory switch setting
- Self-test functions, such as for the memory and external interface
- Setting condition confirmation function
- Communications check function
- Initialization of internal memory data
- Display of display/alarm history data
- Registered data test display function

Maintenance function

Battery backup

Resume function

Screen print function

Calendar and clock function

- Backup of numeral/character string memory table data in the NT631/NT631C
- Backup of display/alarm history data
- Backup of calendar and clock setting
Battery life:
5 years (at 25°C)
When voltage becomes low:
RUN LED lights in orange or red
The communications flag to the PLC (BAT LOW)
comes ON (1).
Retains the contents of the numeral/character string memory tables (i.e., they are not
initialized) when the power is turned ON, when the NT631/NT631C is reset, and when
the operation mode is changed.
Setting: Set “ON” for “Resume Function” in the memory switch menu.
Functions:

- Prints a hard copy of the screen display
- Prints display/alarm histories
Setting:
Set the printing protocol (“Print Controller”) and printing type (“Print
Method”) in the memory switch menu.
“ESC/P”, “Color”:
Color printing conforming to ESC/P 24-J83C
“PC-PR201H”, “Color”: Color printing conforming to PC-PR201PL
“ESC/P”, “Tone”:
Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,
conforming to ESC/P 24-J82
“PC-PR201H”, “Tone”:
Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,
conforming to PC-PR201PL
“PCL 5”, “Tone”:
Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels,
conforming to PCL 5
However, the NT631 supports monochrome printing only.
- Displays the current time in accordance with the built-in clock
- Displayed and set with “Calendar Check” in the “MAINTENANCE MODE” menu

249

Appendix A

Specifications
Item
Programming Console function

Specifications
Executes functions equivalent to those of a C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console
for CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1 (-EV1 only), CQM1H, C200HX/HG/
HE(-Z)E, and SRM1 (C02-V2 only) PLCs.
Executes functions as a Programming Console for CS/CJ-series PLC.

Device Monitor function

Mathematical function

The Device Monitor function can be used to change the PLC’s operating mode, read/
change words in the PLC’s data areas, and display the PLC’s error log. Compatible
PLCs include the CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/
HE(-Z)E, SRM1, and CS/CJ-series PLCs.
Up to 256 calculation expressions can be registered along with the screen data. The
mathematical function reads the required data from numeral memory tables or host
words, executes the registered calculations, and writes the results.
Arithmetic operators, logic operators, bit operators, and comparative operators can be
used.

Transmission
functions

System program
transmission

Downloads the system program from the system installer
Downloads/Upload the system program with a Memory Unit.

Screen data
transmission

- Function for downloading screen data to and uploading screen data from the
Support Tool
- Function for transmitting screen data to and from the Memory Unit.

History data
uploading

Function for uploading display/alarm history data from PT.

Communications Specifications
For a Host Link, RS-232C
Item
Communications standard
Communications settings

Specification
EIA RS-232C

Connector

Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed: 9600, 19200 bps
Data length:
7 bits
Stop bit:
2 bits
Parity:
Even
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A, B)

Number of Units connected
Transmission distance

1:1
Max. 15 m*

Communications protocol

C-series SYSWAY (1:N)

* When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.
• RS-232C cable:

Max. 2 m

• RS-422A cable:

Total length 500 m max.

250

Appendix A

Specifications

For a Host Link, RS-422A
Item
Communications standard
Communications settings

Specification
EIA RS-422A
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:

9600, 19200 bps
7 bits
2 bits
Even

Connector
Number of Units connected

Terminal Block (serial port B)
1:1

Transmission distance
Communications protocol

Max. 500 m
C-series SYSWAY (1:N)

For an NT Link, 1:1, RS-232C
Item

Specification

Communications standard

EIA RS-232C

Connector
Number of Units connected

9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A, B)
1:1

Transmission distance

Max. 15 m*

* When using an NT-AL001, the specifications are as follows.
• RS-232C cable:

Max. 2 m

• RS-422A cable:

Total length 500 m max.

For an NT Link, 1:1, RS-422A
Item

Specification

Communications standard
Connector

EIA RS-422A
Terminal block (serial port B)

Number of Units connected
Transmission distance

1:1
Max. 500 m

For an NT Link, 1:N, RS-232C
Item
Communications standard

Specification
EIA RS-232C

Connector
Number of Units connected

9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A, B)
1:1 to 8

Transmission distance

Max. 15 m*

* To connect two or more PTs, NT-AL001 Adapters are required. When using an NT-AL001, the specifications
are as follows.
• RS-232C cable:

Max. 2 m

• RS-422A/485 cable:

Total length 500 m max.

251

Appendix A

Specifications

For an NT Link, 1:N, RS-422A/485
Item
Communications standard

Specification
EIA RS-422A/485

Connector
Number of Units connected

Terminal block
1:1 to 8

Transmission distance

Max. 500 m

For a High-speed NT Link, 1:N, RS-232C
Item

Specification

Communications standard
Connector

EIA RS-232C
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A, B)

Number of Units connected
Transmission distance

1:1 to 8
Max. 15 m*

* To connect two or more PTs, NT-AL001 Adapters are required. When using an NT-AL001, the specifications
are as follows.
• RS-232C cable: Max. 2 m
• RS-422A/485 cable: Total length 500 m max.

For a High-speed NT Link, 1:N, RS-422A/485
Item
Communications standard

Specification
EIA RS-422A/485

Connector
Number of Units connected

Terminal block (serial port B)
1:1 to 8

Transmission distance

Max. 500 m

For a Memory Link, RS-232C
Item
Communications standard
Communications settings

Specification
EIA RS-232C
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
Flow control:
Response:

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400bps
7, 8 bits
1, 2 bits
None, even, odd
None, RS/CS, XON/XOFF
Presence/absence

Connector
Number of Units connected

9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A, B)
1:1

Transmission distance
Communications protocol

Max. 15 m*
Memory link

* When using NT-AL001, specification is as follows:
• RS-232C:

Max. 2 m

• RS-422A:

Max. total length 500 m

252

Appendix A

Specifications

For a Memory Link, RS-422A
Item
Communications standard
Communications settings

Specification
EIA RS-422A

Connector

Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed:
Data length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
Flow control:
Response:
Terminal block

Number of Units connected
Transmission distance

1:1
Max. 500 m*

Communications protocol

Memory link

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bps
7, 8 bits
1, 2 bits
None, even, odd
None, XON/XOFF
Presence/absence

For a Bar Code Reader
Item
Communications standard
Communications settings

Specification

Connector

EIA RS-232C
Start-stop synchronization
Communications speed: 4,800, 9600, 19200 bps
Data length:
7, 8 bits
Stop bit:
1, 2 bits
Parity:
None, even, odd
Flow control:
RS/CS
9-pin D-SUB connector (female) (serial port A)

Number of Units connected
Transmission distance

1:1
Max. 15 m

Communications protocol
Data format

Non-protocol mode

[STX]

Data (0 to 40 bytes)

[ETX]

253

Specifications

254

Appendix A

Appendix B
Dimensions
Body
302.5 (11.91)

POWER

RUN

237.5 (9.35)

250 (9.84)

7.5 (0.30)
315 (12.40)

Units: mm (inch)

54 (2.13)

With memory unit
installed (NT-MF261)

237.5 (9.35)

7.5 (0.30)
74 (2.91)

255

Appendix B

Dimensions

Mounting Dimensions
Mounting panel
Mounting fixture

POWER

RUN

140 (5.51)

259 (10.20)

15.5 (0.61)
240 (9.45)

7.5 (0.30)
34
(1.34) (min.)
38 (1.5) (max.)

Units: mm (inch)
324 (12.76)

256

Appendix B

Dimensions

Cable Connection Dimensions (with NT-MF261)
35 (1.38)

96 (3.78)

RESET
RDA
TRM
RDB
SDA

91 (3.58)

SDB
CSA
CSB

20.4 (0.94)
24V
+DC
PRINTER

PORT B

PORT A

31 (1.22)
75 (2.95)
118 (4.65)

Units: mm (inch)

257

Dimensions

258

Appendix B

Appendix C
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter
This section outlines the external dimensions, procedure for mounting and removal, and specifications of an
RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter (NT-AL001-E). Refer to this information when designing the control panel. For
details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the NT-AL001-E.

Dimensions
53.5
(2.11)

110 (4.33)

omR on

4 (0.16)

74.5 (2.93)
100.2 (3.94)
105 (4.13) max.

NT-AL001-E

(30)
(1.18)
45 (1.77)

30 (1.18)

Units: mm (inch)

30 (W) × 114 (H) × 100.2 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover closed
30 (W) × 114 (H) × 119.5 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover open

Methods for Mounting and Removal
The RS-232/RS-422 Adapter (NT-AL001-E) can be mounted on a DIN rail or in an operation panel.
The RS-422A terminal block of the Adapter can be easily removed.

Mounting to a DIN Rail
Latch the top part of the rear face of the Adapter (a in the figure) onto the top edge of the DIN rail, and push the
PT in the direction indicated by b in the figure.
Now fit end plates at the right and left of the Adapter to secure it and ensure that it cannot shift laterally.

(a)

(b)

259

Appendix C

Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter

Removal from a DIN Rail
Remove the end plates at right and left of the Adapter and, as shown in the figure below, insert a flat-blade
screwdriver into the rail stopper at the bottom face of the Adapter and pry it free.

Mounting to an Operation Panel
Drill two mounting screw holes in an operation panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm (0.08 inch) and secure
the Adapter with screws.
30
(1.18)

100
(3.94)

110
(4.33)

21
(0.83)

Two, M4
Units: mm (inch)

Note In order to ensure a secure and strong mount, mount the Adapter in an operation panel with a thickness
of at least 2 mm (0.08 inch).

260

Appendix C

Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter

Specifications
The general specifications and communications specifications of the Adapter are shown below.

General Specifications
Item
Dimensions

Specification
30 (W) × 114 (H) × 100.2 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover closed
30 (W) × 114 (H) × 119.5 (D) mm: with the RS-422A terminal block cover open

Weight
Operating ambient temperature

200 g max.
0 to 55°C

Operating ambient humidity
Rated power supply voltage

10 to 90% RH (with no condensation)
+5 V ± 10% (using pin No. 6 of the RS-232C connector)

Rated power supply current
Rush current

150 mA max.
0.8 A max.

Insulation resistance

20 MΩ or higher, measured between all RS-422A terminal signal lines collectively and
functional ground terminal at 500 VDC

Dielectric strength

1500 VAC for 1 minute between all RS-422A terminal signal lines collectively and
functional ground terminal
Leakage current: 10 mA max.
No corrosive gases

Operating environment
Storage ambient temperature
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance

−20 to +75°C
10 to 57 Hz with 0.075-mm single amplitude and 57 to 150 Hz at 9.8 m/s2 for 60 minutes each in X, Y, and Z directions
147 m/s2 3 times each in X,Y, and Z directions

Communications Specifications
RS-232C Interface
Item

Specification

Communications speed
Transmission distance

Max. 64k bps
Max. 2 m

Connector

9-pin D-SUB connector (female)

RS-422A/485 Interface
Item
Communications speed

Specification
Max. 64k bps (depends on the RS-232C communications speed)

Transmission distance
Connector

Max. 500 m
8-terminal detachable terminal block, M3.0

DIP Switch Settings
The Adapter has 6 digits DIP switch for setting the RS-422A/485 communications conditions.
Before connecting the cable to the Adapter, make the DIP switch settings.

261

Appendix C

Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter

(Factory settings)

om on

1 2 3 4 5 6

NT-AL001-E

[SW1-1] Not used (always ON)
[SW1-2] Setting for built-in terminal resistance
- OFF Terminator not set
- ON Terminator set
[SW1-3, 4] Selection of 2-wire type/4-wire type
SW1-3 SW1-4
OFF
2-wire type (RS-485)
ON
SW1-3 SW1-4
OFF
4-wire type (RS-422A)
ON
[SW1-5, 6] Selection of the RS-422A send mode
SW1-5 SW1-6
OFF
Continual sending
ON
SW1-5 SW1-6
OFF
Complies with CS control of RS-232C
ON
(Data sent at CS H)
SW1-5 SW1-6
OFF
Complies with CS control of RS-232C
ON
(Data sent at CS L)

When using the host link or NT link (1:1), set the RS-422A send mode to continual sending (set both SW1-5
and 6 OFF).
When using the NT link (1:N), set the RS-422A send mode to complies with CS control of RS-232C (i.e., one of
SW1-5 and SW1-6 must be ON).
Note

(1) Do not set both SW1-5 and SW1-6 ON at the same time. This may damage internal circuits.
(2) The power supply to the device supplying +5 V must be turned OFF before starting wiring work.
(3) Before connecting the RS-232C cable and turning on the power to an RS-232C device such as a
PT (i.e., turning on the power to the Adapter), check that the cable is wired correctly and that the
DIP switch settings are correct. If the power is turned on while there is a wiring fault, the internal
circuits of the Adapter or the RS-232C device may be damaged.
(4) When the Adapter is connected to an OMRON C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1H, or CS/CJ-series
PLC as an RS-422A device, set DIP switches SW1-5 and SW1-6 as indicated below.
SW1-5
OFF
5 6

262

SW1-6
ON

Appendix C

Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter

Pin Arrangement
The Adapter has a terminal block for an RS-422A/485 interface connection and a connector for an RS-232C
interface connection.
The pin arrangements for the RS-422A/485 terminal block and the RS-232C connector are as follows.

RS-422A/485 Terminal Block
Terminal
block pin
No.
7
5
3
1

8
6
4
2

Signal name

Abbreviation

Signal direction
(Adapter ⇔ RS-422 device)

8
7

Request to send (−)
Request to send (+)

CSA
CSB

→
→

6
5

Receive data (−)
Receive data (+)

RDA
RDB

←
←

4
3

Send data (−)
Send data (+)

SDA
SDB

→
→

2
1

Signal ground
Functional ground

SG (GND)

–
–

* The CSB and CSA signals are for specialized applications.

RS-232C Connector

1
2
3
4
5

Connector
pin No.
1

Not used

–

Signal direction
(Adapter ⇔ RS-232C device)
–

Send data
Receive data

SD
RD

←
→

Request to send
(shorted to CS internally)

←

Clear to send
(shorted to RS internally)

→

6
7

+5 V (150 mA) input for Adapter
Data set ready
(shorted to ER internally)

+5 V
DR

→
→

Data terminal ready
(shorted to DR internally)

←

Signal ground

–

6 2
7 3
8 4
9

Signal name

Abbreviation

* The hood is connected to the functional ground terminal of the RS-422A terminal block.

263

Appendix C

Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter

Block Diagram
A diagram showing the internal blocks of the Adapter is shown below. Refer to this diagram when making
cables yourself, or when connecting devices with special interfaces.
RS-232C side
D-SUB 9P CASE

+5 V

6 Fuse

POWER
LED

DC-DC Convertor
L

Photocoupler

IS_5 V

IS_0 V

3
4

SDB
SDA

REG

RS-232C
Dr/Rec
RD

2-wire type/
4-wire type

SW1-6
SW1-3

SD
RS

264

RS-422A/485 side
8P terminal block

RS-422A/485 Dr/Rec

SW1-4

SW1-5

Terminator

RDB

RDA

7
8

CSB
CSA

SW1-2

RS-422A Dr

Appendix D
Transporting and Storing the NT631/NT631C
• When transporting the NT631/NT631C, use the packaging intended for it.
• When storing the NT631/NT631C, observe the following conditions.
Storage ambient temperature:

–20 to +60°C

Storage ambient humidity:

35% to 85%

265

Transporting and Storing the NT631/NT631C

266

Appendix D

Appendix E
Making the Cable
The procedure for making up the cable is described below.
Also refer to this procedure for making a connecting cable for use with RS-422A/485 connections.

Cable Preparation
The preparation of the cable differs according to whether or not the shielding wire is to be connected to the FG.

Cable with Shielding Wire Connected to FG
1,2,3....
1. Cut the cable to the required length.
2. Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the shielding
underneath.
3. Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.
4. Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.
5. Fold back the shielding wire.
6. Wrap aluminum foil tape around the folded-back shielding wire.
(1)
(2)
40 (1.57) (RS-232C)
25 (0.98) (RS-422A)
(3)
10
(0.39)
(4)
5
(0.19)
(5)
(6)
Units: mm (inch)

Aluminum foil tape

Cable with Shielding Wire Not Connected to FG
1,2,3...
1. Cut the cable to the required length.
2. Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the shielding
underneath.
3. Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.
4. Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.
5. Wrap vinyl tape over the cut off end of the shielding wire.

267

Appendix E

Making the Cable
(1)
(2)
40 (1.57) (RS-232C)
25 (0.98) (RS-422A)
(3)

(4)
5
(0.19)
(5)

Units: mm (inch)

Vinyl tape

Soldering
1,2,3...
1. Slide heat-shrink tube over each wire.
2. Pre-solder each wire and connector terminal.
3. Solder each wire to each connector terminal.

1 mm

Soldering iron

Heat-shrink tube
(F, 1.5 mm dia., l = 10 mm)

4. Push the heat shrink tube over the soldered joint and heat the tube to shrink it in place.

Heat-shrink tube

268

Appendix E

Making the Cable

Hood Assembly
Assemble the connector hood as shown below.

Aluminum foil tape
End connected to FG

End not connected to FG

269

Making the Cable

270

Appendix E

Appendix F
Making the Cable for Connecting a PLC
Refer to the following when making a cable for connecting the Support Tool.

Assembly of Connecting Cables
Wiring should be carried out in one of the following ways, depending on the type of RS-232C connector.

25-pin Connector
SD
RD
Personal computer

RS
CS
SG
FG

SD
RD
RS

Connector for peripheral devices on PT

CS
SG

Shielding wire

Connector hood

Note Connect a shielding wire to the connector hood of the connectors both at the personal computer end
and the PT end.
Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable.
Name

Model

Remarks

Connector

XM2D-2501
XM2A-0901

25-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer side
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT side

Connector hood

XM2S-2511
XM2S-0911

25-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer side
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT side

Cable

AWG28×5P IFVV-SB
CA-MA-VV-SB 5P×28AWG

Multi-core shielded cable, made by Fujikura Ltd.
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.

9-pin Connector
RD
SD
Personal computer

RS
CS
SG

SD
RD
RS

Connector for peripheral devices on PT

CS
SG

Shielding wire
Connector hood
Connector hood

Note Connect a shielding wire to the connector hood of the connectors both at the personal computer end
and the PT end.

271

Appendix F

Making the Cable for Connecting a PLC
Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable.
Name
Connector

XM2D-0901

Model

Remarks
9-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer

Connector hood*

XM2A-0901
XM2S-0911

9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT
9-pin, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON

Cable

XM2S-0913
AWG28×5P IFVV-SB

9-pin, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Fujikura Ltd.

CA-MA-VV-SB 5P×28AWG

Multi-core shielded cable, made by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.

* One XM2S-0911 (for PT) and either one XM2S-0911 or -0913 (for your personal computer) are needed.

272

Appendix G
Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar
Code Reader
Refer to the following when making the cable for connection to a bar code reader.

Wiring Method
NT631/NT631C side
Abbr.

RS-232C
interface

Pin No.

Bar code reader side
Abbr.

+5 V

When using the +5 V output of serial port A of the NT631/NT631C, limit the cable length to within 2 m. If a
cable longer than 2 m is used, connect an external power supply to the bar code reader.

Connector and Related Parts
Use the parts which are specified by bar code reader and following recommended products when making the
connecting cable.
Name

Model

Remarks

Connector
Connector hood

XM2A-0901
XM2S-0911

9-pin type, made by OMRON, PT side
9-pin, made by OMRON

Cable

AWG28×5P IFVV-SB
CA-MA-VV-SB 5P×28AWG

Multi-core shielded cable, made by Fujikura Ltd.
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.

273

Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar Code Reader

274

Appendix G

Appendix H
Making the Cable for Connection to a Printer
The following product is recommended as the cable for connecting a printer.
NT-CNT121 (made by OMRON, cable length 1.5 m, 20-pin – 36-pin)
Refer to the following when making a cable for connection to a printer.
• Connector pin arrangement and wiring
Connector for a printer
on PT side
11

Abbr.
0V

Connector hood
1

N.C.

Printer side
Pin No.

Shielding wire

Pin No.

Connector hood
20

N.C

N.C.

STROB

N.C.

BUSY

275

Making the Cable for Connection to a Printer

276

Appendix H

Appendix I
Relationship between system program and
hardware
Here, relationship between system program and hardware is described.
System programs indicated below are installed for the models shown above in the default state. Also, system
programs are supplied with the Support Tool as follows.
Model
NT631-ST211@-E

History
Conventional product

NT631C-ST141@-E
NT631C-ST151@-E
NT631-ST211@-EV1
NT631C-ST141@-EV1
NT631C-ST151@-EV1
NT631-ST211@-EV2
NT631C-ST141@-EV2
NT631C-ST151@-EV2

Version upgrade of the
above products
(December 1998)
Version upgrade of the
above products
(December 1999)

NT631C-ST152@-EV2

Version upgrade of the
above products
(October 2004)

NT631C-ST153@-EV3

Version upgrade of the
above products
(September 2006)

System program
System Program version 1.@ Same for pre-version-1 and
version-2 hardware, but
(supplied with the
there are restrictions to
NT-ZJCMX1-EV2)
some functions depending
on the hardware version that
System Program version
is installed.
2.0@ or 2.1@
(supplied with the
NT-ZJCMX1-EV3)
System Program version
3.0@ or 3.1@
(supplied with the
NT-ZJCMX1-V4.00)
System Program version
3.1@
(supplied with the
NT-ZJCMX1-V4.05)
System Program version
4.1@
(supplied with the
NT-ZJCMX1-V4.08)

Only for hardware for version-3 (EV3) PTs. Cannot be
installed with pre-version-1
or version-2 hardware.

Note NT System Installer version 2.0 or higher is required to transfer the NT631-EV3-compatible system program. (NT System Installer version 2.0 is provided with the NT-series Support Tool version 4.08 or
higher.)
These system programs have mutual compatibility, therefore, they can be installed and used for NT631ST211@-E/NT631C-ST141-E/NT631C-ST151@-E, NT631-ST211@-EV1/NT631C-ST141@-EV1/NT631CST151@-EV1, and NT631-ST211@-EV2/NT631C-ST141@-EV2/NT631C-ST151@-EV2/NT631C-ST152@-EV2
each.
However, there will be a limitation on function depending on the combination. Refer to the following table.
System program version 4.0@ is only for NT631C-ST153@-EV3. The system program cannot be installed in
pre-version-2 hardware. System program earlier than Ver. 3.1@ cannot be installed in NT631C-ST153@-EV3.
The following table shows only the relationship between the hardware and system program.
For details of the relationship with the screen data created using the Support Tool, refer to NT-series Support
Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.@) Operation Manual (V061-E1-@).

277

Appendix I

Relationship between system program and hardware

Combining a -EV1 Version and Version without a -EV@ Suffix
Hardware
NT631-ST211@-E
NT631C-ST141@-E
NT631C-ST151@-E
System program Ver. 1.0@

System program Ver. 2.0@ or
Ver. 2.1@

The following functions can not be used:
• Installation of system programs using
Memory Unit
• High-definition font display
• Refer to the following table for details on
new functions supported by the -V2 versions.

NT631-ST211@-EV1
NT631C-ST141@-EV1
NT631C-ST151@-EV1
The following functions can not be used:
• Analogue meter
• High-definition font display
• Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs
• Memory link
• Window control from the host
• Multiple display of window screens
• Moving a window
• Refer to the following table for details on
new functions supported by the -V2 versions.
* Installation of system programs using
Memory Unit is possible.
The new functions supported by the -V2
versions cannot be used. Refer to the following table for details.

* The system program’s version can be checked from the System Menu.

Combining a -EV1 Version and -EV2 Version

System program Ver. 2.0@ or
Ver. 2.1@

System program Ver. 3.0@

Hardware
NT631-ST211@-EV1
NT631-ST211@-EV2
NT631C-ST141@-EV1
NT631C-ST141@-EV2
NT631C-ST151@-EV1
NT631C-ST151/152@-EV2
The following functions (new functions supported by the -V2) cannot be used:
• Additional data areas accessible in CS/CJ-series PLCs
• The CS/CJ-series high-speed 1:N NT Link
• Interlock function that controls touch switches, numeral inputs, and character string
inputs
• Mathematical function
• Device Monitor function
• NT30/620 compatible mode
• Expanded capabilities for label (guide character) displays, including multiple lines of
text, ON/OFF switching displays, numeral memory table displays, and character string
memory table displays
All of the functions described in the Setup Manual and Reference Manual can be used.

* The system program’s version can be checked from the System Menu.

278

Appendix I

Relationship between system program and hardware

Combining a -EV2 Version and Version without a -EV@ Suffix
Hardware
NT631-ST211@-E
NT631C-ST141@-E
NT631C-ST151@-E

NT631-ST211@-EV2
NT631C-ST141@-EV2
NT631C-ST151/152@-EV2

System program Ver. 1.0@

The following functions cannot be used:
• Analogue meter
• High-definition font display
• Installation of system programs using
Memory Unit
• Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs
• Memory link
• Window control from the host
• Multiple display of window screens
• Moving a window
• Additional data areas accessible in CS/
CJ-series PLCs
• The CS/CJ-series high-speed 1:N NT
Link
• Interlock function that controls touch
switches, numeral inputs, and character
string inputs
• Mathematical function
• Device Monitor function
• NT30/620 compatible mode
• Expanded capabilities for label (guide
character) displays, including multiple
lines of text, ON/OFF switching displays,
numeral memory table displays, and
character string memory table displays

System program Ver. 3.0@

The following functions can not be used:
• Installation of system programs using
Memory Unit
• High-definition font display

The following functions cannot be used:
• Analogue meter
• High-definition font display
• Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs
• Memory link
• Window control from the host
• Multiple display of window screens
• Moving a window
• Additional data areas accessible in CS/
CJ-series PLCs
• The CS/CJ-series high-speed 1:N NT
Link
• Interlock function that controls touch
switches, numeral inputs, and character
string inputs
• Mathematical function
• Device Monitor function
• NT30/620 compatible mode
• Expanded capabilities for label (guide
character) displays, including multiple
lines of text, ON/OFF switching displays,
numeral memory table displays, and
character string memory table displays
* Installation of system programs using
Memory Unit is possible.
All of the functions described in the Setup
Manual and Reference Manual can be
used.

* The system program’s version can be checked from the System Menu.

279

Relationship between system program and hardware

280

Appendix I

Appendix J
Model List
PTs
Model
NT631-ST211-EV2

Specification
High-intensity EL display (yellow), beige

NT631-ST211B-EV2
NT631C-ST141-EV2

High-intensity EL display (yellow), black
STN color display, beige

NT631-ST141B-EV2
NT631C-ST153-EV3

STN color display, black
High-intensity STN color display, beige

NT631C-ST153B-EV3

High-intensity STN color display, black

Host Link Units
Model
3G2A6-LK201-EV1

Specification
CPU-mounting Unit with RS-232C connector

Applicable PLC
C-series
C1000H
C2000H

3G2A6-LK202-EV1

CPU-mounting Unit with RS-422A connector

C200H-LK201-V1
C200H-LK202-V1

Rack-mounting Unit with RS-232C connector for C200H
Rack-mounting Unit with RS-422A connector for C200H

C-series
C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E

3G2A5-LK201-EV1

Features a selectable RS-232C/RS-422A connector

C-series
C1000H
C2000H

C500-LK203

Rack-mounting Unit for C500

CV500-LK201

Features an RS-232C connector and a selectable RS-232C/
RS-422A connector
Rack-mounting Unit for CVM1/CV

C-series
C1000H(F)
C2000H
CVM1/CV-series
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1

CompoBus/S Master Control Unit
Model
SRM1-C02-V2

Specification
Features an RS-232C port

Model Name
SRM1

Communications Unit
Model

Specification

CS1W-SCU21(-V1)

RS-232C (2 ports)
Rack-mounting Unit

CS1W-SCU31-V1

RA-422A/485 (2 ports)
Rack-mounting Unit

CJ1W-SCU21(-V1)
CJ1W-SCU31-V1

RS-232C (2 ports)
RA-422A/485 (2 ports)

CJ1W-SCU41(-V1)

RS-232C (1 port)
RA-422A/485 (1 port)

Applicable PLC
CS-series
CS1G/H/D

CJ-series
CJ1G/H/M

281

Appendix J

Model List

CPU Units for Connection via a Host Link
Model
CPM1-10CDR-@
CPM1-20CDR-@
CPM1A-10CD@-@
CPM1A-20CD@-@
CPM1A-30CD@-@
CPM1A-40CD@-@

Specification
RS-232C adapter/RS-422A adapter connected to the
peripheral port

PLC Type
C-series
CPM1

CPM2A-30CD@@-@
CPM2A-40CD@@-@
CPM2A-60CD@@-@

Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections

C-series
CPM2A

CPM2C-10@@@@@@-@
CPM2C-20@@@@@@-@

The PLC’s communications connector can be split into an
RS-232C port and peripheral port with a CPM2C-CN111
Connecting Cable. (The CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting
Cables convert the connector to a single RS-232C or
peripheral port.)

C-series
CPM2C

CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1

Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections

C-series
CQM1

CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E

Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
(The CQM1H-CPU11-E has only a peripheral port.)

C-series
CQM1H

C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/ C-series
9-pin)
C200HE(-Z)E

C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/ C-series
9-pin)
C200HG(-Z)E

C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H
CS1D-CPU65H/67H
CJ1G-CPU44/45
CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H
CJ1M-CPU11/12/13/21/22/23

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/ C-series
9-pin)
C200HX(-Z)E

CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/ CVM1/CV-series
9-pin)
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/ C-series
9-pin)
C200HS

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)

CS-series
CS1G/H/D

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)

CJ-series
CJ1G/H/M

* Either of the Communications Boards C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1 is required.

282

Appendix J

Model List

CPU Units for Connection via a 1:1 NT Link
Model
CPM1-10CDR-@
CPM1-20CDR-@
CPM1A-10CD@-@
CPM1A-20CD@-@
CPM1A-30CD@-@
CPM1A-40CD@-@

Specification
RS-232C adapter connected to the peripheral port
(RS-422A adapter cannot be used.)

PLC Type
C-series
CPM1

CPM2A-30CD@@-@
CPM2A-40CD@@-@
CPM2A-60CD@@-@

Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections

C-series
CPM2A

CPM2C-10@@@@@@-@
CPM2C-20@@@@@@-@

Connect to the RS-232C port of a CPM2C-CN111 Connecting
Cable.

C-series
CPM2C

CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61

Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections

C-series
CQM1

Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections

C-series
CQM1H

C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin) C-series
C200HS

C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin) C-series
C200HE(-Z)E

C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin) C-series
C200HG(-Z)E

C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin) C-series
C200HX(-Z)E

CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin) CVM1/CV-series
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1

* Either of the Communications Boards C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1 is required.

283

Appendix J

Model List

CPU Units for Connection via a 1:N NT Link
Model
(*1)

CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61(*1)
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*2)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*2)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E

Specification
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)

PLC Type
C-series
CQM1H

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/ C-series
9-pin)
C200HE(-Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/ C-series
9-pin)
C200HG(-Z)E

C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*2)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/ C-series
9-pin)
C200HX(-Z)E

CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H
CS1D-CPU65H/67H

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)

CS-series
CS1G/H/D

CJ1G-CPU44/45
CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H
CJ1M-CPU11/12/13/21/22/23

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)

CJ-series
CJ1G/H/M

*1: A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.
*2: Either of the Communications Boards C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1 is required.

CPU Units for Connection via a High-speed NT Link (1:N)
Model

Specification

PLC Type

CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H
CS1D-CPU65H/67H

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)

CS-series
CS1G/H/D

CJ1G-CPU44/45
CJ1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CJ1H-CPU65H/66H/67H
CJ1M-CPU11/12/13/21/22/23

Features a connector for RS-232C connections (9-pin)

CJ-series
CJ1G/H/M

Reference: CS-series PLCs earlier than versions -V1 and H, and Serial Communications Boards and Units
and Serial Communications Units with lot number 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the highspeed 1:N NT Link. Boards and Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.

284

Appendix J

Model List

RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter
Model
NT-AL001

Specification
RS-232C: 9-pin connector
RS-422A: 8-pin terminal block

RS-232C Adaptor, RS-422A Adaptor
Model
CPM1-CIF01

Specification
Links the RS-232C port of an NT631/NT631C and the peripheral port of a CPM1,
CPM2A, CPM2C, or SRM1 (compatible with host link, and NT Link (1:1))
Links the RS-422A port of an NT631/NT631C and the peripheral port of a CPM1,
CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1 (compatible with host link)

CPM1-CIF11

Related Parts and Equipment for PT
Name
Support Tool*

Model
NT-ZJCAT1-EV4

Remark
Compatible with PC/AT personal computers
For Windows 95/98/NT4.0/2000/XP (English version)
CD-ROM

Options

NT631C-CFL01
NT631C-CFL02

Replaceable backlight (for NT631C-ST151@-EV1)
Replaceable backlight (for NT631C-ST141@-EV1)

NT610C-KBA04
NT625-KBA01

Reflection suppressing protective sheet for NT631/NT631C
Chemical-resistant cover for NT631/NT631C

NT-MF261
3G2A9-BAT08

Memory Unit for NT631/NT631C
Spare battery

Reference: The Support Tool indicated above includes the system installer and the standard system programs
(Ver. 3.@/Ver. 4.@) for the NT31, NT31C, NT631, and NT631C. System programs for the earlier
NT30/620 PTs are also included.

Cables with Connectors for PT ↔ PLC/NT-AL001
Model
XW2Z-200S

Cable Length
2m

XW2Z-500S
XW2Z-200T

5m
2m

XW2Z-500T
XW2Z-S002

5m
2m

Applicable Units
Communications Method
Host Link Units with a 25-pin con- Serial port A host link
nector
(RS-232C only)

Specification
9-pin ↔ 25-pin

Host lInk Units with a 9-pin connector

Serial port A host link, NT link
(1:1) (RS-232C only)

9-pin ↔ 9-pin

Personal computer with a 9-pin
connector

Serial port A for using NT Support Tool

9-pin ↔ 9-pin

Note The following PLCs can supply +5 V: C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1H, CPM2A, CPM2C, CS1G/H/D, and
CJ1G/H/M.

285

Appendix J

Model List

Cables with Connectors for Connecting PT and Personal Computer
Model
CV500-CN228
XW2Z-S002

Cable Length

Specification
25-pin (male) ↔ 9-pin (male)
9-pin (female) ↔ 9-pin (male)

2m
2m

Connection Cable
Model
AWG28×5P IFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P×28AWG

Specification
Multicore cable, manufactured by Fujikura, Ltd.
Multicore cable, manufactured by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.

Applicable Connectors
Name
Connector

Connector hood

Model

Specification

XM2A-2501
XM2D-2501

25-pin type (male), made by OMRON
25-pin type (female), made by OMRON (for personal computers)

XM2A-0901
XM2D-0901

9-pin type (male), made by OMRON
9-pin type (female), made by OMRON (for personal computers)

DB-25P
XM2S-2511

25-pin type (male), made by JAE
25-pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON

XM2S-2513
XM2S-0911

25-pin type, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON
9-pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON

XM2S-0911-E 9-pin type, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON
XM2S-0913
9-pin type, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON
DB-C2-J9

25-pin type, made by JAE

Printer Cable
Model
NT-CNT121

Specification
Printer cable for half pitch (1.5 m), made by OMRON

Cable for Peripheral Port of CS/CJ-series PLC
Model
CS1W-CN118

Specification
Made by OMRON (CS-series peripheral port ↔ D-sub, 9-pin, female)

Connecting Cable for the CPM2C Communications Connector
Model
CPM2C-CN111

286

Specification
Made by OMRON (CPM2C communications port ↔ D-sub, 9-pin, female, C-series peripheral port)

Appendix K
Option List
Replaceable Backlights ... NT631C-CFL01 (for NT631C-ST151@-EV2)
These are backlights for NT631C for replacement purposes. Two pieces make a set.

Replaceable Backlights ... NT631C-CFL02 (for NT631C-ST141@-EV2)

Protective Sheet ... NT610C-KBA04
Stuck to the display to prevent irregular reflection or contamination. The entire sheet is colorless and transparent. The five sheets make a set.

287

Appendix K

Option List

Chemical-resistant Cover ... NT625-KBA01
Covers the front panel and protects it from various chemical agents. The entire sheet is milky white and made
of silicone rubber.

The sheet offers protection against the following chemical agents.
Protects against
Boric acid
Sulfuric acid
Nitrogen
Ammonia gas
Carbonic acid gas
Phenol
Glycerin
Ammonia water
Calcium chloride
Developing fluid (hypo)
Acetaldehyde
Lard

Does not protect against
Hexane
Lubricating oil
Benzene
Butane
Carbonic acid
Chlorinated solvents
Napthalene
Soy bean oil
Toluene

For information on chemical agents not listed in the table above, please inquire whether or not protection is
offered (if the chemical agent is one against which silicone rubber is recognized as offering protection, please
use this product even if the agent is not listed in the “Protects against” column of the table above).

Replacement Battery ... 3G2A9-BAT08
This is a lithium battery used for memory backup.

288

Option List

Appendix K

Memory Unit ... NT-MF261
This is a dedicated unit for reading/writing the screen data and the system programs in an NT631/NT631C.
Data is transmitted by DIP switch setting at the Memory Unit.

289

Option List

290

Appendix K

Index
Numerics
1:N connection among RS-422A ports, 119
1:N connection among RS-485 ports, 121
1:N connection between RS-422A/485 at the NT631/
NT631C and RS-232C at the host, 86

Comm. A Method, 153
Comm. B Method, 153
Comm. B Select, 153
Communications Board, 62, 66, 70, 95
Communications Boards, 106
Communications by Using Memory Link, 21
Communications condition, 152

A
Allowable power supply voltage range, 245

Communications condition settings for bar code readers,
184

Applicable connectors, 286

Communications condition settings for the host link method,
153

Automatic transmission (memory unit), 41

Communications errors and their remedies, 233

Communications method for communications with the host,
152
Communications method settings, 154

Backlight (for NT631C only), 235

Communications methods, 26

Backlight brightness adjustment, 189

Communications port, 26

Battery cover, 30

Communications specifications, 250

Before operating, 23

Communications type, 26
Communications Unit, 281

Comparison between NT631 and NT631C, 7
Connecting a bar code reader, 36

Cable connection dimensions, 257

Connecting a printer, 36

Cable for peripheral port of CS1-series PLC, 286

Connecting directly between RS-232C ports, 73

Cables with connectors, 285

Connecting to other model PLCs, 21

Calling the System Installer mode, 134

Connecting to the Support Tool, 35

Calling the System Menu, 133

Connection cable, 286

Cell size (Touch panel), 248

Connection method, 26

Changing the system settings, 147

Contrast adjustment, 187

Checking communications at serial ports, 210

CPU Unit, 95

Checking communications with a printer, 213

CPU Units, 62, 66, 70, 106, 108, 112

Checking communications with the Support Tool, 209

CPU Units (for connection via a host link), 282

Checking interfaces, 209

CPU Units connectable with Host Link Units or Communications Board, 95

Checking screen data, 198
Checking the backlight (for NT631 only), 204
Checking the battery voltage, 208
Checking the buzzer, 202
Checking the LCD (screen display), 204
Checking the PT setting status, 193
Checking the RUN LED, 203
Checking touch switches, 207
Chemical-resistant cover, 288
Cleaning method, 242
Clearing screen data, 135, 148
Clearing/installing the system program, 145

D
Device check, 201
Device Monitor function, 220
Dimensions, 245
Direct connection function, 18
Disabling/enabling System Menu display, 147
Disabling/enabling writing to the screen data memory, 147
Display, 29
Display color, 247
Display device, 247

291

Index
Display specifications, 247

Installation environment, 32

Displaying and printing the display history record, 194

Installation in the operation panel, 32

Displaying/setting the calendar and clock, 191
Downloading the system program, 146

E
Effective display area, 247

L
Life expectancy (backlight), 247
Life expectancy (display panel), 247
Life expectancy (touch panel), 248

Enclosure ratings, 245
Error messages, 229
Errors in the system installer mode and their remedies, 232

Errors occurring at start of operation, 229

Maintenance Mode, 132

Errors occurring during operation, 231

Making the cable, 267

Errors occurring on screen data initialization and transmission, 232

Making the cable for connecting a PLC, 271
Making the cable for connection to a bar code reader, 273

Errors when using a memory unit, 45

Making the cable for connection to a printer, 275

Expansion interface connector, 30

Manual transmission (memory unit), 43

Expansion Mode, 132

Manuals, 23

External interface specifications, 248, 249

Memory initialization, 135
Memory link method, 73, 114

F
Functional ground terminal, 34

Memory switch, 152
Memory switch setting screen, 164
Memory unit, 289
Menu tree, 132

G
General specifications, 245
GR terminal, 30
Grounding, 34, 245

Mounting dimensions, 256

N
Noise resistance, 245
NT link, 19

NT link (1:1) method, 61

Host link, 19

NT link (1:N) method, 65, 108
high-speed, 70, 112

Host link method, 48, 94

NT-AL001, 259

Host link unit, 48, 281

Number of dots, 247
Number of switches (touch panel), 248

I
I/O settings, 187

In the panel, 4

Operating ambient humidity, 245

Initializing alarm history record data, 138

Operating ambient temperature, 245

Initializing display history record data, 137

Operating environment, 245

Initializing the memory switches, 143

Operating force, 248

Initializing the memory tables, 141

Operation at startup, 129

Initializing the recipe tables, 140

Operation modes, 130

Inspection method, 243

292

Index

Serial port B, 18, 26
Serial port B connector, 30

Peripheral devices that can be connected, 17

Set, 155

Power consumption, 245

Setting "Screen Saver Movement", 170

Power input terminals, 30

Setting the "Buzzer Sound", 166

POWER LED, 29

Setting the "Key Press Sound", 166

Power supply connection, 33

Setting the "Print Method", 169

precautions, xv

Setting the "Printer Controller", 168

Precautions to be observed when transmitting screen data,
151

Setting the "Start-up Wait Time", 165

Principal Functions of NT631/NT631C, 10
Printer cable, 286
Printer connector, 30
Programming console function, 214
Programming environment, 249

Setting the automatic reset function, 179
Setting the bar code reader input function, 184
Setting the communications type for serial port B, 162
Setting the conditions for communications with the memory
link method, 153

Protective sheet, 287

Setting the display language in the System Installer mode,
144

PT, 281

Setting the history display method, 175
Setting the host link method, 155

Setting the Memory Link Method, 160
Setting the NT link (1:1) method, 157

Rated power supply voltage, 245

Setting the NT link (1:N) method, 158

Recipe function, 6

Setting the resume function, 177

Recommended printers, 36

Setting the retry count, 182

Relationship between system program and hardware, 277

Setting the screen saver start-up time, 173

Relationships among modes, 130

Setting the terminal resistance, 92, 124

Replaceable backlight, 287

Setting the time-out interval, 181

Replacement battery, 288

Shock resistance (operating), 245

Replacing the backlight, 236

Special features, 249

Replacing the battery, 241

Starting operation, 163

Reset switch, 30

Starting the NT31/NT31C, 129

RS-232C adaptor, 285

Storage ambient temperature, 245

RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter, 81, 285

Support Tool, 285

RS-422A adaptor, 285

Switching from the System Menu to the RUN mode, 135

RUN, 130

Switching to the RUN mode, 163

RUN LED, 29

System configuration, 16

RUN mode, 130

System Installer Mode, 130
System Menu, 130

S
Screen data composition and transmission units, 150

Screen data memory check, 205

Terminal resistance setting terminals, 92

Selecting menu items, 134

Transmit Mode, 131

Serial Communications Board, 48, 66, 70, 94

Transmitting the screen data, 149

Serial Communications Unit, 48

Transporting and Storing the NT631/NT631C, 265

Serial port A, 18, 26
Serial port A connector, 30

293

Index

U
Usable systems (programming console function), 215
Using a Memory Unit (NT631/NT631C with V1), 39
Using an RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter, 259

V
Vibration resistance (operating), 245
View angle, 247

W
Warning label, 30
waterproof, 4
Weight, 245

294

Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.

Cat. No. V063-E1-03

Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code

Date

July 2000

Original production

Revised content

June 2004

CS1 was changed to CS, and the abbreviation for Programmable Controllers was unified to
PLC.
The following changes were also made.
Page 4: Added new models and details on battery replacement.
Page 5: Added new models to table.
Page 22: Corrected and added information on reference manuals to table.
Page 27: Added new models to table.
Page 32: Added information for new models to table, added note on recommended terminals,
removed Note 1, and also Fig.(a) from Note 3.
Page 36: Added new models to introduction for 3-5.
Pages 71 and 73: Added information on connecting the PT.
Page 76: Added CS-series PLC to diagram.
Page 79: Added information on cables for CS-series CPU Units.
Page 85: Changed information on shielding, and corrected diagram.
Page 86: Removed information on cables with connectors.
Page 87: Removed information on cables with connectors, and added information on cables for
CS-series CPU Units.
Pages 89, 90, and 91: Changed information on shielding, and corrected diagrams.
Pages 92 and 93: Removed information on cables with connectors.
Pages 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, and 120: Changed information on shielding, and
corrected diagrams.
Page 122: Added sub-section on shielding.
Page 140: Added information on System Installer mode versions.
Page 174: Corrected “0” to “1” in the time-out interval setting range.
Page 175: Removed 00 from the setting sequence in the diagram.
Page 183: Added new model numbers.
Page 213: Added information on CS1G/CS1H connections and changed “can” to “cannot” in
final paragraph.
Pages 214 and 219: Changed “can” to “cannot” in *1, and changed note on error screen.
Page 218: Changed note on error screen.
Page 229: Added information to touch switch operation.
Page 232: Added information on backlight replacement for new models.
Page 235: Changed “NT631C” to “PT” in step 1.
Page 239: Changed and added information in table on power supply voltage and backlight
brightness.
Page 241: Changed specifications tables to add information on new models, and added diagram.
Page 242: Changed specifications tables to add information on new models.
Page 243: Added model number.
Page 255: Changed “JIS C0911” to “JIS C0040” and “JIS C0912” to “JIS C0041” in table.
Page 263: Changed diagrams and added note.
Pages 269, 270, 271, and 273: Added model numbers.

September 2007

New models added, descriptions added, and errors corrected.

295

Revision History

296

Terms and Conditions of Sale
1. Offer; Acceptance. These terms and conditions (these "Terms") are deemed
part of all quotes, agreements, purchase orders, acknowledgments, price lists,
catalogs, manuals, brochures and other documents, whether electronic or in
writing, relating to the sale of products or services (collectively, the "Products")
by Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies (“Omron”). Omron
objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyer’s purchase order or other
documents which are inconsistent with, or in addition to, these Terms.
2. Prices; Payment Terms. All prices stated are current, subject to change without notice by Omron. Omron reserves the right to increase or decrease prices
on any unshipped portions of outstanding orders. Payments for Products are
due net 30 days unless otherwise stated in the invoice.
3. Discounts. Cash discounts, if any, will apply only on the net amount of invoices
sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges, taxes and duties, and will
be allowed only if (i) the invoice is paid according to Omron’s payment terms
and (ii) Buyer has no past due amounts.
4. Interest. Omron, at its option, may charge Buyer 1-1/2% interest per month or
the maximum legal rate, whichever is less, on any balance not paid within the
stated terms.
5. Orders. Omron will accept no order less than $200 net billing.
6. Governmental Approvals. Buyer shall be responsible for, and shall bear all
costs involved in, obtaining any government approvals required for the importation or sale of the Products.
7. Taxes. All taxes, duties and other governmental charges (other than general
real property and income taxes), including any interest or penalties thereon,
imposed directly or indirectly on Omron or required to be collected directly or
indirectly by Omron for the manufacture, production, sale, delivery, importation, consumption or use of the Products sold hereunder (including customs
duties and sales, excise, use, turnover and license taxes) shall be charged to
and remitted by Buyer to Omron.
8. Financial. If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory
to Omron, Omron reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory
security or payment in advance. If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise
comply with these Terms or any related agreement, Omron may (without liability and in addition to other remedies) cancel any unshipped portion of Products sold hereunder and stop any Products in transit until Buyer pays all
amounts, including amounts payable hereunder, whether or not then due,
which are owing to it by Buyer. Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all
unpaid accounts.
9. Cancellation; Etc. Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation
unless Buyer indemnifies Omron against all related costs or expenses.
10. Force Majeure. Omron shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery
resulting from causes beyond its control, including earthquakes, fires, floods,
strikes or other labor disputes, shortage of labor or materials, accidents to
machinery, acts of sabotage, riots, delay in or lack of transportation or the
requirements of any government authority.
11. Shipping; Delivery. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Omron:
a. Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Omron; Omron will not drop ship
except in “break down” situations.
b. Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier shall
constitute delivery to Buyer;
c. All sales and shipments of Products shall be FOB shipping point (unless otherwise stated in writing by Omron), at which point title and risk of loss shall
pass from Omron to Buyer; provided that Omron shall retain a security interest in the Products until the full purchase price is paid;
d. Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only; and
e. Omron will package Products as it deems proper for protection against normal handling and extra charges apply to special conditions.
12. Claims. Any claim by Buyer against Omron for shortage or damage to the
Products occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing
to Omron within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original transportation bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Products
from Omron in the condition claimed.
13. Warranties. (a) Exclusive Warranty. Omron’s exclusive warranty is that the
Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
twelve months from the date of sale by Omron (or such other period expressed
in writing by Omron). Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied.
(b) Limitations. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABIL-

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS.
BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE
PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of
any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products or otherwise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer Remedy. Omron’s sole obligation hereunder shall be, at Omron’s election, to (i) replace (in the form
originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or
replacement thereof) the non-complying Product, (ii) repair the non-complying
Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of
the non-complying Product; provided that in no event shall Omron be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding
the Products unless Omron’s analysis confirms that the Products were properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any Products by
Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment. Omron Companies shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the
use of Products in combination with any electrical or electronic components,
circuits, system assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing,
are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty.
See http://www.omron247.com or contact your Omron representative for published information.
Limitation on Liability; Etc. OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY
WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS
BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY.
Further, in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual
price of the Product on which liability is asserted.
Indemnities. Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron Companies and
their employees from and against all liabilities, losses, claims, costs and
expenses (including attorney's fees and expenses) related to any claim, investigation, litigation or proceeding (whether or not Omron is a party) which arises
or is alleged to arise from Buyer's acts or omissions under these Terms or in
any way with respect to the Products. Without limiting the foregoing, Buyer (at
its own expense) shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron and defend or settle any action brought against such Companies to the extent based on a claim
that any Product made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property
rights of another party.
Property; Confidentiality. Any intellectual property in the Products is the exclusive property of Omron Companies and Buyer shall not attempt to duplicate it
in any way without the written permission of Omron. Notwithstanding any
charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling, all engineering and tooling shall
remain the exclusive property of Omron. All information and materials supplied
by Omron to Buyer relating to the Products are confidential and proprietary,
and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and strictly
prevent disclosure to any third party.
Export Controls. Buyer shall comply with all applicable laws, regulations and
licenses regarding (i) export of products or information; (iii) sale of products to
“forbidden” or other proscribed persons; and (ii) disclosure to non-citizens of
regulated technology or information.
Miscellaneous. (a) Waiver. No failure or delay by Omron in exercising any right
and no course of dealing between Buyer and Omron shall operate as a waiver
of rights by Omron. (b) Assignment. Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder
without Omron's written consent. (c) Law. These Terms are governed by the
law of the jurisdiction of the home office of the Omron company from which
Buyer is purchasing the Products (without regard to conflict of law principles). (d) Amendment. These Terms constitute the entire agreement between
Buyer and Omron relating to the Products, and no provision may be changed
or waived unless in writing signed by the parties. (e) Severability. If any provision hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid, such provision shall not invalidate
any other provision. (f) Setoff. Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts
against the amount owing in respect of this invoice. (g) Definitions. As used
herein, “including” means “including without limitation”; and “Omron Companies” (or similar words) mean Omron Corporation and any direct or indirect
subsidiary or affiliate thereof.

Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use
1. Suitability of Use. Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity
with any standards, codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the
Product in the Buyer’s application or use of the Product. At Buyer’s request,
Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product. This information by
itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Product in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application
or use. Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of
the particular Product with respect to Buyer’s application, product or system.
Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases but the following is a
non-exhaustive list of applications for which particular attention must be given:
(i) Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical
interference, or conditions or uses not described in this document.
(ii) Use in consumer products or any use in significant quantities.
(iii) Energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations.
(iv) Systems, machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to this Product.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS
RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES WITHOUT
ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO

2.
3.

ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON’S PRODUCT IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE
OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
Programmable Products. Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the
user’s programming of a programmable Product, or any consequence thereof.
Performance Data. Data presented in Omron Company websites, catalogs
and other materials is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of Omron’s
test conditions, and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the Omron’s Warranty and Limitations
of Liability.
Change in Specifications. Product specifications and accessories may be
changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed,
or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the Product may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for
your application. Please consult with your Omron’s representative at any time
to confirm actual specifications of purchased Product.
Errors and Omissions. Information presented by Omron Companies has been
checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed
for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors or omissions.

OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 Commerce Drive
Schaumburg, IL 60173
847.843.7900
For US technical support or
other inquiries: 800.556.6766

OMRON CANADA, INC.
885 Milner Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M1B 5V8
416.286.6465

OMRON ON-LINE
Global - www.omron.com
USA - www.omron247.com
Canada - www.omron.ca
Brazil - www.omron.com.br
Latin America - www.espanol.omron.com

UNITED STATES
To locate a Regional Sales Office, local Distributor or
to obtain product information, call: 847.843.7900
MEXICO SALES OFFICES
Mexico, D.F.
Ciudad Juárez
Monterrey, N.L
Querétaro

555.660.3144
656.623.7083
818.377.4281
442.135.4510

BRAZIL SALES OFFICE
Sao Paulo

55.11.2101.6310

ARGENTINA SALES OFFICE
Cono Sur

54.114.787.1129

OTHER LATIN AMERICAN SALES
mela@omron.com
V063-E1-03

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0 (Windows)
Keywords                        : V063-E1-03
Create Date                     : 2007:10:12 19:55:23Z
Modify Date                     : 2008:02:08 13:50:18-06:00
Metadata Date                   : 2008:02:08 13:50:18-06:00
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 6.0
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : V063-E1-03.book
Creator                         : OMRON
Document ID                     : uuid:c393a559-74e4-43c7-830f-e447487af45e
Instance ID                     : uuid:9f284979-fbf4-4e54-8bec-bf985c1901b4
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 315
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Author                          : OMRON

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Omron Programmable Terminals Nt631 Users Manual V063 E1 03

NT631C to the manual aa37ab59-a39a-4337-8589-010d585574ea

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation